Dimension 3100 Manual

NanoScope Software Version 5

004-320-000 (standard)
004-320-100 (cleanroom)

Copyright © [2004] Veeco Instruments Inc.

All rights reserved.

Document Revision History: DImension 3100 Manual

Ref.
Revision Date Section(s) Affected Approval
DCR
D 03/09/04 All. N/A C. Kowalski

C 05/15/03 Fluid Cell N/A L. Burrows

B 06/01/00 All. 313 A. Varbel

A 08/25/97 Released. N/A M. Leilani

Notices: The information in this document is subject to change without notice. NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND IS MADE WITH REGARD TO
THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. No liability is assumed for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this material. This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. No part of this
document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without prior written consent.
Copyright: Copyright © 2004 Veeco Instruments Inc. All rights reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgments: The following are registered trademarks of Veeco Instruments Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.

Product Names:
NanoScope®
MultiMode™
Dimension™
BioScope™
Atomic Force Profiler™ (AFP™)
Dektak®

Software Modes:
TappingMode™
Tapping™
TappingMode+™
LiftMode™
AutoTune™
TurboScan™
Fast HSG™
PhaseImaging™
DekMap 2™
HyperScan™
StepFinder™
SoftScan™

Hardware Designs:
TrakScan™
StiffStage™

Hardware Options:
TipX®
Signal Access Module™ and SAM™
Extender™
TipView™
Interleave™
LookAhead™
Quadrex™

Software Options:
NanoScript™
Navigator™
FeatureFind™

Miscellaneous:
NanoProbe®
Table of Contents

Chapter 1 System Overview 1

1.1 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1 Dimension 3100 SPM Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Control Station Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.1 Input and Display Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.2 Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.3 NanoScope IIIa Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2.4 Dimension 3100 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3 Dimension 3100 SPM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3.1 Dimension 3100 Microscope Electronics Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3.2 Optics and Motors Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.3 Stage System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.4 Dimension SPM Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.5 Cantilever Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3.6 Video Zoom Microscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.4 Sample Size & Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.5 Facilities Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.6 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 2 Safety 17
2.1 Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.1 General Operator Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.2 Microscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.3 Sample Safeguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.3 Ergonomics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.4 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.5 Equipment Safety Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.5.1 Dimension 3100 SPM Facility Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.6 Power-up Sequence (Installation and Service Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.6.1 Pre Power-up Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual iii

 2.6.2 Turn on the Dimension 3100 SPM (Service and Installation Only) . . . . . . . 30
2.6.3 Power-up Checklist (Service and Installation Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.7 Power-Up Sequence (Normal Usage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.7.1 Prepare the System for Power-up (Normal Usage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.7.2 Power-up Checklist (Normal Usage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.8 Software Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.8.1 Log into Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.8.2 Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.8.3 Start the NanoScope Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.8.4 Select Realtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.8.5 Begin Stage Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.8.6 Software Power-up Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.9 Hazard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.9.1 Laser Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Chapter 3 Facilities Requirements 37

3.1 Optional Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.1.1 VT-103-3K with ELCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.1.2 VT-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.1.3 IS3K-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2 Facilities Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.3 Acoustic/Vibration Isolation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.3.1 IS3K-2 Dimensions, Utilities, and Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.3.2 VT-103-3K Dimensions, Utilities and Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.3.3 VT-102 Dimensions and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.3.4 Computer/Controller Facility Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.3.5 ELCON Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.4 Facilities Requirements Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.5 Acoustic/Vibration Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.6 General Facilities Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Chapter 4 Installation 53
4.1 Shipping and Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.1.1 Equipment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.2 Uncrating the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.1 Uncrate the Dimension 3100 SPM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.3 Installing the Dimension 3100 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.3.1 Install the Dimension 3100 SPM Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.3.2 Install the Control Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.4 Connecting the Dimension 3100 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.4.1 Dimension 3100 Control Station Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.4.2 Dimension 3100 Microscope External Components Connections . . . . . . . . 66
4.5 System Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

iv Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Chapter 5 Stage System 69
5.1 Mounting of Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.1.1 Vacuum Chucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.1.2 Magnetic Pucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.1.3 Axis Orientation Motorized X-Y Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.2 Stage Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.2.1 Load New Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.2.2 Locate Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.2.3 Focus Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.2.4 Move To (X,Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.2.5 Set Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.2.6 Programmed Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.2.7 Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.2.8 SPM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Chapter 6 Cantilever Preparation 87

6.1 Silicon Cantilever Substrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.1.1 Wafer Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.1.2 Cantilever Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.1.3 Tip Shape of Etched Silicon Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.2 Silicon Nitride Cantilever Substrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.2.1 Tip Shape of Silicon Nitride Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Chapter 7 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation 99

7.1 System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.1.1 Mouse versus Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.1.2 Motor Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.1.3 Laser Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
7.2 Basic AFM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
7.2.1 Select the Microscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
7.2.2 Select Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
7.2.3 Prepare the Cantilever Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
7.2.4 Load the Cantilever Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
7.2.5 Remove the Dimension SPM Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
7.2.6 Install the Cantilever Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
7.2.7 Replace the Dimension SPM Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
7.2.8 Connect the Dimension Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
7.2.9 Align Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
7.2.10 Adjust Photodetector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
7.2.11 Locate Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7.2.12 Load the Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.2.13 Focus Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.2.14 Cantilever Tune (TappingMode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.2.15 Set Initial Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.2.16 Engage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.2.17 Withdraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual v

 7.3 Advanced AFM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
7.3.1 Stage Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Chapter 8 Contact AFM 119

8.1 Basic Contact Mode AFM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.1.1 Select the Microscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.1.2 Select Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.1.3 Head, Cantilever and Sample Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.1.4 Align Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.1.5 Adjust Photodetector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.1.6 Locate Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.1.7 Focus Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.1.8 Show All Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.1.9 Set Initial Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
8.1.10 Engage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8.2 Advanced Atomic Force Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8.2.1 Cantilever Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8.3 Optimization of Scanning Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.3.1 Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.3.2 Gain Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.3.3 Scan Size and Scan Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.3.4 Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.3.5 Lowpass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.3.6 Highpass Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.4 Force Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Chapter 9 TappingMode AFM 131

9.1 Principles of TappingMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9.2 Basic TappingMode AFM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
9.2.1 Select Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
9.2.2 Head, Cantilever and Sample Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
9.2.3 Align Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
9.2.4 Adjust Photodetector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
9.2.5 Locate Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
9.2.6 Focus Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
9.2.7 Cantilever Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
9.2.8 Show All Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
9.2.9 Set Initial Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
9.2.10 Engage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
9.2.11 Optimize Scan Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.3 Withdraw the Tip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.4 Advanced TappingMode AFM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
9.4.1 Resonating Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
9.4.2 Cantilever Oscillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
9.4.3 Decreasing the Cantilever Drive Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
9.4.4 Optimization of Scanning Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

vi Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 9.4.5 Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
9.4.6 Gain Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
9.4.7 Scan Size, Scan Rate, and Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
9.4.8 Surface Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
9.5.1 Frequency Response Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
9.5.2 Engaging the Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
9.5.3 Cantilever Will Not Tune. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Chapter 10 Fluid Imaging 149

10.1 Basic Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.1.1 Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.2 Fluid Operation Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.2.1 Fluid Tip Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.2.2 Tip Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
10.2.3 Rubber Protective Skirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10.3 Sample Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10.3.1 General Notes on Sample Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10.3.2 Larger Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
10.3.3 Smaller Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
10.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
10.4.1 Spillage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
10.5 Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
10.5.1 Clean Fluid Cell and Protective Skirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
10.5.2 Select Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
10.5.3 Load the Probe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
10.5.4 Install the Fluid Tip Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
10.5.5 Install the Protective Skirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
10.5.6 Align Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
10.5.7 False Reflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
10.5.8 Load Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
10.5.9 Lower Probe into Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
10.5.10 Readjust Laser Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
10.5.11 Adjust Photodetector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
10.5.12 Locate Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
10.5.13 Focus Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
10.5.14 Cantilever Tune (TappingMode Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
10.5.15 Show All Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
10.5.16 Set Initial Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.5.17 Engage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
10.5.18 Adjust Scan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
10.5.19 Clean Cell and Protective Skirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
10.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.6.1 Cantilever Tune Plot Looks Poor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.6.2 Laser Sum Signal Absent or Weak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.6.3 Poor Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.6.4 Unable to Locate Particulate Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual vii

 Chapter 11 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM) 175
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
11.1.1 Overview of STM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
11.2 Basic STM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
11.2.1 Imaging Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
11.3 STM-Specific Information and Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
11.3.1 STM Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
11.3.2 Fine Points of STM Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
11.3.3 STM Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
11.3.4 STM-Specific Menu Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
11.4 Spectroscopy with the STM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
11.4.1 Operation of STS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
11.5 Troubleshooting Operation of STM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
11.5.1 Head and Microscope-Related Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
11.5.2 Head Engages Immediately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
11.6 Etching Tungsten Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
11.6.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Chapter 12 Lateral Force Mode 195

12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
12.2 Basic LFM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12.3 Advanced LFM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
12.3.1 Scan Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
12.3.2 Tip selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12.3.3 Understanding the LFM Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12.3.4 Understanding the Color Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12.3.5 Using TMR Voltage to Measure Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.3.6 Enhancing the LFM Data by Subtracting Two Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.3.7 Height Artifacts in the Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Chapter 13 Force Imaging 203

13.1 Force Plots—An Analogy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
13.2 Force Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
13.2.1 Example Force Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
13.3 Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
13.3.1 Main Controls (Ramp Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
13.3.2 Main Controls Panel (Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
13.3.3 Channel 1, 2, 3 Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
13.3.4 Feedback Controls Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
13.3.5 Scan Mode Panel (Advanced Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
13.3.6 Menu Bar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
13.4 Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
13.4.1 Obtaining a Good Force Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

viii Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 13.4.2 Helpful Suggestions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
13.4.3 Advanced Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
13.4.4 Interpreting Force Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
13.5 Force Calibration (TappingMode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
13.5.1 Force Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
13.5.2 Obtaining a Force Plot (TappingMode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
13.5.3 High Contact Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
13.5.4 Tip Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
13.6 Force Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
13.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
13.6.2 Selecting a Force Modulation Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
13.6.3 Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
13.6.4 Force Modulation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
13.6.5 Notes About Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
13.7 Force Modulation with Negative LiftMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
13.7.1 Set Interleave Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
13.7.2 Obtain a TappingMode Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
13.7.3 Obtain a Negative LiftMode Force Modulation Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
13.8 Force Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Chapter 14 Interleave Scanning 247

14.1 Preface: Interleave Scanning & LiftMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
14.2 Interleave Mode Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
14.3 LiftMode Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
14.4 Operation of Interleave Scanning / LiftMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
14.5 Use of LiftMode with TappingMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
14.5.1 Main Drive Amplitude and Frequency selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
14.5.2 Setpoint Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
14.5.3 Interleave Drive Amplitude and Frequency Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
14.5.4 Amplitude Data Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
14.5.5 Cantilever Oscillation Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Chapter 15 Magnetic Force Microscopy 255

15.1 Magnetic Force Microscopy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
15.1.1 Force Gradient Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
15.1.2 Amplitude Detection Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
15.2 Basic MFM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
15.2.1 MFM Using LiftMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
15.2.2 Magnetic Force Microscopy Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
15.3 Advanced MFM Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
15.3.1 Lift Scan Height and Magnetic Imaging Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
15.3.2 Fine Tuning Interleave Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
15.3.3 Drive Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual ix

 15.4 Installation of the Electronics Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
15.4.1 Phase Extender Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
15.4.2 Quadrex Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
15.4.3 NanoScope IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
15.5 Software Setup Configuration (Phase, Quadrex or NSIV) . . . . . . . . . 269
15.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
15.6.1 MFM Image Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
15.6.2 Saturation in Amplitude Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
15.6.3 Optical Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 16 Electric Techniques 271

16.1 Electric Techniques Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
16.1.1 Electric Force Microscopy Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
16.1.2 Surface Potential Imaging Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
16.2 Electric Force Microscopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
16.2.1 Electric Force Microscopy Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
16.2.2 Electric Force Microscopy Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
16.2.3 Electric Force Microscopy Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
16.2.4 Phase Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
16.2.5 Frequency Modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
16.2.6 Amplitude Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
16.3 EFM Troubleshooting/Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
16.3.1 Use Low Setpoint When Tapping in Electric Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
16.3.2 Verify Electric Field at Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
16.3.3 Fine Tune Lift Scan Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
16.3.4 Fine Tune Interleave Drive Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
16.3.5 Optimize Tune in Vicinity of Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
16.3.6 Optimize Tune in Interleave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
16.3.7 If Voltage is Needed, Use Analog 2 When Possible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
16.3.8 Try Uncoated Si Tip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
16.4 Surface Potential Detection Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
16.5 Surface Potential Detection Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
16.5.1 Applying Voltage to the Sample Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
16.6 Surface Potential Imaging Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
16.6.1 Troubleshooting the Surface Potential Feedback Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Chapter 17 Calibration 305

17.1 SPM Calibration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
17.1.1 Theory Behind Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
17.1.2 Calibration References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
17.2 Calibration Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
17.2.1 Check Scanner Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
17.2.2 Align Calibration Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
17.2.3 Set Realtime Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
17.2.4 Set Up Contact AFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

x Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 17.3 Check Sample Orthogonality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
17.3.1 Measure Orthogonality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
17.3.2 Adjust Sample Orthogonality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
17.4 Linearity Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
17.4.1 Adjust Mag0 and Arg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
17.4.2 Adjust Fast mag1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
17.4.3 Adjust Slow mag1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
17.5 X-Y Calibration using Capture Calibration and Autocalibration . . . . . 321
17.5.1 Capture Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
17.6 Autocalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
17.7 Fine-tuning for X-Y Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
17.7.1 Prepare System for Fine-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
17.7.2 Measure Horizontally at 440V Scan Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
17.7.3 Measure Vertically at 440V Scan Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
17.7.4 Measure Horizontally at 150 V Scan Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
17.7.5 Measure Vertically at 150V Scan Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
17.7.6 Change Scan angle and Repeat Calibration Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
17.8 Calibrating Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
17.8.1 Engage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
17.8.2 Capture and Correct an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
17.8.3 Measure Vertical Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
17.8.4 Correct Z Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
17.8.5 Recheck Z-axis Measuring Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
17.8.6 Calculate Retracted and Extended Offset Deratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Chapter 18 Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty 337

18.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
18.1.1 Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
18.1.2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
18.1.3 Changing the Illuminator Light Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
18.1.4 Fuse Characteristics and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
18.1.5 Air Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
18.1.6 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
18.1.7 Air Table Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
18.1.8 Optics Zoom System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
18.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
18.2.1 Alarms and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
18.2.2 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
18.3 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Index 351

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual xi

xii Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D
List of Figures

Chapter 1 System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Figure 1.2a Dimension 3100 Input and Display Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Figure 1.2b Computer (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Figure 1.2c NanoScope IIIa Controller (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Figure 1.2d Dimension 3100 Controller (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Figure 1.3a D3100 Microscope Electronics Box (rear view). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figure 1.3b Dimension SPM Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 1.3c Quad Photodetector Arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 1.3d Dimension Head Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 1.3e Standard Cantilever Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 1.3f Fluid Cell Cantilever Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 2.1a Safety Symbols Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 2.5a Dimension 3100 SPM Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 2.8a Log into Windows NT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 2.8b Logon Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 2.8c Select the NanoScope Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 2.8d Select the Realtime Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 2.8e Status Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 2.9a Laser Explanatory Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 2.9b Laser Warning Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 2.9c Noninterlocked Protective Housing Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Chapter 3 Facilities Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Figure 3.1a VT-103-3K with ELCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 3.1b VT-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 3.1c IS3K-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 3.2a Dimension 3100 SPM Facility Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 3.3a IS3K-2 - Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 3.3b IS3K-2 - Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual xiii

List of Figures

Figure 3.3c IS3K-2 - Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Figure 3.3d IS3K-2 Leveling Feet Location - Bottom View. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 3.3e IS3K-2 Footprint Requirements - Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 3.3f VT-103-3K - Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 3.3g VT-103-3K - Side View with Acoustic Hood Open and Closed 45
Figure 3.3h VT-103-3K - Top View with Acoustic Hood Closed . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 3.3i VT-102 Vibration Isolation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 3.3j SPM Control Electronics Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 3.3k Optional ELCON Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 3.5a Vibration Criteria Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Chapter 4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 4.3a Hardware for Chuck Securement to Stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 4.3b Secure the Chuck to the Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 4.3c Dimension 3100 Input and Display Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 4.4a Computer (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 4.4b NanoScope IIIa Controller (front view). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 4.4c NanoScope IIIa Controller (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 4.4d Dimension 3100 Controller (rear view). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 4.4e Dimension 3100 Controller (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 4.4f D3100 Microscope Electronics Box (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 4.4g Vacuum Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 4.4h Cable Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Chapter 5 Stage System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Figure 5.1a Stage X-Y Axis Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 5.2a Stage Load/Unload Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 5.2b Moving to Tip Position Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Figure 5.2c Locate Tip Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 5.2d Focus Surface Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 5.2e Move To Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 5.2f Abort Motion Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 5.2g Set Reference Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 5.2h Defining the X-Axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 5.2i Resultant Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 5.2j Programmed Move Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 5.2k Editing or Creating New Program Prompts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 5.2l Teach Program Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 5.2m Teach Mode Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Figure 5.2n Initial Focus Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 5.2o Programmed Move Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 5.2p Stage Initialize/Cancel Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 5.2q SPM Move to Lower Limits Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

xiv Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 List of Figures

Figure 5.2r Stage Initializing Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Figure 5.2s Optics Move to End of Travel Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Figure 5.2t Stage Zoom Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Figure 5.2u Stage Zoom Out Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Chapter 6 Cantilever Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Figure 6.1a Silicon Cantilever Substrates in Wafer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Figure 6.1b Theoretical Tip Shape of Silicon Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Figure 6.1c Silicon Probe Tip Profile Artifact (Front-to-Back) . . . . . . . . . . .91
Figure 6.1d Silicon Probe Tip Step Profile Artifact (Side-to-Side) . . . . . . . .92
Figure 6.1e Common Silicon Probe Profile (Resultant Scan Artifact). . . . . .92
Figure 6.2a Silicon Nitride Cantilevers in a Wafer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Figure 6.2b Substrate Break-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Figure 6.2c Silicon Nitride Cantilevers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Figure 6.2d Silicon Nitride Cantilevers (profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Chapter 7 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Figure 7.2a Microscope Select Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Figure 7.2b Cantilever Holder Stand (top view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Figure 7.2c Standard AFM Cantilever Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Figure 7.2d SPM Head Dovetail and Signal Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Figure 7.2e Dimension Head Laser Control Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Figure 7.2f Etched Silicon Tip Laser Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Figure 7.2g Photodetector Adjustment Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Figure 7.2h Silicon Nitride Laser Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Figure 7.2i Vision System Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Figure 7.2j Photodetector Mirror Adjustment Knobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Figure 7.2k Securing Double-sided Tape to the Sample Disk . . . . . . . . . . .114
Figure 7.2l Securing the Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Figure 7.3a Default SPM Stage Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Chapter 8 Contact AFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Figure 8.1a Select Show All Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Figure 8.1b Enable Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Figure 8.1c Suggested Scan Controls Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Figure 8.1d Suggested Other Controls Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Figure 8.1e Suggested Feedback Controls Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Figure 8.1f Suggested Channel Controls Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Figure 8.2a Force Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Chapter 9 TappingMode AFM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Figure 9.1a Tapping Cantilever in Free Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Figure 9.1b Tapping Cantilever on Sample Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual xv

List of Figures

Figure 9.2a Auto Tune Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Figure 9.2b Cantilever Tune Control Panels for Main Controls . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 9.2c Cantilever Tune Frequency Sweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 9.2d Select Show All Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 9.2e Enable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 9.2f Suggested Scan Controls Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 9.2g Suggested Other Controls Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 9.2h Suggested Feedback Controls Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 9.4a Cantilever Response Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 9.4b Scope Trace with High Scan Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 9.4c Scope Trace with Correct Scan Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 9.4d Suggested Range of Drive Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Chapter 10 Fluid Imaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Figure 10.2a Fluid Tip Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 10.2b Rubber Protective Skirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 10.3a Imaging a Sample Covered by a Drop of Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 10.5a Tip Holder Installed With Protective Skirt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 10.5b False Reflections from Fluid Tip Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 10.5c Typical Cantilever Tune Curve for Silicon Nitride Tip in Fluid166
Figure 10.5d Cantilever Tune Control Panels for Main Controls . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 10.5e Cantilever Tune Frequency Sweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 10.5f Select Show All Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 10.5g Enable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 10.5h Suggested Scan Controls Settings during TappingMode. . . . 170

Chapter 11 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Figure 11.1a Dimension Tip Holder and Head Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 11.3a Typical STM Channel 1 Control Panel Parameters . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 11.3b Scan Derating Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Chapter 12 Lateral Force Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Figure 12.3a Scan Angle Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 12.3b Example of Frictional Forces on Tip During Scan (Front View)198
Figure 12.3c Friction Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 12.3d TMR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 12.3e Height Artifacts in LFM Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Chapter 13 Force Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Figure 13.1a Comparative Index of Pulling Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 13.1b Pulling Forces Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 13.2a Force Calibration Z Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 13.2b Piezo Travel in Force Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

xvi Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 List of Figures

Figure 13.2c Tip-Sample Interaction During a Force Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Figure 13.2d Anatomy of a Force Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Figure 13.3a Advanced Force Calibration Control Window (Contact Mode AFM)
212
Figure 13.3b Absolute and Relative Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Figure 13.4a Typical Force Calibration Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Figure 13.4b Piezo Positions for Typical Force Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Figure 13.4c False Engagement (G Scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Figure 13.4d Set the Sensitivity Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Figure 13.4e Computing Contact Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Figure 13.4f Force Curve Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Figure 13.5a Piezo Extension Versus RMS Amplitude and Deflection . . . .229
Figure 13.5b TappingMode Force Plot Parameter Settings (Force Calibrate)231
Figure 13.5c Amplitude Force Plot with High Contact Force . . . . . . . . . . .232
Figure 13.6a Contrast Generation in Force Modulation Mode . . . . . . . . . .233
Figure 13.6b Force Modulation Cantilever Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Figure 13.6c Auto Tune Controls Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Figure 13.6d Typical Frequency Sweep Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Figure 13.6e Correctly Tuned Force Modulation Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Figure 13.6f Friction on Force Modulation Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Chapter 14 Interleave Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

Figure 14.2a X-Y Scan Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Figure 14.3a LiftMode Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Chapter 15 Magnetic Force Microscopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

Figure 15.1a MFM LiftMode Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Figure 15.1b Extender Electronics Module for NanoScope III, IIIa Controllers257
Figure 15.1c Quadrex PhaseImaging Module for NanoScope IIIa Controllers257
Figure 15.2a Cantilever Tune for Phase Detection and Frequency Modulation259
Figure 15.2b Shift In Phase at Fixed Drive Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Figure 15.2c Cantilever Tune for Amplitude Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Figure 15.2d Shift in Amplitude at Fixed Drive Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Figure 15.2e Topographic (left) and Magnetic Force Gradient Image (right)262
Figure 15.3a High-resolution Magnetic Force Gradient Image . . . . . . . . . .265
Figure 15.3b Tip Height and Oscillation Amplitudes (TappingMode & LiftMode)
267
Figure 15.4a Phase Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Figure 15.5a Microscope Select Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Chapter 16 Electric Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Figure 16.1a LiftMode Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Figure 16.1b Extender Electronics Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual xvii

List of Figures

Figure 16.2a Comparison of Attractive and Repulsive Forces . . . . . . . . . . 275

Figure 16.2b Diagram of Extender Electronics Module for EFM . . . . . . . 276
Figure 16.2c Microscope Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 16.2d Toggle Switches on Extender Electronics Module . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 16.2e Normal Jumper Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 16.2f Jumper Configuration for Application of Analog 2 Voltage to Tip281
Figure 16.2g Jumper Configuration (Application of Analog 2 Voltage to Sample)
282
Figure 16.2h Jumper Configuration for Applying External Voltage to Tip. 283
Figure 16.2i Jumper Configuration for Applying External Voltage to Sample284
Figure 16.2j Normal Jumper Configuration with Extender Electronics Module285
Figure 16.2k Jumper Configuration for Application of Voltage to Tip . . . . 286
Figure 16.2l Jumper Configuration for Application of Voltage to Sample . 287
Figure 16.2m Jumper Configuration for Applying External Voltage to Tip 288
Figure 16.2n Jumper Configuration for Applying External Voltage to Sample289
Figure 16.2o Phase Detection Cantilever Tune
(Extender Electronics Module Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 16.2p Shift In Phase at Fixed Drive Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 16.2q Shift In Amplitude at Fixed Drive Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Figure 16.2r Amplitude Detection Cantilever Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Figure 16.4a Simplified Block Diagram of Basic Extender Module in Surface
Potential Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Figure 16.5a Normal Jumper Configuration with Extender Electronics Module299
Figure 16.5b Jumper Configuration for Application of Voltage to Tip . . . . 299
Figure 16.5c Jumper Configuration for Application of Voltage to Sample. 300
Figure 16.6a Toggle Switches on Back of Basic Extender Module . . . . . . 301

Chapter 17 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Figure 17.1a Scanner Crystal Voltage and Photodiode Voltage . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 17.1b Scanner Sensitivity Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 17.1c Effect of Nonlinearity and Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 17.1d Scanner Voltage and Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 17.1e Silicon Calibration Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 17.2a 0 Degrees Scan Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 17.3a Non-Orthogonal and Corrected, Orthogonal Image . . . . . . . 314
Figure 17.4a Fast Scan Linearization: Mag0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 17.4b X Scan Linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 17.4c Y Scan Linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Figure 17.5a Capture Calibration Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 17.5b Capture Control Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Figure 17.5c Improved Calibration Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Figure 17.6a X-Y Piezo Calibration Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Figure 17.6b Vertical Calibration Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 17.6c Calibration Line Distance Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

xviii Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 List of Figures

Figure 17.7a Calibration Horizontal Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327

Figure 17.7b Scanner Calibration Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Figure 17.8a Z Calibration Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Figure 17.8b Draw a Stopband. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Figure 17.8c Depth Analysis Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Figure 17.8d Draw a Cursor Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Figure 17.8e Z Calibration Configure Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Figure 17.8f Z Calibration Depth Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334

Chapter 18 Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

Figure 18.1a Change the Illuminator Bulb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual xix

List of Figures

xx Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 1 System Overview

The Dimension 3100 Scanning Probe Microscope (SPM) produces high-resolution, three-
dimensional images by scanning a sharp tip over the sample surface. The tip is part of a flexible
cantilever mounted on one end of a cylindrical piezoelectric tube mounted near the top of the
microscope. Voltages applied to the X and Y electrodes on the piezoelectric tube deflect the tube
horizontally to produce a precise raster scan over the sample surface. A voltage applied to the Z
electrode on the piezo tube controls the vertical height of the tip. A stepper motor coupled to a lead
screw translates a slide with the sample attached. A separate motor drive controls the height of the
microscope and tip relative to the sample surface.

This manual details facility requirements, installation requirements and procedures, maintenance
requirements and procedures, and applications used with the Dimension 3100 Scanning Probe
Microscope. This chapter discusses the following:

• System Overview: Section 1.1

• Dimension 3100 SPM Features: Section 1.1.1

• Control Station Overview: Section 1.2

• Input and Display Devices: Section 1.2.1

• Computer: Section 1.2.2

• NanoScope IIIa Controller: Section 1.2.3

• Dimension 3100 Controller: Section 1.2.4

• Dimension 3100 SPM Overview: Section 1.3

• Dimension 3100 Microscope Electronics Box: Section 1.3.1

• Optics and Motors Overview: Section 1.3.2

• Stage System: Section 1.3.3

• Dimension SPM Head: Section 1.3.4

• Cantilever Holder: Section 1.3.5

• Video Zoom Microscope: Section 1.3.6

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 1

System Overview
System Overview

• Sample Size & Handling: Section 1.4

• Facilities Specifications: Section 1.5

• Applications: Section 1.6

• Maintenance and Troubleshooting: Section 1.7

1.1 System Overview

There are two typical configurations of the Dimension 3100 Scanning Probe Microscope (see
Chapter 3 for detailed information).

• VT-103-3K with ELCON

• VT-102

The configurations provide options for acoustic and mechanical vibration isolation, as well as
various options for positioning control station components. The features outlined below apply to all
configurations.

1.1.1 Dimension 3100 SPM Features

Enhanced Motorized Positioning Stage

• Inspectable Area 120mm x 100mm

• Resolution: 2µm

• Unidirectional Repeatability: 3µm typical, 10µm maximum

• Bidirectional Repeatability: 4µm for x-axis, 6µm for y-axis typical for point to point
motion

Integrated Dimension 3100 Controller

The Dimension 3100 controller integrates the illuminator, power supply, and air and vacuum
pumps.

Optical Microscope

The optical microscope now includes a computer-controlled illuminator for easier optical focusing
and zooming.

2 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 System Overview
Control Station Overview

Video Image Capture Capability

Video image capture capability allows the user to easily incorporate video images into reports and
publications.

Computer System

The Dimension 3100 ships with a high quality tower-style Pentium PCI computer system.

1.2 Control Station Overview

The Dimension 3100 SPM control station consists of four components: input and display devices
(keyboard, trackball, mouse and monitors), computer, NanoScope controller and Dimension 3100
controller.

1.2.1 Input and Display Devices

Input and display devices include two monitors, a keyboard, mouse, and trackball (see Figure 1.2a).
These devices convey information signals to the computer to operate the software and SPM.
Depending on the configuration of the system, the input and display devices are located atop the
control station table (VT-103-3) or contained within an enclosure (IS3K-3).

CAUTION: The monitors contain a hazardous voltage of 120V.

Figure 1.2a Dimension 3100 Input and Display Equipment

3919

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 3

System Overview
Control Station Overview

1.2.2 Computer

The computer is the main control unit of the Dimension 3100 SPM system; it supports a 100MB
Zip® disc drive, CD-ROM, CDRW, or DVDRW drive and 1.44MB floppy disc drive (see Figure
1.2b). The computer receives data from the input devices, and controls external hardware via the
standard ports and the input/output (I/O) bus. The computer isolates the user from direct interaction
with the hardware. (See Dimension 3100 Control Station Connections: Section 4.4.1 for a
complete description of the computer connections).

Figure 1.2b Computer (rear view)

serial number
MS

KB
USB
COM1

LPTI
VIDEO

GAME/MIDI
AUDIO

COM2
004

4 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 System Overview
Control Station Overview

1.2.3 NanoScope IIIa Controller

The NanoScope IIIa controller controls the microscope head and scanning. The NanoScope IIIa
controller is controlled via a 25-pin D cable connection between the rear of the NanoScope IIIa and
the computer (see Figure 1.2c).

The NanoScope IIIa connects to the back of the Dimension 3100 via a 37-pin D cable connection
from the front of the controller (see Figure 1.2c).

If a you have a Basic or Quadrex Extender, connect it between the NanoScope IIIa controller and
the Dimension 3100 microscope.

Figure 1.2c NanoScope IIIa Controller (front view)

NanoScope® IIIa
Scanning Probe Microscope Controller

POWER

1
MICROSCOPE

3902

CAUTION: The NanoScope controller will overheat if the controller ventilation

holes are blocked or if the controller is exposed to heat from an
outside source.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 5

System Overview
Control Station Overview

1.2.4 Dimension 3100 Controller

The Dimension 3100 controller controls the vacuum and air supply and optics illumination. The
Dimension 3100 controller is controlled via a serial cable connection between it and the computer
(see Figure 1.2d). The Dimension 3100 controller features gauges on the front panel to indicate
vacuum and positive pressures. The Dimension 3100 controller channels positive pressure to the
underside of the chuck during X-Y movements, allowing the chuck to glide smoothly over the
granite.

Figure 1.2d Dimension 3100 Controller (front view)

NanoScope®
DimensionTM 3100 Controller

Air Pressure Manual

Light Control
Chuck Vacuum Vacuum Pump

Status

123456789

3908

CAUTION: Do not turn the Dimension 3100 controller on its side. Turning the
controller on its side activates an alarm and turns the vacuum pump
off.

ATTENTION: Afin d'éviter de sérieux dommages mécaniques, ne tournez pas le

boîtier de contrôle sur le côté. Tourner le boîtier sur le côté
déclencheune alarme et coupe la pompe à vide.

VORSICHT: Um ernsthafte mechanische Beschädigungen zu vermeiden stellen Sie

die Dimension Control Box bitte nicht auf die Seite. Dies würde einen
Alarm auslösen und die Vakuumpumpe ausschalten.

CAUTION: The Dimension controller features a special thermostat that sets off an
alarm if the controller overheats (> 40° C). The Dimension controller
will overheat if the controller ventilation holes are blocked or if the
controller is exposed to heat from an outside source.

6 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 System Overview
Dimension 3100 SPM Overview

The Dimension 3100 controller houses the following components:

Power Supply

The power supply is preconfigured at the factory. Verify voltage compatibility before plugging the
system into the power source.

Vacuum and Air Pumps

The vacuum hose assembly routes vacuum and positive pressure control from the Dimension
controller to the stage and chuck.

Illumination System

Illumination can be computer or manually controlled. The knob located on the front of the
Dimension 3100 controller regulates manual illumination control. For computer control, there is an
“illumination” parameter in the Other Controls panel to control brightness. The illuminator
control knob must be in the “off” position to allow software control. A fiber optics cable channels
light to the Dimension optics.

1.3 Dimension 3100 SPM Overview

1.3.1 Dimension 3100 Microscope Electronics Box

The Dimension 3100 Microscope Electronics Box moderates all functions of the microscope,
including vacuum and air supply, motor power, optic image signals, microscope control, and stage
motor control (see Figure 1.3a). (See Dimension 3100 Microscope External Components
Connections: Section 4.4.2 for a complete description of the Electronics Box connections).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 7

System Overview
Dimension 3100 SPM Overview

Figure 1.3a D3100 Microscope Electronics Box (rear view)

WARNING: Turn NanoScope controller box power

off before plugging or unplugging the
NanoScope controller cables

NANOSCOPE CONTROLLER SERIAL PORT

VACUUM POWER VIDEO APPLICATION MODULE

(for Quadrex and NanoScope IV)

Note: Dimension 3100 SPMs equipped with Extender Electronics Module phase
attachments utilize a slightly different electronics architecture than standard
models. For more information, contact Veeco.

The Dimension 3100 Microscope Electronics Box houses the following components:

Main SPM Circuit Board

This smaller circuit board mounts on a larger board and contains switches to route feedback signals
from the head. The photodiode signals combine and amplify in various ways to provide the desired
information. The main SPM circuit board also contains the circuits to control the microscope in
TappingMode and non-Contact/MFM modes. The RMS detection circuit for the cantilever
vibration signal and cantilever oscillation drive circuit are on this board.

Larger SPM Mother Board

This larger circuit board provides local computer control of the SPM electronics, microscope
motors and vacuum control.

Two Stepper-motor Drive Board

One stepper-motor drive board operates the Z-stage, focus and zoom motors. The second stepper-
motor drive board powers the X-Y stage motors.

Vacuum Power Switch

The vacuum power switch toggles with an ON/OFF control switch for sample vacuum capabilities.

8 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 System Overview
Dimension 3100 SPM Overview

1.3.2 Optics and Motors Overview

The optic system assists you in locating the cantilever and tip relative to the sample. The
NanoScope software uses this information to engage the tip on the sample surface at the desired
location. The system automatically focuses on most samples by adjusting the SPM height; however,
the trackball is available for manual focus control.

The objective mounts on a translational tilt stage. The objective can be translated along the optical
axis with a servo motor (focus motor) to adjust the focal point approximately 1.5mm above the
cantilever to approximately 3.5mm below. The range of focus below the cantilever allows you to
focus on the sample while leaving up to 3.5mm clearance between the tip and sample.

1.3.3 Stage System

The improved Dimension 3100 X-Y stage provides substantially better positioning repeatability
(3µm unidirectional and 4-6µm bidirectional) than its predecessor, the Dimension 3000. The stage
is more than twice as fast for moving from one location to another. The improved trackball response
also makes it easier to locate features of interest for imaging.

The X-Y stage permits micron-scale positioning of samples beneath the tip with a 120mm (X
direction) by 100mm (Y direction) travel range. The stage ships with chucks for fully accessible
disks up to 8" in diameter.

The Dimension 3100 motorized Z-stage provides accurate, automatic tip engagement and
approach. The rigidity of the Z-stage permits low noise and high accuracy imaging. A motorized
lead screw drives the Z-stage for coarse approach of the head to the sample. This configuration
allows you to image samples of different thicknesses with little difficulty.

1.3.4 Dimension SPM Head

The Dimension SPM head provides accurate imaging of a stationary sample while scanning the
integrated detector probe assembly above the sample. The Dimension SPM head allows optical
correction of the laser beam path to track the movement of the probe while scanning under the fixed
laser beam assembly. The Dimension SPM head is effective in imaging samples too large or heavy
to scan by movement of the sample.

Figure 1.3b depicts the optical path of the laser beam inside a Dimension SPM head. The
Dimension SPM head places a corrective, tracking lens within the scanner tube to stabilize the laser
beam focal point atop the scanning cantilever. This patented technology sharply reduces bowing
and attenuation artifacts due to cantilever scanning across the laser beam’s otherwise stationary
focal plane.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 9

System Overview
Dimension 3100 SPM Overview

Figure 1.3b Dimension SPM Head

La ser Sp ot Detector Screen (d ark r ed )

L aser aim adju stmen ts

Po sition Se nsitive De tecto r

(special photo diode)
Laser dio de

Collimator
Beamsp litter
(behin d scr ee n)
Focusing lens

Detector
Mirror
po sitio ne rs

Laser L ight's
Beam path

Adjustabl e(d etecto r) Tracking Le ns

mi rror (corrective)

Fi xed mir ro r

Lens

Probe Tip Holder

Cantilever

The Dimension SPM head scans the tip and generates the cantilever deflection or probe feedback
signal for the different imaging modes. A quad photodetector detects the beam emitted by the laser
diode (1.0 mW max at 670nm) as it reflects off the cantilever. The integrated scanner head consists
of the following subassemblies:

Preamp Board

The preamp board is located inside the Dimension 3100 SPM microscope head. The preamp board
contains a preamplifier circuit for both photodetector signals, a laser diode power supply circuit
that regulates the output of the laser, and ±12 volt regulators for the preamp circuit. The voltage
regulators include current limiting to protect the circuit. The preamp board is in turn connected to a
21-pin male connector cable plugged into the socket on the front of the stage control electronics
box.

Laser Diode Stage

A kinematic tilt stage positions the laser beam on the cantilever. The tilt stage consists of the laser
diode, collimator, focusing lens, base plate, and the X and Y laser diode adjustment knobs. The X
laser diode adjustment knob moves the beam parallel to the major axis of the cantilever substrate.
The Y laser diode adjustment knob moves the beam perpendicular to the major axis of the
cantilever substrate. The adjustment knobs are described in more detail in Chapter 7.

10 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 System Overview
Dimension 3100 SPM Overview

Adjustable Detector Mirror

An adjustable mirror positions the reflected laser spot relative to the four photodetector elements
using a kinematic mount and the photodetector mirror adjustment knobs. The photodetector mirror
adjustment knobs assist the user in adjusting the position of the mirror to maximize the SUM signal
and set the deflection signals.

Photodetector

The four elements of the quad photodetector combine to provide different information depending
on the operating mode. In all modes the four elements combine to form the SUM signal. The
amplified differential signal between the top two elements and the two bottom elements provides a
measure of the deflection of the cantilever. This differential signal is used in Contact AFM mode.
The differential signal feeds into an RMS converter (or phase module if attached) for TappingMode
operation. Similarly, the amplified differential signal between the sum of the two left photodiodes
and the sum of the two right photodiodes provides a measure of the torsion in the cantilever and
(often used in Lateral Force Microscopy). Figure 1.3c illustrates the arrangement of the photodiode
elements in the Dimension 3100 SPM head.

Figure 1.3c Quad Photodetector Arrangement

AFM
Signal

LFM
Signal

Beamsplitter and Laser Spot Detector Screen

The beamsplitter diverts some of the laser light directed towards the photodetector toward the Laser
Spot Detector Screen. This screen provides visual indication of the condition of the reflected spot
and its orientation relative to the photodetector.

Scanner Piezo Tube

Figure 1.3d depicts the electrode configuration used on the scanner piezo tube in the Dimension
SPM head. The electrodes are oriented as shown when viewing the Dimension 3100 SPM from the
front. With the Scan angle parameter in the control panel set to 0.00, the fast-scan direction is
parallel to the front or in the direction of the X-axis.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 11

System Overview
Dimension 3100 SPM Overview

Figure 1.3d Dimension Head Scanner

-Y

-X X
Y

The end of the scanner allows easy removal of the imaging probe assembly. This permits loading
the tip on a separate fixture such that head removal becomes unnecessary.

Table 1.3a Scanner Piezo Tube Specifications

Specification Value
Travel (approximate scan size)
x-axis 90µm
y-axis 90µm
z-axis 6µm
Electronic Resolution 16-bit (all axes)
Accuracy
typical 1%
maximum 2%
Orthogonality 2 degrees
Uncorrected Z bow
90µm scan size 50nm
10µm scan size 2nm

12 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 System Overview
Dimension 3100 SPM Overview

1.3.5 Cantilever Holder

The cantilever holder is a small printed circuit card or acrylic block that holds the cantilever firmly
at the proper angle. The standard cantilever holder is used for operation in air, while a clear glass
cantilever holder is used for fluid cell operations. The standard cantilever holder includes the
cantilever piezoelectric stack and the electrical contacts to the drive circuits. The fluid cell
cantilever holder does not contain a piezoelectric resonator locally. Cantilever holders include gold-
plated spring sockets which mate with the gold-plated pins at the end of the scanner. There is also a
spring-loaded clip to secure the cantilever probe to the cantilever holder assembly.

You can easily change the cantilever holder on the microscope for different operating modes (see
Table 1.3b). The standard cantilever holder shown in Figure 1.3e contains a piezoelectric stack to
oscillate the cantilever when operating in TappingMode. The same cantilever holder is used for
Contact AFM but no voltage is applied to the piezo stack.

Figure 1.3e Standard Cantilever Holder

SIDE VIEW

tip is installed

Cantilever Probe Tip

( tip faces down )
Spring Loaded Probe Clip
Electrical Mounting Sockets ( 4 plcs)

Cantilever
Mounting
BOTTOM VIEW
Groove ( TIP SIDE )
( no tip
installed ) no tip installed

The fluid cell cantilever holder shown in Figure 1.3f provides an optically transparent cover over
the back of the cantilever to maintain the optical path of the laser beam constant when the tip is
submerged in a fluid medium. If the fluid medium was not covered by the fluid cell, imaging with
the tip submerged in fluid would be impossible due to variable surface scattering effects. These
effects cause the reflected laser beam to move randomly during imaging, rendering the reflected
signal useless for SPM imaging.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 13

System Overview
Dimension 3100 SPM Overview

Table 1.3b Cantilever Holder Specifications

Holders Specifications
Standard TappingMode, Contact AFM, MFM
Optional STM and Force Modulation
Fluid Cell Fluid Contact AFM, Fluid TappingMode

Figure 1.3f Fluid Cell Cantilever Holder

Probe Clip Spring Lever

SIDE VIEW

tip installed
sockets not shown!!
Cantilever Probe Tip
( tip faces down )
Spring Loaded Probe Clip

Mounting Sockets ( 4 plcs.)

( Top Side )

BOTTOM VIEW
Cantilever
Mounting tip not installed
Groove
( no tip
sockets shown are
installed ) on top but viewed
through bottom !!

1.3.6 Video Zoom Microscope

The integrated zoom optical microscope features:

• 10x objective (long working distance)

• 2X TV camera tube

• Motorized zoom system

• 410-1845 x magnification range with 13-inch monitor and corresponding field of view
of 180—810 µm

• Motorized focus

14 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 System Overview
Sample Size & Handling

• Through-the-lens illumination

• Color video camera

• Focus tracking and automated engagement

1.4 Sample Size & Handling

Samples may be up to 8 inches in diameter and 0.5-inch thick using a multipurpose, 8-inch chuck.
For samples thicker than 0.5", contact Veeco.

Table 1.4a Sample Specifications

Specifications
Wafers and disk media: 8-inch dia. x 0.5"
Max Sample Size
thick.
100mm x 125mm typical
Includes interchangeable adapters for center-
Inspectable Area
ing hard disks and removable wafer locating
pins. Vacuum pump included.
Magnetic holder available for mounting small
Small Samples samples on mounting pucks (< 15 mm dia.
typ.).
Silicon-dioxide-coated chuck accommodates
Silicon Wafers
2-inch, 100, 125, 150 and 200 mm wafers.
Optional fluid cell allows immersion of
Wet Samples
microscope head to max depth of 2 mm.
The chuck vacuum pneumatics secure sam-
ples to the chuck using a separate toggle
Chuck Vacuum
switch at the front of the stage control elec-
tronics box.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 15

System Overview
Facilities Specifications

1.5 Facilities Specifications

Compliance with the requirements and specifications outlined in Chapter 3 is essential before
installation and operation of the Dimension 3100 SPM. Chapter 3 details facility site requirements,
safety requirements, and configuration options for the Dimension 3100 SPM.

1.6 Applications
Several applications can be applied using the Dimension 3100 SPM. For specific information
regarding these applications, please refer to the appropriate chapters in this manual. The following
is a list of common applications used with the Dimension 3100 SPM:

• Contact AFM

• Contact AFM in Fluids

• TappingMode

• TappingMode in Fluids

• Lateral Force Mode

• Force Imaging

• Interleave Scanning

• Magnetic Force Imaging

• Electric Techniques

• Calibration

1.7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Refer to Chapter 18 for detailed information regarding maintenance and troubleshooting issues for
the Dimension 3100 SPM.

16 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 2 Safety

This chapter details the safety requirements involved in installation of the Dimension 3100
Scanning Probe Microscope. Specifically, these safety requirements include safety precautions,
environmental conditions, and equipment safety applications. Training and compliance with all
safety requirements is essential during installation and operation of the Dimension 3100 SPM.

Specifically, this chapter discusses the following areas of information:

• Safety Requirements: Section 2.1

• Safety Precautions: Section 2.2

• General Operator Safety: Section 2.2.1

• Microscope: Section 2.2.2

• Sample Safeguards: Section 2.2.3

• Ergonomics: Section 2.3

• Environmental Conditions: Section 2.4

• Equipment Safety Applications: Section 2.5

• Dimension 3100 SPM Facility Requirements: Section 2.5.1

• Power-up Sequence (Installation and Service Only): Section 2.6

• Pre Power-up Checklist: Section 2.6.1

• Turn on the Dimension 3100 SPM (Service and Installation Only): Section 2.6.2

• Power-up Checklist (Service and Installation Only): Section 2.6.3

• Power-Up Sequence (Normal Usage): Section 2.7

• Prepare the System for Power-up (Normal Usage): Section 2.7.1

• Power-up Checklist (Normal Usage): Section 2.7.2

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 17

Safety

• Software Power-up: Section 2.8

• Log into Windows NT: Section 2.8.1

• Log On: Section 2.8.2

• Start the NanoScope Software: Section 2.8.3

• Select Realtime: Section 2.8.4

• Begin Stage Initialization: Section 2.8.5

• Software Power-up Checklist: Section 2.8.6

• Hazard Labels: Section 2.9

• Laser Warning Labels: Section 2.9.1

18 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Safety
Safety Requirements

2.1 Safety Requirements

Figure 2.1a Safety Symbols Key

Symbol Definition
This symbol identifies conditions or practices that could result in damage to the equipment
or other property, and in extreme cases, possible personal injury.
Ce symbole indique des conditions d'emploi ou des actions pouvant endommager les
équipements ou accessoires, et qui, dans les cas extrêmes, peuvent conduire à des dom-
mages corporels.
Dieses Symbol beschreibt Zustände oder Handlungen die das Gerät oder andere Gegen-
stände beschädigen können und in Extremfällen zu Verletzungen führen können.
This symbol identifies conditions or practices that involve potential electric shock hazard.
Ce symbole indique des conditions d'emploi ou des actions comportant un risque de choc
électrique.
Dieses Symbol beschreibt Zustände oder Handlungen, die einen elekrischen Schock
verursachen können.
This symbol identifies a laser hazard. Exposure could result in eye damage.
Ce symbole indique un risque lié à un laser. Une exposition à ce laser peut entraîner des
blessures aux yeux.
Dieses Symbol bedeutet “Gefährliche Laserstrahlung”. Laserstrahlung kann zu Bes-
chädigung der Augen führen.
This symbol identifies a thermal hazard. Touching could result in skin burns upon contact.
Ce symbole indique un risque lié à de hautes tempêratures. Un contact peut entraîner des
brûlures de la peau.
Dieses Symbol bedeutet “Heiße Oberfläche”. Berührung kann zu Hautverbrennungen
führen.
This symbol identifies a mechanical crushing hazard. Moving parts can result in serious
injury to hands or fingers.
Ce symbole indique un risque d'écrasement. Déplacer des pièces de l'appareil peut entraîner
des blessures sévères des mains ou des doigts.
Dieses Zeichen bedeutet “Quetschungsgefahr durch mechanisch bewegte Teile”. Bewegli-
che Teile können zu erheblichen Quetschverletzungen von Fingern oder Händen führen.
This symbol identifies a heavy object. Improper lifting can cause muscle strain or back
injury.
Ce symbole indique un objet lourd. Soulever cet objet de façon incorrecte peut entraîner des
froissements musculaires ou des problèmes de dos.
Dieses Symbol identifiziert ein schweres Objekt. Falsches Anheben kann Muskelzerrungen
und Rückenverletzungen verursachen.
This symbol identifies a corrosive material hazard. Corrosive material can cause serious
damage to the equipment.
Ce symbole indique un risque de la matière corrosive. La matière corrosive peut causer des
dommages sérieux au matériel.
Dieses Symbol bedeutet “Gefahr durch Korrosive Materialien”. Korrosive Materialien
können erhebliche Schäden am Gerät oder anderen Gegenständen verursachen.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 19

Safety
Safety Precautions

2.2 Safety Precautions

Because the Dimension 3100 SPM features independently motorized components, it is crucial that
operators become familiar with precautions to avoid injury to themselves and/or damage to
samples. This section of the manual should be read by ALL persons working with or around the
system.

2.2.1 General Operator Safety

WARNING: Service and adjustments should be performed only by qualified

personnel who are aware of the hazards involved.

AVERTISSEMENT:Tout entretien ou réparation doit être effectué par des personnes

qualifiées et conscientes des dangers qui peuvent y être associés.

WARNUNG: Service- und Einstellarbeiten sollten nur von qualifizierten

Personen, die sich der auftretenden Gefahren bewußt sind,
durchgeführt werden.

WARNING: Follow company and government safety regulations. Keep

unauthorized personnel out of the area when working on
equipment.

AVERTISSEMENT:Il est impératif de suivre les prérogatives imposées tant au niveau

gouvernmental qu’au niveau des entreprises. Les personnes non
autorisées ne peuvent rester près du système lorsque celui-ci
fonctionne.

WARNUNG: Befolgen Sie die gesetzlichen Sicherheitsbestimmungen Ihres

Landes. Halten Sie nicht authorisierte Personen während des
Betriebs vom Gerät fern.

20 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Safety
Safety Precautions

CAUTION: Please contact Veeco before attempting to move the Dimension

3100 SPM system.

ATTENTION: Il est impératif de contacter Veeco avant de déplacer le Dimension

3100 SPM.

VORSICHT: Bitte kontaktieren Sie Veeco bevor Sie das Dimension 3100 SPM
System transportieren.

WARNING: Voltages supplied to and within certain areas of the system are
potentially dangerous and can cause injury to personnel. Power-
down all components and unplug from power sources before doing
any electrical servicing. (Veeco service personnel, only).

AVERTISSEMENT:Les tensions utilisées dans le système sont potentiellement

dangeureuses et peuvent blesser les utilisateurs. Avant toute
intervention électrique, ne pas oublier de débrancher le système.
(Réservé au personnel de Veeco, seulement.)

WARNUNG: Die elektrischen Spannungen, die dem System zugeführt werden,

sowie Spannungen im System selbst sind potentiell gefährlich und
können zu Verletzungen von Personen führen. Bevor elektrische
Servicearbeiten irgendwelcher Art durchgeführt werden ist das
System auszuschalten und vom Netz zu trennen. (Nur Veeco
Personal.)

WARNING: Never alter pneumatics or wiring on the Dimension 3100 SPM.

AVERTISSEMENT:Ne jamais toucher les cables et l'installation pneumatique sur le

boîtier accoustique du Dimension 3100.

WARNUNG: Ändern Sie niemals etwas am pneumatischen System oder der

Verdrahtung der Schallschutzhaube.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 21

Safety
Safety Precautions

WARNING: The Dimension 3100 SPM contains a diode laser with an output of
less than 1.0mW at 670nm.

AVERTISSEMENT:Le microscope “Dimension 3100 SPM” est équipé d’une diode

laser dont la puissance de sortie est inférieure à 1mW à 670nm.

WARNUNG: Das Dimension 3100 SPM ist mit einem Halbleiterlaser

ausgerüstet, dessen Ausgangsleistung kleiner ist als 1.0mW bei
670nm.

WARNING: Do not use acetone to clean the Dimension 3100 SPM.

AVERTISSEMENT:Ne pas utiliser d’acétone pour nettoyer le Dimension 3100 SPM.

WARNUNG: Bitte verwenden sie kein Azeton um das Dimension 3100 SPM zu
reinigen.

22 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Safety
Safety Precautions

WARNING: The Dimension 3100 SPM uses a halogen lamp to illuminate

samples. Exposure to non-ionizing radiation from this lamp is well
within the current exposure guidelines published by the American
Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH).
Typical IR exposure to the user from the sample illuminator is less
than 3 mW/cm2. UV radiation is not detectable.

AVERTISSEMENT:Le microscope Dimension 3100 SPM est équipé d'une lampe

halogène pour illuminer les échantillons. L'exposition aux
radiations non-ionisantes de cette lampe est trés inférieure aux
recommandations publiées par “l' American Conference of
Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)”. Les radiations IR
dues à cette lampe sont typiquement inférieures à 3 mW/cm2. Les
radiations UV ne sont pas détectables.

WARNUNG: Das Dimension 3100 SPM System ist mit einer Halogenlampe
ausgestattet, um die Probe zu beleuchten. Die von dieser Lampe
ausgehende Strahlenbelastung der nichtionisierenden Strahlung
liegt weit unter den publizierten Richtwerten der American
Conference of Govermental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH). Die
fuer den Benutzer typische IR Strahlenbelastung der
Beleuchtungseinheit ist kleiner als 3 mW/cm2. UV Strahlung ist
nicht nachweisbar.

2.2.2 Microscope

To avoid operator injury and equipment damage, observe the following cautions regarding the
Dimension 3100 microscope.

CAUTION: If you use the equipment in a manner not specified by the

manufacturer, you can impair the protection provided by the
instrument.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 23

Safety
Safety Precautions

CAUTION: Stage microscopes feature an automated X-Y stage and Z-axis

capable of programmed movement. The movements of all axes are
slow, but are capable of exerting high forces. A hand caught in the
stage of a Dimension 3100 SPM could be injured severely.

ATTENTION: La platine des microscopes est automatisée dans les directions X, Y

et Z, et est programmable. Les mouvements selon ces 3 axes sont
lents, but peuvent excercer des forces importantes. La main d’un
utilisateur pourrait être sévèrement endommagée si elle se trouvait
coincée par cette platine.

VORSICHT: Mikroskope mit automatisiertem Probentisch können

programmierte Bewegungen in X-, Y- und Z-Richtung
durchführen. Die Bewegungen in allen drei Richtungen sind
langsam, können aber sehr große Kräfte ausüben. Eine Hand, die
vom Probentisch des Dimension 3100 SPMs erfaßt wird, kann
leicht ernsthaft verletzt werden.

WARNING: The internal electronics of the microscope, controllers, and

peripheral equipment feature high-voltage components. Because
there are no user-serviceable parts, do not attempt system repairs.
Disconnect faulty components and ship them to Veeco for repair or
replacement.

AVERTISSEMENT:Les parties électroniques du microscope, du controleur et des

équipements périphériques comportent des équipements
fonctionnant avec de hauts voltages. Ne pas essayer d’effectuer de
réparations, aucune de ces parties n’étant concue pour être réparée
par l’utilisateur. Déconnecter les équipements défectueux et les
envoyer à Digital Instruments/Veeco pour réparation.

WARNUNG: Die Elektronik des Mikroskops selbst, der Steuergeräte und der
externen Geräte ist mit Hochspannungselementen ausgestattet.
Diese Elemente dürfen nur von geschultem Personal gewartet
werden. Versuchen Sie nicht, das System selbst zu reparieren.
Trennen Sie fehlerhafte Komponenten vom System, und schicken
sie diese zur Reparatur oder zum Umtausch zu Veeco.

24 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Safety
Safety Precautions

WARNING: Do not attempt repairs on electrical components. If it is necessary

to enter the electrical chassis for any reason (e.g., to replace a
computer card), power-down the entire system and disconnect it
from its power source.

AVERTISSEMENT:Ne pas essayer de réparer les parties électroniques. Si il est

nécessaire d’accéder au boitier électronique (pour remplacer une
carte dans l’ordinateur par exemple), éteindre tout le système et le
déconnecter.

WARNUNG: Versuchen Sie nicht, elektrische Komponenten selbst zu reparieren.

Falls es aus irgend einem Grund notwendig sein sollte, ein
Gehäuse mit elektrischen Bauteilen zu öffnen (z.B., um eine
Computer-Karte auszutauschen), schalten Sie das gesamte System
ab, und trennen Sie es von der Spannungsquelle.

CAUTION: Avoid spilling fluids onto the microscope stage or into electrical
assemblies, particularly the SPM head. If it is necessary to use
fluids, apply only small amounts as needed.

ATTENTION: Eviter d’éclabousser la platine du microscope et les assemblages

électriques, en particulier la tête du microscope. Si il est nécessaire
d’utiliser des liquides, ne les employer qu’en faibles quantités.

VORSICHT: Vermeiden Sie es, Flüssigkeiten auf dem Probentisch oder über
elektronische Bauteile, insbesondere den Mikroskopkopf, zu
verschütten. Wenn es notwendig ist, Flüssigkeiten zu verwenden,
benutzen Sie dem Bedarf entsprechend nur geringe Mengen.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 25

Safety
Ergonomics

2.2.3 Sample Safeguards

CAUTION: Do not change samples in the middle of operation. Verify that the
stage is clear of tools, objects, and debris at all times. Use alcohol
wipes periodically to keep the stage clean of dust. Dispose of wipes
in an appropriately labelled solvent-contaminated waste container.

ATTENTION: Ne pas changer d’échantillon en cours d’utilisation. Vérifier que la

platine n’est pas encombrée, par des outils par exemple. Employer
des tampons d’alcool régulièrement pour dépoussiérer la platine.

VORSICHT: Tauschen Sie keine Proben aus, während sich das System im
Betrieb befindet. Der Probentisch sollte von Werkzeug, anderen
Objekten und Überresten ständig freigehalten werden. Benutzen
Sie ein mit Alkohol getränktes Tuch, um den Probentisch
regelmäßig von Staub zu reinigen.

CAUTION: All interlocks are provided to ensure operator and sample safety.
Do not attempt to bypass interlocks.

ATTENTION: Tous les intelocks sont fournis pour assurer toute sécurité à
l’utilisateur. Ne pas essayer de ne pas les employer.

VORSICHT: Alle Sperrvorrichtungen des Systems sind dazu vorgesehen,

Personal und Probe zu schützen. Versuchen Sie nicht,
Sperrvorrichtungen zu umgehen.

2.3 Ergonomics
The Dimension 3100 SPM design promotes compatibility in the integration of user personnel and
equipment within a semiconductor manufacturing environment. Specifically, the ergonomics of the
Dimension 3100 SPM design prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and minimizes
procedural errors.

26 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Safety
Environmental Conditions

2.4 Environmental Conditions

Environmental conditions that may affect the performance of the Dimension 3100 SPM are
vibration and noise. See Chapter 3 for detailed condition specifications.

2.5 Equipment Safety Applications

2.5.1 Dimension 3100 SPM Facility Requirements

Figure 2.5a Dimension 3100 SPM Footprint

14.2"
361 mm
AIR AND VACUUM

18.7"
475 mm
13.5" AIR AND
343 mm VACUUM

2.6 Power-up Sequence (Installation and Service Only)

The following section is required only during installation or after servicing and should NOT be used
by untrained personnel. For a description of normal power-up procedures, see Section 2.7.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 27

Safety
Power-up Sequence (Installation and Service Only)

2.6.1 Pre Power-up Checklist

CAUTION: You must complete the pre power-up checklist before proceeding
with facilities connections and the power-up procedure.

ATTENTION: Vous devez effectuer une checklist pour vérifier la mise sous
tension avant de mettre en place les connections et commencer la
procédure de mise sous tension.

VORSICHT: Gehen Sie durch die folgende Checkliste („Pre-Power-up

Checklist”), bevor Sie Verbindungen zum Netzanschluß und zu den
Versorgungsleitungen herstellen und das System einschalten.

Pre-Installation

_______ 1. Verify that there is a minimum installation space of 10' (-305 cm) wide x 7.5' (–230cm) deep.

Note: Refer to Chapter 3 for facilities requirements specific to the various Dimension
3100 configurations.

_______ 2. Verify that AC power (100V, 120V, 220V-240V single phase) is available to the system.

_______ 3. Verify the power disconnection device is easily located.

_______ 4. Verify that clean dry air is available at 60-100 psi to the vibration isolation table.

_______ 5. Verify that vacuum is available at ≥24" Hg to the system (IS3K-2 acoustic hood only). A vacuum
pump is integrated into the Dimension 3100 controller for use with enclosures other than the
IS3K-2.

Module Installation

_______ 1. Uncrate the Dimension 3100 SPM system components.

_______ 2. Verify all facilities requirements outlined in Chapter 3 are met.

_______ 3. Install the Dimension 3100 SPM by completing the following:

______ Set the vibration isolation table or microscope platform in place.
______ Transition the Dimension 3100 SPM to the final operating location.
______ Secure the chuck base and stage.

28 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Safety
Power-up Sequence (Installation and Service Only)

______ 4. Install the control station by completing the following:

_______ Set the table to be used as the control station next to the Dimension 3100 SPM.
_______ Place the input and display devices on the user console (monitors [2], mouse,
keyboard and trackball).
_______ Place the computer and controllers on the control station.

Connections

CAUTION: Make sure to power-down all systems at this point to ensure that
there is no risk of electrical shock.

ATTENTION: Vérifiez que tous les systèmes ne soient plus sous tension à ce
moment, et assurez vous qu’il n’y a pas de risque de choc
électrique.

VORSICHT: Überzeugen Sie sich, daß zu diesem Zeitpunkt alle Geräte

ausgeschaltet sind, um die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schocks
auszuschließen.

______ 1. Connect the control station extensions.

_______ Computer AC power cable to power strip
_______ Monitor power cables (2) to power strip
_______ Monitor video cable to computer
_______ Keyboard to computer
_______ Mouse to computer
_______ Trackball to computer

______ 2. Connect the Dimension 3100 SPM unit extensions.

_______ Serial cable (12’) from computer to Dimension 3100 SPM back panel
_______ BNC cable from computer to Dimension 3100 SPM back panel
_______ RJ45 LAN cable from computer to host
_______ Serial cable (6’) from computer to Dimension 3100 controller
_______ 37-pin D cable from NanoScope controller to Dimension 3100 back panel. (the Basic
Extender and Quadrex connect between Nanoscope controller and D3100.)
_______ Vacuum hose assembly from Dimension 3100 controller to Dimension 3100 SPM
back panel

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 29

Safety
Power-up Sequence (Installation and Service Only)

______ 25-pin D cable from computer to NanoScope controller

______ NanoScope controller AC power cable to power strip
______ DC power cable from Dimension 3100 controller to Dimension 3100 SPM back
panel
______ Fiber optic cable from Dimension 3100 controller to Dimension 3100 SPM objective

Final Installation

CAUTION: The objective, Dimension head, and vacuum sample chuck should
be the final equipment installed due to the sensitive nature of these
components.

ATTENTION: L’objectif, la tête du Dimension and la platine porte-échantillon

devraient être installés en dernier, à cause de leur fragilité.

VORSICHT: Das Objektiv, der Mikroskopkopf und der Vakuumprobenhalter

sind empfindliche Komponenten des Dimension SPMs, und sollten
als letztes installiert werden.

_______ 1. Install the objective.

_______ 2. Install the Dimension head.

_______ 3. Mount the vacuum sample chuck.

2.6.2 Turn on the Dimension 3100 SPM (Service and Installation Only)

1. Verify that all system components are plugged into AC power with the correct voltage.

2. Verify that all cables are connected properly.

3. Turn on the computer using the push-button switch located on the front of the computer.

4. Turn on the monitors (2) using the push-button switches located on the front of the monitors.

5. Turn on the NanoScope controller using the power switch located on the rear of the
NanoScope controller.

6. Turn on the Dimension 3100 controller using the power switch on the rear of the Dimension
3100 controller.

30 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Safety
Power-Up Sequence (Normal Usage)

2.6.3 Power-up Checklist (Service and Installation Only)

Power-up (Installation Only)

______ 1. Connect the facilities.

_______ Vacuum (VAC): ≥24”Hg (IS3K acoustic hood only)
_______ Clean dry air (CDA): 60-100psi

______ 2. Verify that all system components are plugged into AC power with the correct voltage.

______ 3. Verify that all cables are connected properly.

______ 4. Verify that the computer, controllers, and monitors turn on simultaneously.

2.7 Power-Up Sequence (Normal Usage)

2.7.1 Prepare the System for Power-up (Normal Usage)

1. Verify that all system components are plugged into AC power with the correct voltage.

2. Verify that all moving parts are free of obstructions.

3. Verify that all cables are connected properly.

4. Turn on the computer using the push-button switch located on the front of the computer.

5. Turn on the monitors (2) using the push-button switches located on the front of the monitors.

6. Turn on the NanoScope controller using the power switch located on the rear of the
NanoScope controller.

7. Turn on the Dimension 3100 controller using the power switch on the rear of the Dimension
3100 controller.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 31

Safety
Software Power-up

2.7.2 Power-up Checklist (Normal Usage)

Power-up (Normal Usage)

_______ 1. Verify that all system components are plugged into AC power with the correct voltage.

_______ 2. Verify that all moving parts are free of obstructions.

_______ 3. Verify that all cables are connected properly.

_______ 4. Verify that the computer, controllers, and monitors turn on simultaneously.

2.8 Software Power-up

CAUTION: At this time, all pre power-up and power-up instructions must be
completed before continuing.

ATTENTION: A ce moment, toutes les étapes avant la mise en tension et de mise

en tension doivent être effectuées avant de continuer.

VORSICHT: An dieser Stelle müssen die „Pre Power-up” und „Power-up”

Checklisten komplett sein, bevor Sie fortfahren.

2.8.1 Log into Windows NT

1. Press CTRL-ALT-DELETE to log into Windows NT (see Figure 2.8a).

Note: The screen begins with the panel split across both screens.

2. Drag the panel to one screen for use (see Figure 2.8a).

32 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Safety
Software Power-up

Figure 2.8a Log into Windows NT

CTRL-ALT-DELETE

1620-915-A

2.8.2 Log On

In the Logon Information window, enter the default settings into the User Name and Password
fields (see Figure 2.8b).

1. User Name: NANOSCOPE

2. Password: (Leave blank)

Note: If you are unable to log on, verify with the process engineer that the password
has not been changed. The system is shipped from the factory with a blank
password.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 33

Safety
Software Power-up

Figure 2.8b Logon Window

Logon Information

User Name: Nanoscope Enter “Nanoscope”

Password: Leave Blank

1364-915-A
2.8.3 Start the NanoScope Software

Go to the desktop and click on the NanoScope icon or select the D:\SPM\z.exe file to start the
NanoScope software (see Figure 2.8c).

Figure 2.8c Select the NanoScope Icon

2.8.4 Select Realtime

Click the Realtime icon, or select Realtime from the DI menu (see Figure 2.8d). The system
automatically initializes for approximately one minute.

Figure 2.8d Select the Realtime Icon

Realtime Icon

The stage may need to be initialized any time the system or one of its components has been
powered-down. This allows the stage controller and computer to locate home positions and reset
the coordinate system of the stage. If the Focus Surface and Locate Tip icons are
grayed out, the stage needs to be initialized.

34 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Safety
Hazard Labels

2.8.5 Begin Stage Initialization

• Select Stage > Initialize.

Note: Various axes of motion move to home positions (Zoom, Focus, and Z axes)
during initialization. The control screen displays a status panel to guide the user
through the initialization process (see Figure 2.8e).

Figure 2.8e Status Panel

016
2.8.6 Software Power-up Checklist

______ 1. Press CTRL-ALT-DELETE.

______ 2. Log on using your user name and password.

______ 3. Start the NanoScope software.

______ 4. Select Realtime.

______ 5. Begin stage initialization if necessary.

2.9 Hazard Labels

The Dimension 3100 SPM hazard labeling system identifies possible hazard areas. Caution must be
taken according to the label warnings when working with associated areas. The following labels
appear on the Dimension 3100 SPM:

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 35

Safety
Hazard Labels

2.9.1 Laser Warning Labels

Laser Explanatory Label

The Laser Explanatory Label (see Figure 2.9a) indicates that the area to which the label is affixed
is affected by a laser. The Laser Explanatory Label is affixed on the Dimension SPM head.

Figure 2.9a Laser Explanatory Label

035
Laser Warning Label

The Laser Warning Label (see Figure 2.9b) indicates that the area to which the label is affixed is
affected by a laser. The Laser Warning Label is affixed on the Dimension SPM head.

Figure 2.9b Laser Warning Label

Noninterlocked Protective Housing Label

The Noninterlocked Protective Housing Label (see Figure 2.9c) indicates that the area to which
the label is affixed is affected by a laser. The Noninterlocked Protective Housing Label is affixed to
the manual access door.

Figure 2.9c Noninterlocked Protective Housing Label

36 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 3 Facilities Requirements

This chapter details facility site requirements, safety requirements, and configuration options for
the Dimension 3100 Scanning Probe Microscope. Specifically, this chapter details environmental
requirements and equipment facilities drawings. Compliance with the following requirements and
specifications is essential before beginning installation.

• Optional Configurations: Section 3.1

• VT-103-3K with ELCON: Section 3.1.1

• VT-102: Section 3.1.2

• IS3K-2: Section 3.1.3

• Facilities Requirements: Section 3.2

• Acoustic/Vibration Isolation Systems: Section 3.3

• IS3K-2 Dimensions, Utilities, and Clearance: Section 3.3.1

• VT-103-3K Dimensions, Utilities and Clearance: Section 3.3.2

• VT-102 Dimensions and Utilities: Section 3.3.3

• Computer/Controller Facility Requirements: Section 3.3.4

• ELCON Console: Section 3.3.5

• Facilities Requirements Summary: Section 3.4

• Acoustic/Vibration Specifications: Section 3.5

• General Facilities Guidelines: Section 3.6

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 37

Facilities Requirements
Optional Configurations

3.1 Optional Configurations

The following are typical configurations for the Dimension 3100 Scanning Probe Microscope,
detailing options for acoustic and mechanical vibration isolation, as well as various options for
positioning the control station (computer, control electronics, and accessories). Facilities
requirements depend on what type of configuration is used.

3.1.1 VT-103-3K with ELCON

This configuration has two basic elements: the VT-103-3K, which is an integrated air table and
acoustic hood for vibration isolation, and the ELCON (electronics console) which is an optional
small footprint/compact console (see Figure 3.1a). The VT-103-3K is comprised of an air table, on
which the Dimension 3100 microscope rests (not shown) and an acoustic hood which can be raised
to access the instrument, and lowered to seal the instrument during operation. The ELCON is a
compact control station console used to house the computer and control electronics underneath, and
the monitors, mouse and keyboard on top. The VT-103-3K and the ELCON do not require one
another and can be used independently.

Figure 3.1a VT-103-3K with ELCON

4001

38 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Facilities Requirements
Optional Configurations

3.1.2 VT-102

This configuration consists of two basic elements: the VT-102 which is an air table for vibration
isolation, and a typical “table top” version of the control station (computer, control electronics, and
accessories). The VT-102 is a compact air table on which the Dimension 3100 microscope rests and
does not include an acoustic hood. Figure 3.1b illustrates the “table top” version of the control
station in one of many possible configurations used to position the control station elements. This
configuration includes the two electronics boxes stacked atop each other on the far right of the
table; the tower computer placed next to them on the table top; and the monitors (2), keyboard, and
mouse located on the far left. There are many ways to station the equipment, including placing the
electronics boxes on the floor or underneath the monitors, or placing computer on the floor, which
may save some space and change the facilities requirements.

Figure 3.1b VT-102

4003

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 39

Facilities Requirements
Optional Configurations

3.1.3 IS3K-2

This configuration is comprised of one basic element, the IS3K-2. The IS3K-2 is an ultra compact/
small footprint console containing the control station, the microscope, and an integrated vibration
isolation and acoustic enclosure (see Figure 3.1c). This setup consists of the following: two control
boxes and a rack mount computer mounted underneath the console and between the table legs. The
monitors are flat panel displays and mount on the top of the acoustic hood with adjustable arm
attachments. The keyboard and mouse (not shown) sit on the small ledge at the front of the
instrument. Finally, the Dimension 3100 microscope (not shown) rests on top of the vibration
isolation table inside the IS3K-2 acoustic hood. The entire acoustic hood can raise and lower during
installation. For general operation, the microscope is accessed via the small door on the front of the
acoustic hood. Although the IS3K-2 is extremely compact (ideal for clean rooms), this
configuration has limited working space and may require an extra table for sample preparation and
cantilever installation.

Figure 3.1c IS3K-2

4002

40 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Facilities Requirements
Facilities Requirements

3.2 Facilities Requirements

Figure 3.2a Dimension 3100 SPM Facility Requirements

14.2"
361 mm
Air and Vacuum

18.7"
475 mm
13.5" Air and
343 mm Vacuum

4005

Top View Front View Side View

Weight: 150 lbs. for Dimension 3100 SPM assembly only.

Note: Vibration and acoustic isolation is strongly recommended (see Section 3.5).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 41

Facilities Requirements
Acoustic/Vibration Isolation Systems

3.3 Acoustic/Vibration Isolation Systems

3.3.1 IS3K-2 Dimensions, Utilities, and Clearance

The IS3K-2 is painted with cardinal paint 6400 series. The system does not outgas. An all stainless
version of the IS3K-2 is available as a special order for an additional cost.

An appropriate seat should be used which brings the user’s knees to within 3-4 inches (76-102mm)
of the bottom of the keyboard tray.

Figure 3.3a IS3K-2 - Front View

4009

62.0"
1575 mm

4"
101.6 mm

4.25"
108 mm External Vacuum
Supply Module

42 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Facilities Requirements
Acoustic/Vibration Isolation Systems

Figure 3.3b IS3K-2 - Side View

48.0" Open
127 mm
42.0" Closed
106 mm

4010

30.0"
Electical
765 mm
and Vacuum
Hook-up

Figure 3.3c IS3K-2 - Top View

30.5"
775 mm

42.0"
1066 mm

9.0"
228.6 mm

External
Vacuum
Supply 4011
Module

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 43

Facilities Requirements
Acoustic/Vibration Isolation Systems

Figure 3.3d IS3K-2 Leveling Feet Location - Bottom View

2.0"
51 mm
26.5"
2.0" 673 mm
51 mm Leveling
Feet, Typ.

Envelope of
24.6" Swivel
625 mm Casters. Typ.

É” 3.0"
76 mm

4012

Figure 3.3e IS3K-2 Footprint Requirements - Top View

6.0" 6.0"
152 mm 152 mm

6.0"
152 mm

IS3K-2

39.0"
External 991mm
Vacuum
Supply
Module

40.0"
1016 mm

4013

Operator Service
Access
FRONT Access

44 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Facilities Requirements
Acoustic/Vibration Isolation Systems

3.3.2 VT-103-3K Dimensions, Utilities and Clearance

An isolation hood/table is required for acoustic and vibration isolation of the Dimension 3100. The
table must be moved to its final location before Veeco personnel can install and train on the SPM.

Figure 3.3f VT-103-3K - Front View

4006

50.0"
1270 mm

27.3"
693 mm

4.0" square
102 mm
34.2"
869 mm

Figure 3.3g VT-103-3K - Side View with Acoustic Hood Open and Closed

62.0"
1575 mm

4007 32.2" 15.0"

818 mm 381 mm

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 45

Facilities Requirements
Acoustic/Vibration Isolation Systems

Figure 3.3h VT-103-3K - Top View with Acoustic Hood Closed

36"
914 mm
Air

35.5" 33.0"
902 mm 838 mm

4008

3.3.3 VT-102 Dimensions and Utilities

The vibration isolation table may be supplied in lieu of the VT-103-3K or IS3K-2 for selected
applications that do not require acoustic isolation for the desired performance level.The table must
be moved to its final location before Veeco personnel can install and train on the SPM.

Figure 3.3i VT-102 Vibration Isolation Table

24.0"
610 mm
AIR

31.0"
24.0"
787 mm
610 mm

4014

4.5" sq.
114 mm sq.
23.0"
584 mm

Top View Side and Front View

46 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Facilities Requirements
Acoustic/Vibration Isolation Systems

3.3.4 Computer/Controller Facility Requirements

The IS3K-2 allows placement of the computer/controller within the framework of the unit. No
additional footprint is required.

Customer must supply computer and controller table or order the optional Elcon console for
enclosure.

Figure 3.3j SPM Control Electronics Footprint

AC Power Supply Here
6" CLR. Required for Cables
152.4 mm

Display Control CPU

Monitor Monitor 17.0" 18.5"
431.8 mm 469.9 mm
AIir and Vacuum 30.0"
Supply Module 762 mm
18.0"
457.2 mm (SPM
Mouse
Controller
Trackball
Below) Keyboard

6.0" Air and Vacuum Display Control CPU

152.4 mm Supply Module Monitor Monitor 16.5" 17.0"
419.1 mm 431.8 mm
6.0" SPM
152.4 mm Controller

20.0" 16.0" 16.0" 7.3"

508 mm 406.4 mm 406.4 mm 185.4 mm
60" min. 4004
1524 mm

Top View Front View

Weight: 170 lbs. nominal total; 140 typically on table top.

Note: Dimensions shown for computer and controller equipment are approximate and
subject to change without notice.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 47

Facilities Requirements
Acoustic/Vibration Isolation Systems

3.3.5 ELCON Console

The ELCON Console is available as an option for the computer/controller enclosure

Figure 3.3k Optional ELCON Console

AC POWER SUPPLY HERE

3959 6" CLR. REQUIRED FOR CABLES

CONTROL DISPLAY
MONITOR
Elcon:
MONITOR

Weight: 400 lbs.

(includes all
36.0" electronics)
914 mm

MOUSE
Power: 1,800W;
1 phase; 100V,
KEYBOARD 120V or 240V
TRACK BALL
37.0" Min. Door width
940 mm required: 36"

Top View

CONTROL DISPLAY
MONITOR MONITOR

48.7"
1,237 mm

31.7"
805 mm
3960

Front View

48 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Facilities Requirements
Facilities Requirements Summary

3.4 Facilities Requirements Summary

If the Dimension 3100 system is used in a clean room with raised floors a pedestal must be provided
to support leveling feet on the IS3K-2 or VT-103-3K. House vacuum is optional in all cases. If used,
connections should accept a 1/8" or 1/4" male NPT fitting or 170 ID x .250 OD flexible house.

Note: The following summary does not include computer/controller or optional elcon
console enclosure requirements.

Table 3.4a Dimension 3100 Facilities Requirements Summary

Dimension 3100 with Dimension 3100 with Dimension 3100 with

Utility With
VT-103-3K Hood/Table IS3K-2 Hood/Table VT-102 Table
Electrical 1,800W; single phase; 100V, 1,800W; single phase;100V, 1,800W; single phase; 100V,
120V or 240V duplex outlet; 120V or 240V duplex outlet; 120V or 240V duplex outlet;
dedicated circuit, 50/60Hz dedicated circuit, 50/60Hz dedicated circuit, 50/60Hz
Disconnect or None required None required None required
Shutoff
Clean Dry Air for Supplied with Dimension 3100 Supplied with Dimension 3100 Supplied with Dimension 3100
Sample Chuck by air and vacuum supply by air and vacuum supply by air and vacuum supply
module module module
Clean Dry Air for Requires user supplied air 60-80 None required Requires user supplied air 60-80
Air Table PSI, 1 CFM2 PSI, 1 CFM2
Vacuum for Supplied with Dimension 3100 Supplied with Dimension 3100 Supplied with Dimension 3100
Sample Holddown or house vacuum -25in. Hg2 (ext. vac. supply module) or or house vacuum -25in. Hg2
house vac. -25 in.Hg2
Exhaust None required None required None required
Lan Connection None required but network None required but network sup- None required but network sup-
support card included port card is included port card is included
Approximate 36" x 33.0" 30.5" x 42.0" 23.0" x 23.0"
Footprints
Hood and Table 1,100 pounds evenly 1,200 pounds (including com- 750 pounds evenly distributed
Including SPM distributed puter/controller)
Min. Door Width 36" minimum 32" minimum 26" minimum
Environment/ See Section 3.1. See Section 3.1. See Section 3.1.
Noise

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 49

Facilities Requirements
Acoustic/Vibration Specifications

3.5 Acoustic/Vibration Specifications

The following conditions must be met in order to achieve 0.5 angstrom RMS noise specifications:

• Acoustic: Acoustic noise should not exceed 75dBC (Note “C” weighting).

• Vibration: Vibration of the SPM mounting surface should not exceed VC-D in any
direction, vertical or horizontal.

Figure 3.5a Vibration Criteria Plot

100
1959-940-A

Workshop (ISO)
90 32,000
Velocity Level in dB re 1 micro-inch/sec

Office (ISO)
16,000
80
Residential Day (ISO)
8,000
Perception Threshold (ISO)
Operating Theater (ISO)
70 4,000

BBN Criterion A
2,000

60 BBN Criterion B 1,000

BBN Criterion C
500

50
BBN Criterion D
250
BBN Criterion E
125
40
4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160

5 8 12.5 20 31.5 50 80 125

One-Third Octave Band Frequency in Hz

BBN Criterion A - Probe Test Equipment. 100X Microscopes

BBN Criterion B - 500X Microscopes. Aligners, Steppers to 5µm Geometries
BBN Criterion C - 1000X Microscopes. Aligners, Steppers to 1.5µm Geometries
BBN Criterion D - Steppers, E-Beams to 0.3µm Geometries, CD Inspection Equipment.
Most SEMs to 50,000X
BBN Criterion E - Anticipated Adequate for Future Fabrication and Test Equipment
for Low Submicron Geometries

50 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Facilities Requirements
General Facilities Guidelines

3.6 General Facilities Guidelines

The following list contains general facilities recommendations for the Dimension 3100 system:

• For the VT-103-3K and VT-102 vibration isolation systems, you must provide either
clean dry air or nitrogen with a pressure capacity of 80psi in order to float the air tables.
You must provide the regulator for adjusting the pressure from the source. The source
can be either a house air system or a tank.

• Do not mount PA/Paging speakers near the AFM. If a speaker is required use a local
volume control instead.

• Keep the telephone ringer on low and install the telephone away from the AFM. Or, turn
the telephone ringer off and install a flashing light as a substitute ringer.

• Do not install fluorescent lighting with switching ballasts (also referred to as electronic
ballasts). Standard high efficiency ballasts are fine.

• Install baffling in the air ducts to reduce the hissing from the HVAC system or use non-
powered HEPA filters. This type of filtering is called Class M7 or 245,000. An in-line
fan is installed upstream to provide pressure for the HEPA filter. If installing locally
powered HEPA fans, a local on/off switch is needed to turn the fans off while images are
captured.

• Add insulation to all walls. If possible, all walls should be hard walls as opposed to
temporary walls. Installing insulation in the ceiling helps to damper the acoustic noise
from the roof.

• Temperature is standard laboratory setting +/- 2.5° F.

• Humidity is standard laboratory setting +/- 10% RH.

• Power should be in dedicated 115 volt standard duplex outlet (15 amp).

• Clean Dry Air (CDA) is required with a recommended connection of 0.25-inch poly-flow
tubing with a range of 0-100 PSI.

• Customer installed house vacuum and vacuum wand is recommended for wafer loading
and unloading.

• Customer installed nitrogen is recommended for the blow-off nozzle.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 51/(54 Blank)

Chapter 4 Installation

This chapter details the installation procedure for the Dimension 3100 Scanning Probe Microscope
(SPM) system from receiving to full installation. Specifically, the following topics are discussed in
this chapter:

• Shipping and Receiving: Section 4.1

• Equipment Requirements: Section 4.1.1

• Uncrating the System: Section 4.2

• Uncrate the Dimension 3100 SPM System: Section 4.2.1

• Installing the Dimension 3100 System: Section 4.3

• Install the Dimension 3100 SPM Unit: Section 4.3.1

• Install the Control Station: Section 4.3.2

• Connecting the Dimension 3100 System: Section 4.4

• Dimension 3100 Control Station Connections: Section 4.4.1

• Dimension 3100 Microscope External Components Connections: Section 4.4.2

• System Power-up: Section 4.5

CAUTION: Installation should be completed by trained Veeco personnel only.

Installation instructions are provided for customer reference only.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 53

Installation
Shipping and Receiving

4.1 Shipping and Receiving

4.1.1 Equipment Requirements

The following equipment is necessary for successful installation of the Dimension 3100 SPM
system. Verify the following is on-hand before beginning installation:

Equipment Received

• Dimension 3100 Manual

• Dimension 3100 Controller

• Dimension 3100 Microscope

• Dimension Microscope Head

• Computer

• Hard Drive Back-up on CD

• Mouse, Keyboard and Trackball

• Dimension Accessories Kit

• Cantilever Stand

• Tip Holders (2)

• Wafer Handling Tool Kit

• Calibration Standard

• Vibration Isolation Pad

• Cable Clamp (needed only with VT-103 vibration isolation table)

• Power Strip

• 8" Sample Chuck (option)

• Extender Box (option)

54 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Installation
Shipping and Receiving

Cables Received

• Controller-to-Dimension 3100 Cable, 37-pin D

• Dimension 3100 DC Power Cable

• Fiber Optic Cable

• Frame Grabber Video Cable (BNC to BNC)

• Power Cords (3)

• Serial Cable, 9-pin D, 12'

• Serial Cable, 9-pin D, 6' (3)

• Vacuum Hose Assembly

• Applications Module Cable (with NanoScope IV only)

• Closed Loop Preamp Cable (with Closed Loop only)

Tools Received

• 1/2" Wrench (2)

• Small Flat Head Screwdriver

• Phillips Screwdriver

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 55

Installation
Uncrating the System

4.2 Uncrating the System

4.2.1 Uncrate the Dimension 3100 SPM System

1. Using scissors, cut and remove the plastic shipping band encircling the Dimension 3100
shipping crate.

2. Lift the cardboard shipping box off of the Dimension 3100 microscope.

3. Unscrew the 2 shipping bolts holding the shipping brackets in place at either side of the
Dimension 3100 microscope. Remove the shipping brackets and store with the Dimension
3100 shipping box in the event that the microscope must be shipped for maintenance or
repair.

4. Unpack all system components. Each of the items below are shipped in separate boxes:

• Dimension 3100 Microscope

• NanoScope Controller (if applicable)

• Dimension 3100 Controller

• Computer and Keyboard

• Dimension Microscope Head

• Computer and Microscope Accessories (Dimension accessories box)

• Chuck Base Hardware (packed with Dimension 3100 microscope)

5. Save and store the shipping box for the Dimension microscope head.

Note: If repair or calibration is necessary, the shipping box is crucial for safe return of
the head to the factory. It is also convenient to use for long-term storage.

CAUTION: Do not remove the plastic wrap from the microscope’s X-Y stage. Do
not remove the microscope head from its shipping box yet. The SPM
microscope head must remain in the box until ready for use.

56 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Installation
Installing the Dimension 3100 System

4.3 Installing the Dimension 3100 System

4.3.1 Install the Dimension 3100 SPM Unit

1. Place the vibration isolation table, or the microscope platform, at the desired location.

2. Place the vibration isolation pad on the isolation table.

3. Place the Dimension 3100 microscope in the operating location on the vibration isolation
table or other platform.

CAUTION: The Dimension 3100 microscope unit exceeds the two-person lift
weight limit and should be lifted with a mechanical assist. Use proper
lifting technique when removing or replacing the Dimension 3100
microscope. Improper lifting may cause muscle strain or back injury.

4. Carefully remove the plastic wrap from the X-Y stage.

5. Locate the clamps (2), screws (6), and flexure (1) used to secure the chuck base to the granite
block (see Figure 4.3a).

Figure 4.3a Hardware for Chuck Securement to Stage

Flexure
Clamps

Screws

6. Carefully slide the chuck base off the X-Y stage.

Note: Do not stretch or bend the vacuum lines. Do not remove the vacuum lines from
the chuck base.

7. Wipe down the granite and underside of the chuck base with isopropyl alcohol. Place the
chuck base back onto the granite. Dispose of wipes in an appropriately labelled solvent-
contaminated waste container.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 57

Installation
Installing the Dimension 3100 System

8. Align the two sets of three mounting holes on the long edges of the flexure with the three
mounting holes of the chuck base and the three mounting holes on the X-Y stage. Align one
clamp over the each set of three mounting holes (see Figure 4.3b).

9. Secure the chuck base in place on the X-Y stage by screwing the two clamps down onto the
flexure and stage, leaving the six screws slightly loose (see Figure 4.3b).

10. Apply moderate pressure to the chuck base to secure the base to the X-Y stage, and tighten
the six screws.

11. Locate the vacuum sample chuck shipped in the Dimension accessories box and wipe the top
of the chuck base and underside of the sample chuck with isopropyl alcohol. Dispose of
wipes in an appropriately labelled solvent-contaminated waste container.

12. Mount the sample chuck on the chuck base.

Figure 4.3b Secure the Chuck to the Stage

Chuck Base

Clamp

Flexure

58 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Installation
Installing the Dimension 3100 System

4.3.2 Install the Control Station

1. Set up a table to be used as the control station next to the Dimension 3100 microscope.

Note: Keep the control station in close proximity to the Dimension 3100 unit without
touching the vibration isolation table.

2. Place the following input and display equipment on the control station (see Figure 4.3c):

• Monitors (2)

• Keyboard

• Mouse and Mouse Pad

• Trackball

Figure 4.3c Dimension 3100 Input and Display Equipment

3919
Trackball Keyboard Mouse

3. Place the computer on the side of the input and display devices closest to the Dimension
3100 microscope.

4. Place the NanoScope controller and Dimension 3100 controller next to the computer.

CAUTION: Do not set the Dimension 3100 controller on its side.

CAUTION: Do not set the Dimension 3100 controller on the same table as the
Dimension 3100 microscope. Vibrations from the vacuum pump
affect imaging performance. You may stack the Dimension 3100
controller atop the NanoScope controller.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 59

Installation
Connecting the Dimension 3100 System

4.4 Connecting the Dimension 3100 System

CAUTION: Verify that the machine is powered-down and locked-out before
attempting to make any connections.

4.4.1 Dimension 3100 Control Station Connections

Connect the Display and Input Devices

1. Connect the monitor power cords (2) to the power strip, but do not initiate power.

2. Connect the (2) monitor video cables to the computer (see #5 in Figure 4.4a and Table 4.4a).

3. Connect the following input devices to the computer (see Figure 4.4a and Table 4.4a):

• Keyboard (#2)

• Mouse (#2)

• Trackball (#3)

Note: Do not exchange the mouse with the trackball by using your own cable
adapters—the trackball's extra buttons are used to manipulate the stage
software.

Connect the Computer

CAUTION: Boards may shift during the course of shipment. Improperly seated
boards may cause equipment damage. Remove the computer cover
and verify that all the boards are properly seated before powering-up
the computer.

Note: Wear an anti-static wristband during this operation to avoid potential damage to
the circuit boards.

60 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Installation
Connecting the Dimension 3100 System

Figure 4.4a Computer (rear view)

Computer

2 1

USB port 8
030

029
5 5
Video 2 Video 1

7 10
COM 4 COM 3
031

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 61

Installation
Connecting the Dimension 3100 System

Note: The computer ships with the network board disabled to avoid error messages
for computers not used on a network.

1. To use the computer on a network, select My Computer > Control > Panel > System >
Hardware Profiles > Properties > Network and click to uncheck the box. Click OK twice
to exit. Plug in your local network cable and restart the computer.

2. Connect extensions to the Computer. See Table 4.4a and Figure 4.4a for list of extensions,
connection information and connection location.

Table 4.4a Computer Connections

Fig Part
Cable Box Function
Ref Number
1 AC Power Cable 466-000-004 Power Strip Computer power

2 Mouse n/a Computer Input from mouse

2 Keyboard n/a Computer Input from keyboard

3 Trackball 860-000-022 Computer Input from trackball

(COM1)

4 Serial Cable (12') 464-000-010 D3100 Motor control for stage

Back Panel (COM2)

5 Monitor Cables (2) n/a Monitors Video signals

6 BNC Cable 462-000-002 D3100 Optical image signal from

Back Panel framegrabber

7 Serial Cable (6') n/a NanoScope Fast Scan (COM4)

NanoScope IV only Controller

8 Cable, n/a Host Network connection

RJ45 LAN

9 Cable, 25-pin D 464-000-012 NanoScope Computer to controller

Controller electronic interface

10 Serial Cable (6') 464-000-024 Dimension Serial communication w/

Controller Dimension controller
(COM3)

62 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Installation
Connecting the Dimension 3100 System

Connect the NanoScope Controller

Note: The NanoScope III and IIIa are addressed in this manual. For information
regarding a NanoScope IV, please refer to your NanoScope IV Controller
Manual (004-115-000).

Connect extensions to the NanoScope III (IIIa) Controller. See Table 4.4b, Figure 4.4b, and
Figure 4.4c for list of extensions, connection information and connection location.

Table 4.4b NanoScope III (IIIa) Controller Connections

Fig Part
Cable Box Function
Ref Number
1 Cable, 37-pin D 464-000-002 D3100 Microscope control
Back Panel

2 AC Power Cable 466-000-004 Power Strip NanoScope IIIa

controller power

3 Cable, 25-pin D 464-000-012 Computer Computer to controller

electronic interface

Figure 4.4b NanoScope IIIa Controller (front view)

NanoScope® IIIa
Scanning Probe Microscope Controller

POWER

1
MICROSCOPE

3902

Figure 4.4c NanoScope IIIa Controller (rear view)

TO COMPUTER

#1
I
3
O

#2 #3

PLACE ETL STICKER HERE

PLACE SERIAL STICKER HERE

AC POWER

3902

Note: Be sure to tighten the cable connector locking screws at both ends to prevent
accidental removal of the cable while the NanoScope Controller operates.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 63

Installation
Connecting the Dimension 3100 System

CAUTION: Do not remove or install the cable while the NanoScope IIIa
Controller is powered-up or in operation.

Connect the Dimension 3100 Controller

1. Connect extensions to the Dimension 3100 Controller. See Table 4.4c and Figure 4.4d for
list of extensions, connection information and connection location.

Note: The Dimension 3100 cables are bundled through the cable clamp provided if
the system includes a vibration isolation table. (See section titled Route the
VT103 Air Table Cabling at the end of the chapter).

Table 4.4c Dimension 3100 Controller Connections

Fig Part
Cable Box Function
Ref Number
1 AC Power 466-000-004 Power Strip Dimension 3100
controller Power

2 Vacuum Hose 860-000-012 D3100 Vacuum and air supply

Assembly Back Panel

3 Serial Cable (6') 464-000-024 Computer Serial communication w/

computer

4 DC Power Cable 820-000-006 D3100 Motor power

Back Panel

5 Fiber Optic Cable 443-000-001 D3100 Micro- Optics illumination

scope Optics

Figure 4.4d Dimension 3100 Controller (rear view)

2 3 4

DC
MICROSCOPE POWER
AIR & VACUUM
I SERIAL
PORT
O Lightbulb is the only
user serviceable part

1 5
AC
POWER
ETL STICKER HERE

SERIAL NO. STICKER HERE

3903

64 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Installation
Connecting the Dimension 3100 System

Figure 4.4e Dimension 3100 Controller (front view)

NanoScope®
DimensionTM 3100 Controller

Air Pressure Manual

Light Control
Chuck Vacuum Vacuum Pump

Status

123456789

3908

2. To set illumination, toggle the manual control switch on the front of the Dimension 3100
controller to ON for manual control or OFF for computer control (see Figure 4.4e).

Note: Each illumination system may vary in intensity. Adjust to preferred levels once
the system is operational—for computer adjustment there is an “illumination”
parameter on the Other Controls panel.

3. Lock the fiber optic cable in place after establishing connection to the Dimension 3100
controller and to the Dimension 3100 microscope optics. Tighten the respective locking
screws until they are snug.

4. Remove the temporary cover from the vacuum/air ports.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 65

Installation
Connecting the Dimension 3100 System

4.4.2 Dimension 3100 Microscope External Components Connections

Dimension 3100 Microscope Electronics Box Connections

1. Connect the external microscope components to the Electronics Box. See Table 4.4d and Figure
4.4f for list of extensions, connection information and connection location.

Table 4.4d Dimension 3100 Microscope Electronics Box Connections

Fig Part
Cable Box Function
Ref Number
1 Vacuum Hose 860-000-012 Dimension Vacuum and air supply
Assembly Controller

2 DC Power Cable 820-000-002 Dimension Motor power

Controller

3 BNC Cable 462-000-002 Computer Optical image signal from

framegrabber

4 Cable, 37-pin D 464-000-002 NanoScope Microscope control

Controller

5 Application Module 465-000-015 Application Application Module control

Sensor Cable, 15-pin D Module

6 Serial Cable (12') 464-000-010 Computer Motor control for stage

7 Cable, 14-pin 468-008-100 Closed Loop XY Closed Loop Head control

Preamp

Figure 4.4f D3100 Microscope Electronics Box (rear view)

1 2 34567

WARNING: Turn NanoScope controller box power

off before plugging or unplugging the
NanoScope controller cables

NANOSCOPE CONTROLLER SERIAL PORT

APPLICATION
VACUUM POWER VIDEO MODULES
015

NANOSCOPE IV AND QUADREX

EXTENDER BOX COMPATIBLE

1 2 3 4 5 6

66 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Installation
Connecting the Dimension 3100 System

2. Toggle the vacuum power switch, located on the front of the microscope unit, to OFF
(see Figure 4.4g).

Figure 4.4g Vacuum Power Switch

ON

VACUUM
OFF
Vacuum Power Switch

3918

Route the VT103 Air Table Cabling

Figure 4.4h Cable Clamp

NanoScope IIIa Controller to

Dimension 3100 Microscope
Cable, 37-pin D

Remaining Dimension 3100 Cables

3907

1. Route all cables connected to the Dimension 3100 microscope through the slot located in the
far right region of the VT103 vibration isolation table.

2. Position the Dimension 3100 microscope in the desired location.

3. Mark the cables with a marker to reference each cable’s position in the cable clamp (see
Figure 4.4h).

Note: When secured in place, the cable clamp is located underneath the vibration
isolation table, near the aforementioned slot (see Step 1).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 67

Installation
System Power-up

4. Disconnect all cables from the Dimension 3100 microscope, and remove the cables from the
slot.

5. Route cables through the cable clamp and secure the bolts using the supplied allen wrench.
Verify that the cables are not pinched in the cable clamp.

6. Re-route cables through the slot and re-connect cables to the Dimension 3100 microscope.

7. Secure the cable clamp by tightening the four bolts underneath the vibration isolation table.

4.5 System Power-up

CAUTION: The following section is required only during installation or after
servicing and should NOT be used by untrained personnel.

Prepare the System for Power-up

1. Verify that the power cord is plugged into a grounded power receptacle with the correct
voltage.

2. Verify that all cables are connected properly, especially the NanoScope III SPM controller to
the Dimension 3100 microscope electronics box.

CAUTION: Cables should not be removed or installed while power is applied to

the system. These restrictions do not apply to the small black cable
that connects the microscope head to the stage control electronics.

Power-up Sequence

1. Turn on the computer using the push-button switch located on the front of the computer.

2. Turn on the monitors (2) using the push-button switches located on the front of the monitors.

3. Turn on the NanoScope IIIa controller using the power switch located on the rear of the
NanoScope IIIa controller.

4. Turn on the Dimension 3100 controller, using the power switch on the rear of the Dimension
3100 controller.

68 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 5 Stage System

The Dimension 3100 Scanning Probe Microscope (SPM) features a large sample stage capable of
positioning large samples such as silicon wafers and computer hard drive media, as well as small
samples. The X-Y stage consists of a pair of stacked, perpendicular slides and uses an open loop
(unencoded) architecture with stepper motors to drive the stage to user-specified coordinates.

This chapter details procedures for mounting samples and dedicated stage menu software
commands. Specifically, this chapter discusses the following:

• Mounting of Samples: Section 5.1

• Vacuum Chucks: Section 5.1.1

• Magnetic Pucks: Section 5.1.2

• Axis Orientation—Motorized X-Y Stages: Section 5.1.3

• Stage Menu Commands: Section 5.2

• Load New Sample: Section 5.2.1

• Locate Tip: Section 5.2.2

• Focus Surface: Section 5.2.3

• Move To (X,Y): Section 5.2.4

• Set Reference: Section 5.2.5

• Programmed Move: Section 5.2.6

• Initialize: Section 5.2.7

• SPM Parameters: Section 5.2.8

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 69

Stage System
Mounting of Samples

5.1 Mounting of Samples

There are two methods widely used for mounting samples: vacuum chucks and magnetic pucks.
Regardless of the method used, verify that samples are mounted flat and parallel to the stage. This
is especially important for larger samples inspected over more than one site. Grossly tilted samples
may require raising the head higher whenever the sample is indexed, increasing cycle time and the
risk of probe-sample collision. Similarly, large numbers of identical samples should be mounted
the same way whenever possible to allow use of the same settings between samples.

5.1.1 Vacuum Chucks

Stages are equipped with vacuum chucks which are often employed for securing samples.

CAUTION: Operators should be cautious when handling larger samples with

the vacuum chuck—an 8-inch wafer held using 5 psi vacuum
sustains a loading of 250 lbs.

CAUTION: If debris is trapped between the stage and wafer, the wafer may
become scratched or broken. Keep the stage clean at all times using
isopropyl alcohol. Dispose of wipes in an appropriately labelled
solvent-contaminated waste container. When cleaning dust from
the stage area, use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush. DO NOT
clean stages using compressed air.

5.1.2 Magnetic Pucks

Samples may also be secured to the stage using magnetic pucks. This system allows for easy
mounting and removal of small samples. For detailed mounting instructions, see Chapter 7.

70 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Stage System
Mounting of Samples

5.1.3 Axis Orientation—Motorized X-Y Stages

When viewing the Dimension 3100 SPM from the front, stage movements are defined over two
axes of motion: X (left-right), and Y (front-back). For X-axis movements, lesser (decreasing)
coordinates are located to the left. For Y-axis movements, positive (increasing) coordinates are
located toward the rear of the machine, decreasing values are located forward (see Figure 5.1a).

Figure 5.1a Stage X-Y Axis Orientation

+Y

-X +X

-Y
(Front)

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 71

Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

5.2 Stage Menu Commands

Important stage menu commands are discussed in detail in the following sections:

• Load New Sample: Section 5.2.1

• Locate Tip: Section 5.2.2

• Focus Surface: Section 5.2.3

• Move To (X,Y): Section 5.2.4

• Set Reference: Section 5.2.5

• Programmed Move: Section 5.2.6

• Initialize: Section 5.2.7

• SPM Parameters: Section 5.2.8

5.2.1 Load New Sample

CAUTION: Do not move the stage while the microscope is scanning.

Stage software is designed to function between vertical movements of the head. Functions such as
Load New Sample first lift the head's probe from the sample surface, then index the stage to a
preprogrammed location (usually front-center) where samples may be rapidly reloaded.

To load or unload a sample from the stage using the Load New Sample function, complete the
following:

1. Select Load New Sample from the Stage pop-down menu. The screen displays a dialog box
(see Figure 5.2a).

Figure 5.2a Stage Load/Unload Prompt

Stage
Load/Unload?

Ok Cancel

72 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

2. To load a new sample, click OK. The head raises to the Load/Unload height, and the stage
indexes to the front-center position.

Note: Verify that the tip is still usable. If the tip has been used for a lengthy period, or
if damage is suspected, change the tip now per instructions provided in Chapter
7 of this manual.

3. To release the vacuum chuck’s hold on a sample, use the pneumatic toggle switch located on
the upper-right corner of the electronics box. When the vacuum is released, remove the
sample.

4. Verify that the stage and vacuum chuck are clean of debris. If debris is present, clean the
stage using a lint-free wipe and isopropyl alcohol. Dispose of wipes in an appropriately
labelled solvent-contaminated waste container.

5. Place the new sample on the stage.

6. Verify that the sample is centered and seated flat against the chuck’s contact points.

7. Activate the vacuum chuck by toggling the vacuum chuck switch. Select Stage > Load New
Sample to move the stage back.

5.2.2 Locate Tip

When installing new tips, execute the locate tip function before focusing on the sample surface.
This function enables the operator to find the probe tip using the optical system. To locate the tip,
complete the following:

1. Verify that a tip is installed in the probe tip holder, then select Stage > Locate Tip
option or use the tool bar icon.

Note: The screen displays a caution indicating that the microscope objective is in
motion (see Figure 5.2b).

Figure 5.2b Moving to Tip Position Caution

Stage
Moving to tip position

Note: As the objective moves positions, the tip should begin to come into focus.
When the focus position is attained, the screen displays trackball instructions
for achieving a focus (see Figure 5.2c).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 73

Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

Figure 5.2c Locate Tip Prompt

026
2. Bring the tip into focus by holding down the left trackball button while rolling the trackball.

Note: The tip may be off from center in the field of view, particularly if installing a
new type of tip. Zooming out may aid in locating the tip.

3. Rotate the small, metal knobs located on the front of the on-axis viewing assembly to center
the tip in the field of view as indicated in the screen prompt.

4. When the tip is in focus and centered in the field of view, click OK in the Locate Tip prompt.

5.2.3 Focus Surface

This function focuses the sample surface. The operator may choose to manually focus on the
surface using the trackball or allow the optics to focus automatically by choosing the Autofocus
feature. When the surface is already partially in focus (or close to it), use the Autofocus feature.

To use the Focus Surface feature complete the following:

1. Select Focus Surface from the Stage menu. The screen displays trackball instructions for
achieving a focus (see Figure 5.2d).

74 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

Figure 5.2d Focus Surface Prompt

027
2. Use the left button on the trackball to focus on the surface (which moves the SPM or Z stage
up and down).

3. Use the right button on the trackball to zoom out completely when trying to focus on the
surface.

4. If the sample is not already under the microscope, use the trackball (with neither the left nor
right buttons pressed) to move the X-Y stage until the sample is in position.

5. If the surface is partially in focus, use the Autofocus option to complete the focusing
process.

6. To focus on the sample “surface” (normal operation) or the “tip reflection” (for extremely
clean samples), change the Focus On parameter accordingly.

Note: For reflective or semi-reflective samples, the tip reflection is easier to bring into
focus than the surface, especially if the sample is very flat or clean.

CAUTION: When moving the SPM stage up and down, it is possible to crash
the tip into the surface. To prevent a crash while focusing on the
surface, watch the optical image and tip-to-sample proximity. The
sample should be in focus when the tip is 1mm (1000µm) above
the surface.

7. For samples which are difficult to bring into focus, move to an edge of the sample, which is
easy to find in the optical image, and bring the top of the edge into focus.

8. Move the sample back to the desired X-Y position.

9. Verify that the surface remains in focus.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 75

Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

5.2.4 Move To (X,Y)

This option enables the operator to quickly index the stage to a defined X-Y coordinate. If the
origin has not been preset using the Stage > Set Reference panel, the stage automatically defaults
to the last origin that was previously used. (All subsequent X-Y moves are done from the origin.)

To move the X-Y stage to a specified X-Y coordinate, complete the following:

1. Verify that the stage origin (position 0, 0) is either:

• At the default, or,

• Reset to a new position using the Set Reference panel under the Stage pop-down menu.

2. Select the Move To (x,y) panel under the Stage pop-down menu. The screen presents a panel
with four fields (see Figure 5.2e).

Note: The first two fields define absolute moves relative to the currently set origin
(0,0). The third and fourth fields define relative moves from the current
position.

Figure 5.2e Move To Prompt

025

3. Enter the X and Y coordinates of the desired move to position, then click Move.

4. The stage moves to the new position. Should it become necessary to halt movement, click on
the Pause button (see Figure 5.2f).

Figure 5.2f Abort Motion Prompt

Stage
Press <Pause> to abort motion

76 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

CAUTION: Always verify that the tip is off the surface before attempting stage
movements. If manual stage movements are attempted during
engagement (by turning the leadscrew knobs on the stage’s X-Y
slide assemblies) the tip and/or sample may be damaged.

ATTENTION: Il est impératif de toujours s’assurer que la pointe ne touche pas la

surface avant de bouger la platine porte-échantillon. Si la platine
porte échantillons est déplacée manuellement (en tournant les vis
des moteurs de la platine) la pointe et/ou l’échantillon pourraient
être endommagés.

ATTENTION: Überprüfen Sie immer zunächst, daß die Meßspitze nicht mehr auf
der Oberfläche ist, ehe Sie den XY-Verschiebetisch bewegen. Wenn
der XY-Verschiebetisch von Hand bewegt wird (indem die
Drehknöpfe an den Gewindestangen des XY-Verschiebetisches
gedreht werden), während sich das Mikroskop im Engage-Zustand
befindet, können Meßspitze und/oder Probe beschädigt werden.

5. To exit the Move To (x,y) dialog box, click the Quit button.

5.2.5 Set Reference

The Set Reference panel is used to set the origin point on the sample surface to be used for all
subsequent Move To and Programmed Move operations. It is important to verify the reference
point (0,0) with programmed move sequences, since all moves are relative to the current origin. For
example, a program designed to move the stage to the four corners of a square sample when the
origin (0, 0) is set to the upper-left corner will not probe the same positions if the origin is changed
to the lower-right corner. It will avoid confusion to select a standard position as the usual origin
reference (e.g., lower-left corner), then reuse the same reference position with all samples.

On samples having a grid-like aspect (e.g., integrated circuits), the reference may be initially
defined from a line (two points) rather than a single point. The reference line is defined parallel to
some feature on the sample surface (e.g., an electronic trace on an integrated circuit). You may
complete this by defining two points: an origin and a second point. Defining the second point
compensates for sample rotation. To set a reference on the sample, complete the following:

1. Select the Focus Surface function under the Stage menu to focus on the sample and move
the sample to the desired origin.

2. Select the Set Reference option under the Stage menu. The screen offers five options to the
operator (see Figure 5.2g).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 77

Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

Figure 5.2g Set Reference Prompt

Set Reference

Quit Origin X Axis Y Axis Reset

3. Click Origin in the Set Reference panel; this is the first of two points to be used for defining
a reference line on the coordinate grid.

4. Quit the Set Reference menu, and use the Focus Surface option and trackball to either move
the stage right or upward as necessary.

Move Stage Right

a. Move the stage to the right to a second point on the linear feature. (This second point,
along with the point of origin, defines the X-axis.)

b. Quit the Focus Surface option, and return to the Set Reference option under the Stage
pop-down menu.

c. Click on the X Axis option. This establishes the (Y = 0) reference line.

Move Stage Upward

a. Move the stage upward to a second point on the linear feature. (This second point, along
with the point of origin, defines the Y-axis.)

b. Quit the Focus Surface option, and return to the Set Reference option under the Stage
pop-down menu.

c. Select the Y Axis option. This establishes the (X = 0) reference line.

Note: Accuracy improves if the two points defining a reference line are located at
some distance to each other. For maximum angular accuracy, the two points
should be located at opposite sides of the sample (see Figure 5.2h). The left
image depicts two closely located points to define the X-axis. The right image
depicts a more accurate reference line defined by two, widely spaced points.

Figure 5.2h Defining the X-Axis

XX X X

78 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

Figure 5.2i Resultant Reference Line

+Y

Reference Line Reference Line

X X
-X +X
1 2

-Y

5.2.6 Programmed Move

The Programmed Move function allows the stage to be automatically positioned using a series of
memorized positions. These positions are programmed into the controller’s computer, then
executed automatically in sequence. This function is particularly useful for statistical quality
assurance runs on large numbers of identical samples, and as a basic inspection aid.

To use this option, select the Programmed Move function under the Stage pop-down menu. The
screen displays a panel of options (see Figure 5.2j).

Figure 5.2j Programmed Move Prompt

Programmed Move

Program name: move

Quit Run Teach

The name of the move program currently loaded is displayed in the Program name panel (in the
above example, the program is called “move”). Moves are first programmed using the Teach
function. Later they may be executed using the Run function.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 79

Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

Teaching a Programmed Move

To program (teach) a series of moves, complete the following:

1. Draw a simple map of the sample, along with each programmed position, before
programmed moves are entered. Note the origin point at the time of programming.

Note: If reducing cycle time is important, position order should be optimized to

reduce stage travel

2. Click on the Program name option in the Programmed Move panel (see Figure 5.2j) and
enter the name to be used.

Note: Program names must be eight characters or less and follow DOS protocol.

3. From the Programmed Move panel, click on Teach. The screen prompts with (see Figure
5.2k):

Figure 5.2k Editing or Creating New Program Prompts

Programmed Move Programmed Move

Editing existing program Or Creating new program

Ok Ok

The program name already exists The program name is new

on the computer (not previously used)

4. Click OK to proceed with programming moves. A new panel displays, featuring the basic
teaching commands (see Figure 5.2l).

5. To add a first step, click Add Step to invoke the Teach Mode panel (see Figure 5.2l).

Figure 5.2l Teach Program Prompt

Teach Program

Program step: 0

Add Step Remove Step

Move to (X, Y)

Save Quit

6. Use the controls to position the stage and sample to the desired location(s) to be programmed
into the computer.

Note: These controls are identical to the Focus Surface controls explained in Chapter
5 of this manual.

80 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

7. Click on OK in the Teach Mode panel when the stage has moved to a desired position (see
Figure 5.2m).

Figure 5.2m Teach Mode Prompt

Teach Mode
Hold down the left button to move the SPM
Hold down the right button to zoom.
Hold down either top button to lock last move.
Zoom In Zoom Out

Ok

8. To add another position, repeat Step 4 - Step 6 until all desired positions have been
programmed up to a maximum of 100 steps.

Note: Each time the Teach Program panel is reentered, the Program step increments
by another count and automatically assigns a program step number.

9. When all stage positions are entered into the program, click Save in the Teach Program
panel, then click Quit. Verify the program is entered and saved under the correct program
name.

Note: Save steps before exiting the Teach Program panel; otherwise, programmed
steps will be lost.

10. Enter additional programs in the same manner, using a separate program name for each.

Other Information Regarding the Teach Program Option

To remove a step from the programmed sequence:

1. Go to the Stage pop-down menu to the Programmed Move panel, and select Teach
Program.

2. Select Program step from the Teach Program panel.

3. Enter the step number to be removed or drag the mouse to index to the step number. The
stage simultaneously moves to the new step position.

4. Select the Remove Step option.

Note: When individual program steps are removed, all subsequent steps are “moved
up” by one count.

5. Click Save to save the edited version of program.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 81

Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

To insert a step into an existing program sequence:

6. Go to the Stage pop-down menu to the Programmed Move panel, and select Teach
Program.

7. Select Program step in the Teach Program panel.

8. Enter one less than the step number to be added to the sequence, or drag the mouse to index
to the desired step number.

Note: For example, to add a new program step #7, while leaving all preexisting steps
intact, enter “6” in the Program step panel. The stage simultaneously moves to
the preexisting step position #6.

9. Select the Add Step option. The Teach Mode panel appears.

10. Use the trackball to move the stage to the new position to be added.

11. Click Quit to exit the Teach Mode panel. Verify the new position is now added.

Note: When new program steps are added, all preexisting steps beyond the new entry
are “moved up” by one count.

12. Click Save to save the edited version of program.

Origin Points

Programmed Move positions are memorized relative to the current origin at the time of
programming. If the origin has been shifted from its original position since the time of
programming, it is necessary to reestablish the original origin point to locate the same positions on
the sample. When generating maps of programmed moves, always indicate the origin point.

Running a Programmed Move

Once a program sequence has been taught to the computer, you may run the program from the
Programmed Move panel. The stage moves to each position in the same order taught, relative to
the current origin point. At each program position, the sample is scanned for 1.5 frames, captured,
and then indexed to the next position. The system stores captured data from each position is stored
on the hard disk; there should be sufficient memory to record 100 frames at 256 samples each.

To run a series of programmed moves, complete the following:

1. Select Stage > Programmed Move.

2. Select the Program name field, and enter the name of the program to be run.

82 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

3. Select the Run option. If you are loading and running the program from the beginning, the
screen prompts the operator whether to refocus the screen.

a. Clicking Yes transfers you to the Focus Surface panel; you may then make focusing
adjustments to better view the surface.

b. Clicking No initiates the programmed move from step #1.

Figure 5.2n Initial Focus Prompt

Stage

Do you want to set the initial focus?

Yes No

Note: If the program was previously run without finishing (aborted), the screen
requests whether to begin the program sequence at the aborted step.

4. If you wish to run the entire program from its beginning (step #1); click No. Otherwise, click
Yes (see Figure 5.2n).

5. The screen displays the current program step in progress (see Figure 5.2o). To initiate the
program sequence from another starting point, use the Teach Program panel to remove any
unwanted step(s), and run the program again from the new “step 1” position.

Figure 5.2o Programmed Move Prompt

Programmed Move

Program step 5 in progress

Abort

5.2.7 Initialize

The Initialize option allows the system software to locate the top (positive) limit switches on the
SPM axis and optics axis stages. If the NanoScope computer determines that it is unsure of the
stage position, it will not allow any functions under the Stage menu (except Initialize) to be
selected.

To initialize the stage, complete the following:

1. Before beginning initialization, verify that the stage is clear of loose items and debris.

2. Select Stage > Initialize. The dialog box offers two options (see Figure 5.2p).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 83

Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

Figure 5.2p Stage Initialize/Cancel Prompt

Stage

Initialize Cancel

3. To begin initialization, click Initialize. As the stage begins a series of motorized movements,
the screen indicates operating status (see Figure 5.2q).

Figure 5.2q SPM Move to Lower Limits Prompt

028
Note: The initialization sequence may be aborted at any time by clicking Pause (see
Figure 5.2r).

Figure 5.2r Stage Initializing Prompt

Stage

Initializing—Press Pause to abort

4. The microscope Z-axis moves to the top of its travel. When this is achieved, click Ok to
continue.

5. The microscope focuses its camera optics to the extent of its travel. When this is achieved,
click Ok to continue (see Figure 5.2s).

Figure 5.2s Optics Move to End of Travel Prompt

Stage

Optics should move to end of travel

Ok

6. Next, the camera zoom optics assembly zooms. When the camera zooms in to the limit of its
travel, click Ok to continue (see Figure 5.2t).

Figure 5.2t Stage Zoom Prompt

Stage
Zoom in

Ok

84 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Stage System
Stage Menu Commands

7. Finally, the camera’s optics zooms out. When the camera zooms out to the limit of its travel,
click Ok to complete the stage initialization process (see Figure 5.2u). The dialog box
removes itself from the screen.

Figure 5.2u Stage Zoom Out Prompt

Stage
Zoom out

Ok

5.2.8 SPM Parameters

The SPM parameters menu lists the most important Z-axis parameter values for loading/unloading
the stage and engaging samples. These values are explained in more detail in Chapter 7.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 85/(86 Blank)

Chapter 6 Cantilever Preparation

The Dimension 3100 Scanning Probe Microscope comes furnished with etched silicon cantilever
substrates for TappingMode AFM and silicon nitride cantilevers for Contact AFM modes. The
cantilever probes should be inspected under the microscope when used for the first time to gain a
better understanding of how the probes and substrates are connected and separated. The procedure
for removing individual substrates from the wafer varies depending on the wafer. It is easier to
accomplish this task with the aid of a stereo microscope with 50 – 70x magnification.

This chapter addresses the following:

• Silicon Cantilever Substrates: Section 6.1

• Wafer Tool Kit: Section 6.1.1

• Cantilever Preparation: Section 6.1.2

• Tip Shape of Etched Silicon Probes: Section 6.1.3

• Silicon Nitride Cantilever Substrates: Section 6.2

• Tip Shape of Silicon Nitride Probes: Section 6.2.1

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 87

Cantilever Preparation
Silicon Cantilever Substrates

6.1 Silicon Cantilever Substrates

CAUTION: The cantilevers are stored tip-side-up, and the silicon is very
brittle. The cantilever will break off of the substrate if contacted.

6.1.1 Wafer Tool Kit

A wafer tool kit for working with silicon cantilever substrates is included with the Dimension 3100
SPM system. The kit contains the following:

• Wafer tweezers

• Flat, substrate tweezers

• Regular tweezers

• Curved, sharp-pointed tweezers

• Flat, L-shaped tweezers

6.1.2 Cantilever Preparation

To prepare the cantilever for imaging:.

1. View the wafer with an optical microscope to determine the orientation of the cantilever
substrates and to inspect the cantilevers themselves.

Note: A 10-70X stereo microscope is useful for this task. The cantilevers are tip-side-
up when viewed in the wafer holder.

2. Disconnect the substrate from the bulk of the wafer by pressing down gently on the non-
cantilever end of the substrate or using sharp-pointed tweezers to carefully break the two
substrate supporting arms connecting the substrate to the silicon wafer frame (see Figure
6.1a).

Note: The supporting arms connecting the substrate to the bulk of the wafer shatter
when pressure is applied. It may be convenient to break several substrates from
the wafer at one time. Extras may be safely stored in a specially prepared petri
dish.

3. At the bottom of the petri dish, place X4-grade, GEL-PAK adhesive strips.

4. Place the substrates, tips facing up, on the adhesive to permit easy removal of the substrates
when needed.

88 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Cantilever Preparation
Silicon Cantilever Substrates

Note: Cover the petri dish when not in use.

Figure 6.1a Silicon Cantilever Substrates in Wafer

Cantilever Press Here Substrate Cantilever

To Break Supporting Substrate
Out Substrate Arm

5. Use the curved, sharp-pointed tweezers to remove the cantilever substrate from the wafer
container, grasping the sides of the substrate away from the lever and probe tip.

Note: It may be helpful to tip the substrate to one side to help grasp it in the tweezers.

CAUTION: Silicon is extremely brittle.Be very careful to avoid any contact

with the probe lever because it will immediately snap off.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 89

Cantilever Preparation
Silicon Cantilever Substrates

6.1.3 Tip Shape of Etched Silicon Probes

Etched silicon probes provide the most consistent tip sharpness of the probes presently available.
There are subtleties in general shape that produce different effects from the etched silicon tips when
imaging samples with steep walls over steps of 100 nm to several microns in height (see Figure
6.1b).

Figure 6.1b Theoretical Tip Shape of Silicon Probes

17.0° 17.0°
A

B C
Tip
25.0°

10.0°

Cantilever

The present process creates a tip which is symmetric from side-to-side with a 17+ 2 ° half cone
angle (see A of Figure 6.1b) and asymmetric from front-to-back, along the length of the lever (see
C of Figure 6.1b).

In addition, the substrate mounting angle also affects the interaction of the tip shape with the
surface. Along the front edge of the tip, the half angle is nominally 25°, while at the back edge of
the tip, the half angle is approximately 10°. Neither of these angles account for the tilt of the
substrate. With the mounting angle of the substrate factored in, the front edge of the tip is 35° and
the back edge of the tip is zero degrees. From the tip side, the cross-section of the tip near the lever
is approximated by an inverted ‘kite’ shape. All of these subtleties arise from the etching process
used to make the tip, which employs caustic solutions to perform wet anisotropic etching of the
silicon.

90 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Cantilever Preparation
Silicon Cantilever Substrates

Figure 6.1c Silicon Probe Tip Profile Artifact (Front-to-Back)

10°

55° 80°
Scan Line Profile

1 µm - 2 µm Deep Trench

Note: Any wall angle on the left wall that is > 55 deg.
will be shown as 55 deg. in the image.

Scan line produced using

theoretical tip shape on a 1-2µm
deep vertical wall trench

Scan direction = 0 degrees

To measure sidewall angles, the best orientation of the sample uses the back edge of the tip (that
which faces back towards the cantilever substrate) to measure step angles (see Figure 6.1c). Using
the back edge, step angles approaching 90 degrees can be measured routinely, depending on the
step height.

CAUTION: Ensure that the area of measurement offers sufficient clearance so

that other faces and edges of the tip and lever do not interfere with
the measurement.

This method does not work well in small openings of less than 5 microns where, depending on the
depth of the step, other tip edges may contact other faces of the small opening. Wall angle
measurements are best measured in open areas for these reasons.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 91

Cantilever Preparation
Silicon Cantilever Substrates

Figure 6.1d Silicon Probe Tip Step Profile Artifact (Side-to-Side)

Scan line produced using
theoretical tip shape on a 1-2µm
deep vertical wall trench

Scan direction = 90 degrees

73° 73°
Scan Line Profile

1 - 2 µm Deep Trench

Note: Any wall angle that is > 73 deg.

will be shown as 73 deg. in the image.

Measurements of line pitch are often best measured using the side-to-side faces of the tip, which
exhibits symmetry. Because of the approximate 17° half angle of the tip, the line or space
measurement is best done at the top of the line for simplification of the measurement artifacts (see
Figure 6.1e).

Figure 6.1e Common Silicon Probe Profile (Resultant Scan Artifact)

Subsequent scan line produced

using the realistic tip shape

10°
70 - 80°
55°
Scan Line Profile

1 µm - 2 µm Deep Trench

Note: Any wall angle on the left wall that is > 55 deg.
will be shown as 55 deg. in the image.
Any wall angle on the right wall that is >70-80 deg.
will be shown as 70 -> 80 deg. in the image.

Figure 6.1e depicts the resultant effect of the angled back ridge on the step angle measurement for a
deeper trench depth. This is tip and topography dependent.

92 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Cantilever Preparation
Silicon Nitride Cantilever Substrates

In addition to microscopic scale shape characteristics (see Figure 6.1b - Figure 6.1e), another factor
which can affect the wall angle over shorter (nominal 100 nm) step height measurements is the
shaped cusp at the end of the tip. The shaped cusp at the end of the tip is formed to increase the
sharpness of the tip point to a length of 100 nm from the end of the tip. It is formed in such a
manner that the radius of curvature of a silicon tip can be in the range of 5 – 10nm (on a very good
tip).

6.2 Silicon Nitride Cantilever Substrates

The following procedure details how to remove Silicon Nitride cantilever substrates.

1. Verify that the wafer is oriented with the tips facing upward (gold coated surface down).

2. Inspect the wafer with an optical microscope.

Note: A 10 -70X stereo microscope is useful for becoming familiar with the styles
and orientation of the cantilevers on the probe substrate. Included with the
AFM microscope is a tool kit containing: wafer tweezers, substrate tweezers,
regular tweezers, and a pin-vise.

3. Remove the Pyrex strips by resting the silicon ring on a glass slide or ruler.

4. Apply downward pressure with the tweezers until the strip breaks free from the silicon ring
(see Figure 6.2a).

Figure 6.2a Silicon Nitride Cantilevers in a Wafer

Press here to break out strip

Position glass slide underneath

for support

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 93

Cantilever Preparation
Silicon Nitride Cantilever Substrates

CAUTION: Be careful to avoid pushing strips together as the cantilevers are

between the strips. All cantilevers on one side of both strips could
break off if the strips are inadvertently pushed together.

5. Place the strip down on a white piece of paper to inspect it under the microscope.

CAUTION: Verify that the cantilevers are on the top side of the strip. The
cantilevers are on the same side as the reinforcing ring, while the
saw-cuts are on the opposite side from the cantilevers. Between
each one on the down side of the strip there should be a saw-cut
almost through the Pyrex.

6. Handling the strip by its ends, place it on a glass slide (taped down to the edge of a table)
with the substrate or spacer piece to be removed hanging over the edge (see Figure 6.2b).
The saw cut should be approximately on the edge of the slide.

7. While holding down the next substrate on the strip with the wooden end of a cotton swab,
grip the overhanging piece with a pair of wide tweezers and rotate downward until the
cantilever substrate breaks off.

8. Repeat this process until as many cantilever substrates as required are removed.

94 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Cantilever Preparation
Silicon Nitride Cantilever Substrates

Figure 6.2b Substrate Break-off

Note: Extra substrates are easily stored in a covered petri dish. The shipped substrates
are secured with X0-grade, GEL-PAK™ adhesive strips. The strips are used to
permit easy removal of the substrates. If GEL-PAK adhesive strips cannot be
found, a simple substitute is the adhesive area from a Post-it note.

Each substrate has two cantilevers on each end of the substrate. Both 100 and 200µm length
cantilevers with two different leg widths are provided. When ready to use a cantilever substrate, it
may be desirable to remove the unused cantilevers from that substrate, but it is not necessary. For
most applications use the 200µm cantilever with the wider legs. For atomic scale images, the
100µm triangular cantilever with the wider legs yields good results.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 95

Cantilever Preparation
Silicon Nitride Cantilever Substrates

6.2.1 Tip Shape of Silicon Nitride Probes

Silicon nitride probes provide low cost and durable probes suitable for contact mode imaging.
There are some subtleties in general shape that should be understood to gain the best advantage
from the silicon nitride tips when imaging samples with steps of 0.1 to several microns in height.
The probe tip is approximated by a pyramid formed by intersecting <111> planes in silicon. The
approximate shape of the tip is shown in Figure 6.2c along with dimensions and approximate
values for spring constants and resonant frequencies.

Figure 6.2c Silicon Nitride Cantilevers

45° 35°

4 µm

C A

Spring constant Measured Fr

Lever Type A B C D (N/m) (kHz)
100 µm Wide 115 122 21 60 0.58** 40
200 µm Wide 193 205 36 113 0.12** 12.3-22.1 †
100 µm Narrow 115 122 15 69 0.38** -
200 µm Narrow 193 205 20 150 0.06** -

Because the Silicon Nitride probe tips have lower aspect ratios than single-crystal etched silicon
probes, the steepest measurable step wall angle is appreciably lower. The highest measurable angle
using silicon nitride probes is approximately 65° (see Figure 6.2d) using the inner face of the tip
(towards the cantilever holder). The steepest measurable angle from side to side (parallel to the
edge of the probe's substrate) is approximately 55°. Both of these figures assume that the
measurement does not have interference from other edges.

96 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Cantilever Preparation
Silicon Nitride Cantilever Substrates

Figure 6.2d Silicon Nitride Cantilevers (profile)

45.0° 65.0°
10.0°
Scanning Profile

There are two types of silicon nitride cantilever probes available: standard and oxide-sharpened tip
processes. The standard devices have the nitride deposited directly into the etched silicon mold pit
formed by the intersecting <111> planes, and have points that are slightly rounded with respect to
the tips produced using the oxidation sharpening process.

The oxide-sharpened silicon nitride probes have a thermally grown silicon dioxide film deposited in
the mold pit used to shape the nitride tip, prior to silicon nitride film deposition. The oxide has two
effects: it shapes the inner contours of the pyramidal pit so that a slight cusp forms at the point of
the pyramid, and the oxide protects the tip from excessive exposure to a long duration wet silicon
etch used to free the cantilevers from the silicon substrate. The result is a noticeably sharper point at
the end of the pyramid. Regrettably, along with the increased sharpness of the tip comes a slight
increase in double tip effect experienced with the oxide sharpened process.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 97/(96 Blank)

Chapter 7 Head, Probe, & Sample
Preparation

This chapter includes information regarding the Dimension 3100 Scanning Probe Microscope
(SPM) setup and operation procedures for Contact Mode and TappingMode. Specifically, this
chapter details removal and installation of the microscope head, mounting the cantilever, changing
the tip, loading and positioning samples, focusing the optics, and general information regarding
engaging and withdrawing the tip.

Chapter 9 discusses SPM operation in TappingMode in more detail, while Chapter 8 reviews SPM
operation in Contact Mode AFM. This chapter contains the following:

• System Information: Section 7.1

• Mouse versus Trackball: Section 7.1.1

• Motor Interlock: Section 7.1.2

• Laser Requirements: Section 7.1.3

• Basic AFM Operation: Section 7.2

• Select the Microscope: Section 7.2.1

• Select Mode of Operation: Section 7.2.2

• Prepare the Cantilever Holder: Section 7.2.3

• Load the Cantilever Holder: Section 7.2.4

• Remove the Dimension SPM Head: Section 7.2.5

• Install the Cantilever Holder: Section 7.2.6

• Replace the Dimension SPM Head: Section 7.2.7

• Connect the Dimension Head: Section 7.2.8

• Align Laser: Section 7.2.9

• Adjust Photodetector: Section 7.2.10

• Locate Tip: Section 7.2.11

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 99

Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
System Information

• Load the Sample: Section 7.2.12

• Focus Surface: Section 7.2.13

• Cantilever Tune (TappingMode only): Section 7.2.14

• Set Initial Scan Parameters: Section 7.2.15

• Engage: Section 7.2.16

• Withdraw: Section 7.2.17

• Advanced AFM Operation: Section 7.3

• Stage Parameters: Section 7.3.1

7.1 System Information

7.1.1 Mouse versus Trackball

The mouse exclusively operates the NanoScope software with the exception of functions related to
direct control of the stage. These commands are only initiated with the trackball. Operator-initiated
movement of motors via the Zoom, Focus, Move SPM (Z-stage) and Move XY commands are
controlled by the trackball and its buttons. Motor operation is permitted only when the appropriate
menu enables movement.

7.1.2 Motor Interlock

SPM stage movement is software interlocked against motion if a valid sum (laser signal) is not
present. The sum signal must be between 0.5-9.5 volts, otherwise all commands which try to
initiate stage motion will not move the SPM X, Y, or Z stages. However, except for upward Z-stage
travel. This interlock reduces the possibility of inadvertently crashing the tip and scanner crystal
into the sample or stage, minimizing tip and scanner damage. If during the engage sequence the
sum signal changes to a value outside the interlocked limits, the downward motion stops,
preventing damage to scanners had the Z-stage continued downward.

100 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
System Information

7.1.3 Laser Requirements

CAUTION: When the Dimension head is plugged into the microscope control
electronics, laser light is emitted.

CAUTION: The Dimension head features an internal tilt switch to shut power
off to the laser whenever it is inverted, however, heed all
precautions below.

This instrument uses a semiconductor laser emitting a maximum 1.0mW beam at 670 nm. The light
is emitted down the center of the scanner tube and during normal operation reflects back into the
system’s optics from the back surface of the cantilever probe.

WARNING: During and prior to set up of the laser, it is important to avoid

looking directly at the laser beam or at the laser spot. The laser
head should never be plugged into the microscope control
electronics unless the head is installed in the Z-stage mount. Take
care when inserting highly reflective samples on the chuck. Avoid
looking at all reflected laser light. Use care to avoid staring into
beams that may be reflected from sample surfaces.

AVERTISSEMENT:Avant de faire fonctionner le laser, et durant tout le temps

pendant lequel il fonctionne, il est impératif de ne pas regarder
directement le faisceau du laser ou l’image qu’il réfléchit. La
sonde laser ne doit jamais être branchés sur l’électronique de
contrôle du microscope, tant que la téte de mesure n’est pas
installée dans son support. Il est impératif de faire très attention
lorsque des échantillons très réfléchissants sont déposés sur la
platine. Eviter toute exposition à la lumière laser. Durant
l’utilisation, ne pas fixer les faisceaux laser réfléchis par les
surfaces d’échantillons.

WARNUNG: Es ist sehr wichtig, vor und während der Laserjustierung nicht in
den Laserstrahl oder auf den Laserpunkt zu schauen. Der Laser
sollte niemals an die Mikroskopelektronik angeschlossen werden,
wenn er nicht in der Halterung der Z-Verschiebeeinheit installiert
ist. Seien Sie bitte sehr vorsichtig, wenn stark reflektierende
Proben auf dem Probenteller liegen. Vermeiden Sie unter allen
Umständen, in das reflektierte Laserlicht zu schauen. Alle
Bediener des Mikroskops sollten größte Vorsicht walten lassen um
zu vermeiden, in den von der Probenoberfläche reflektierten
Laserstrahl zu schauen.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 101

Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

7.2 Basic AFM Operation

7.2.1 Select the Microscope

1. Set the microscope configuration by selecting the Microscope Select panel from the Di pop-
down menu (see Figure 7.2a).

2. Click OK to close the Microscope > Select dialog box and initiate the Realtime software.

Figure 7.2a Microscope Select Prompt

7.2.2 Select Mode of Operation

1. Select Microscope > Profile.

2. Select the desired mode of operation (Contact Mode, TappingMode, etc.) and click OK.

7.2.3 Prepare the Cantilever Holder

Before loading the substrate onto the cantilever holder, place the cantilever holder on the cantilever
holder stand (see Figure 7.2b). The cantilever holder stand is a 2.5-inch diameter black anodized
aluminum cylinder that ships with the Dimension 3100 SPM for easy installation of the substrate
onto the cantilever holder.

The cantilever holder stand has three stations for different tip holders: 1) standard AFM, 2) fluid
imaging AFM and 3) STM. A small, raised block in the center of the gold connector identifies the
standard AFM load station.

To prepare the cantilever holder, with the AFM cantilever holder's large spring clip face up, mate
the standard AFM cantilever holder sockets to the pins of the AFM cantilever holder stand (see
Figure 7.2b).

102 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

Figure 7.2b Cantilever Holder Stand (top view)

Note: You may install the AFM cantilever holder in only one orientation because the
pins are asymmetrical.

7.2.4 Load the Cantilever Holder

Contact Mode AFM

Silicon nitride substrates are used for SPM operation in Contact Mode AFM. Silicon nitride
substrates consist of a cantilever integrated with a sharp tip on the end. For Contact Mode AFM
imaging, the cantilever must be soft enough to deflect very small forces and have a high enough
resonant frequency to avoid vibrational instabilities.

Note: Install silicon nitride substrates face-up so the tip points away from the AFM
cantilever holder. This ensures that the cantilever and tip face toward the sample
once the cantilever holder is mounted on the head.

To install a silicon nitride substrate on the AFM cantilever holder, complete the following:

1. Using sharp tweezers, grasp the substrate firmly on the sides and lift to free the substrate
from the wafer or gel-pack. In the gel-pack boxes the tip ends are pointing upward and do not
need to be turned over before being placed in the cantilever holder.

Note: Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed information on how to break out each substrate
from the wafer.

2. Many silicon nitride substrates have cantilevers on both ends of the substrate. If this is the
case, place the substrate under an optical microscope or magnifier and locate the substrate
you want to use.

3. Press down and slide back the spring clip of the standard AFM cantilever holder (see Figure
7.2c).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 103

Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

Figure 7.2c Standard AFM Cantilever Holder

SIDE VIEW

tip is
installed

Cantilever Probe Tip

( tip faces down )
Spring Loaded Probe Clip
Electrical Mounting Sockets
( 4 plcs)

Cantilever
Mounting BOTTOM VIEW
Groove ( TIP SIDE )

no tip
installed

4. Orient the cantilever intended for imaging away from the cantilever holder, and place the
substrate in the AFM cantilever holder groove.

5. Carefully maneuver the substrate until the substrate is flush against the back edge and laying
flat in the cantilever holder groove.

6. Press the spring-loaded probe clip down, gently push forward over the substrate, and release
the spring clip to hold the substrate in place in the cantilever holder groove.

Note: Always orienting the substrate to one side and the back of the cantilever holder
groove will improve repeatability of tip location between runs. This will make
aligning the laser onto the cantilever quicker and easier when installing new
cantilevers.

TappingMode

The procedure for installing TappingMode, single crystal silicon substrates is the essentially the
same as the procedure for installing silicon nitride substrates in Contact Mode AFM. However, one
difference is that silicon substrates usually have only one cantilever per substrate, which can often
be identified without an optical microscope.

Note: Single crystal silicon substrates are installed face-up so the tip points away
from the AFM cantilever holder. This ensures that the cantilever and tip face
toward the sample once the cantilever holder is mounted on the head.

104 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

7.2.5 Remove the Dimension SPM Head

1. Tighten the screw located on the right side of the Dimension SPM head dovetail to release
the Dimension SPM head (see Figure 7.2d).

Figure 7.2d SPM Head Dovetail and Signal Connector

Connector

Dovetail Release
Screw

Note: Dovetail engagement actuates with a spring. Failing to engage the spring-
loaded dovetail causes a large increase in image noise due to reduced rigidity of
the mechanical support of the SPM head.

2. Unplug the connector wire that runs from the SPM head to the Dimension base.

3. Carefully slide the Dimension SPM head up and out of the dovetail groove.

7.2.6 Install the Cantilever Holder

If you are changing cantilevers, we recommend you select Stage > Load new sample before
removing the old cantilever. The stage moves to the front of the Dimension base, which becomes
useful in laser alignment (refer to Section 7.2.9 for laser alignment). Because the laser sum signal
will reach zero once the cantilever is removed, the motor interlock will prevent this is in the future.

CAUTION: When using the Stage > Load New Sample command, be sure
there are no objects taller than the height of the cantilever in-
between current location of the scanner and the front of the sample
chuck. An object in this path could damage the scanner and/or tip.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 105

Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

1. Mate the cantilever holder sockets to the Dimension SPM head pins to install the loaded
AFM cantilever holder.

2. Verify the tip points down and away from the head. The end of the cantilever must point in
the direction of the optics assembly.

3. Verify the AFM cantilever holder mounts flat against each pin on the end of the head.

7.2.7 Replace the Dimension SPM Head

1. Carefully slide the Dimension SPM head down into the dovetail groove of the Z-stage SPM.

2. When sliding the SPM head into the dovetail, make sure that the tip will not touch the
sample. If it appears that the tip may touch when the SPM head is fully inserted in the
dovetail, raise the Z-stage by selecting Motor > Withdraw several times, or by selecting
Stage > Focus Surface and raising the Z-stage upward.

3. Loosen the screw located on the right side of the Dimension SPM head dovetail to lock the
head in place (see Figure 7.2d).

7.2.8 Connect the Dimension Head

Insert the Dimension SPM head black 21-pin connector plug into the socket just behind the Z-stage
located on the stage control electronics box (see Figure 7.2d).

7.2.9 Align Laser

CAUTION: Turn down the illuminator intensity before proceeding with laser
alignment.

For both TappingMode and Contact Mode AFM, the user aligns the laser by moving the laser beam
relative to the cantilever while observing the laser spot on the granite surface (a piece of white
paper also works well) below the Dimension head. If the laser is not on the cantilever substrate, the
laser appears as a bright red spot on the surface below. When the laser is aligned on the cantilever, a
shadow appears on the surface below.

Figure 7.2e displays the laser control knobs located on the top of the Dimension head. There is a
diagram printed on top of the Dimension head illustrating which direction the laser moves when
turning the laser control knobs clockwise.

106 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

Figure 7.2e Dimension Head Laser Control Knobs

Rear-Right Laser Control Knob (X Direction)

Knob Adjustment
Diagram Front-Left Laser Control Knob (Y Direction)

The X direction runs along the major axis of the substrate (parallel to the length of the cantilever).
The right-rear laser control knob, atop the SPM head, controls the laser beam movement along the
X direction. The front-left laser knob, atop the SPM head, moves the beam along the Y direction
perpendicular to the cantilever and substrate's major axis. In the vision system display, the X
direction is right-to-left across the screen, and the Y direction is top-to-bottom.

The procedure for aligning the laser is slightly different between TappingMode and Contact Mode
AFM. The sections below detail the procedures for aligning the laser on the cantilever and tips for
each mode respectively.

Etched Silicon Tips (TappingMode)

In order to place the laser reflection at the end of the cantilever, you must shine a laser beam on
either the granite base or a piece of paper.

1. You can view the laser spot several different ways:

a. If a cantilever is being replaced, first select Stage > Load New Sample to reflect the
laser off the of the granite base while it is locked in the Z-stage dovetail (as discussed in
Section 7.1.2).

b. If the cantilever has already been removed, you may need to raise the Z-stage by
selecting Stage > Focus Surface or Motor > Withdraw.

c. You can see the laser spot by removing the SPM head from the dovetail (without
unplugging the cable between the SPM head and the Dimension base) and holding the
SPM head over the granite or piece of paper.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 107

Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

CAUTION: Use extreme caution when removing the SPM head. Hold the head
firmly and do not stress the wire between the SPM head and the
Dimension base. Dropping the head will likely result in damage
and Veeco factory repair.

2. Verify the laser beam is visible on the surface below. If it is not, turn the rear-right laser
control knob counter-clockwise until the laser spot appears on the surface below.

3. Turn the rear-right laser control knob clockwise to move the laser in the X positive direction
until the laser spot disappears from the surface below. Turn the right-rear laser control knob
counter-clockwise until the laser spot just reappears. The laser is now positioned at the edge
of the substrate (see Point 1 in Figure 7.2f).

Figure 7.2f Etched Silicon Tip Laser Alignment

Refl ect ion s o n

L aser V iew Screen
2 O n can t ileve r leg
or ti p
3

4. Turn the front-left laser control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise to move the laser in the
Y direction (parallel to the substrate edge and perpendicular to the cantilever) until the beam
crosses the cantilever and a shadow appears over the laser spot on the surface below. The
laser is now positioned over the cantilever (see Point 2 in Figure 7.2f).

5. Verify that the laser is deflecting off the cantilever by moving the laser on, over, and off the
cantilever by turning the front-left laser control knob less than 1/8 of a turn.

6. Turn the rear-right laser control knob counter-clockwise to move the laser in the X negative
direction on the cantilever until the laser crosses the tip-end of the cantilever and falls on the
surface below.

7. Move the laser onto the tip-end of the cantilever by reversing the direction of the rear-right
laser control knob clockwise until the spot disappears from the surface below (see Point 3 in
Figure 7.2f).

8. Verify that a laser spot appears in the Dimension head filter screen. If there is not laser spot,
adjust the photodetector mirror using the photodetector adjustment knobs located on the left
side of the SPM head (see Figure 7.2g).

108 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

Figure 7.2g Photodetector Adjustment Knobs

(Vertical)
AFM / TM Detector
Mirror Adjustment

(Horizontal)
LFM Detector
Mirror Adjustment

Note: You may now restore the illuminator lamp to increased intensity for improved
video image quality.

Silicon Nitride Tips (Contact Mode AFM)

In order to place the laser reflection at the end of the cantilever, you must shine a laser beam on
either the granite base or a piece of paper.

1. You can view the laser spot several different ways:

a. If a cantilever is being replaced, first select Stage > Load New Sample to reflect the
laser off the of the granite base while it is locked in the Z-stage dovetail (as discussed in
Section 7.1.2).

b. If the cantilever has already been removed, you may need to raise the Z-stage by
selecting Stage > Focus Surface or Motor > Withdraw.

c. You can see the laser spot by removing the SPM head from the dovetail (without
unplugging the cable between the SPM head and the Dimension base) and holding the
SPM head over the granite or piece of paper.

CAUTION: Use extreme caution when removing the SPM head. Hold the head
firmly and do not stress the wire between the SPM head and the
Dimension base. Dropping the head will likely result in damage
and Veeco factory repair.

2. Verify the laser beam is visible on the surface below. If it is not, turn the rear-right laser
control knob counter-clockwise until the laser spot appears on the surface below.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 109

Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

3. Turn the rear-right laser control knob clockwise to move the laser in the X positive direction
until the laser spot disappears from the surface below. Turn the right-rear laser control knob
counter-clockwise until the laser spot just reappears and stop turning the knob. The laser is
now positioned at the edge of the substrate (see Point 1 in Figure 7.2h).

Figure 7.2h Silicon Nitride Laser Alignment

2
Reflections on Laser
View Screen
3
On cantilever leg
or tip

1
1 Near cantilever
tip
(Optimized for
Sensitivity)

4. Once the laser is positioned just off the edge of the substrate, use the front-left laser control
knob to move in the Y direction (parallel to the edge of the substrate) until the laser crosses a
maximum of four legs on the two V-shaped cantilevers (see Point 2 in Figure 7.2h).

Note: This occurs when moving in one direction (either up or down from end to end).
If the laser is close to the substrate, you should detect four distinct occurrences
of the laser spot disappearing and reappearing on the surface below.

5. If the laser is positioned between a pair of legs of one cantilever (laser spot on surface below)
turn the rear-right laser control knob counter-clockwise to move the laser left in the X
direction until the laser spot disappears on the surface below (see Point 3 in Figure 7.2h).

6. Verify the laser is located on the portion of the cantilever connecting the two lever arms near
the tip location by moving the laser on and off the cantilever, repeatedly, with an 1/8 turn of
the back-left control knob. Then, place the laser back on the cantilever.

7. Turn the rear-right laser control knob counter-clockwise to move the laser in the X negative
direction on the cantilever until the laser crosses the tip-end of the cantilever and falls on the
surface below (see Figure 7.2h).

8. Move the laser onto the tip-end of the cantilever by reversing the direction of the rear-right
laser control knob clockwise until the spot disappears from the surface below.

9. The laser is now on one of the two cantilevers. To determine which cantilever the laser is on:

110 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

Note: During this step do not adjust the back-right laser knob, or you may
accidentally return to the original cantilever. Only use the back-right knob
when you need to place the laser on the other cantilever.

a. Rotate the back-left laser control knob in either direction until the laser disappears and
does not reappear with an 1/8 turn.

b. Use the same back-left laser control knob to rotate the laser the opposite direction, past
the original cantilever.

c. Determine which cantilever you are on:

• If the laser was on the longer cantilever at then beginning of this step, then the laser
will not cross any other cantilever legs during this movement.

• If the laser was on the small cantilever, then the laser will cross the two longer
cantilever legs.

d. Select the cantilever for imaging by returning to the original cantilever, or locate the
other end of this cantilever.

10. Verify that a laser spot appears in the Dimension head filter screen. If there is not laser spot,
adjust the photodetector mirror using the photodetector adjustment knobs located on the left
side of the SPM head.

7.2.10 Adjust Photodetector

1. Now that the laser is aligned on the cantilever, verify there is a spot visible on the Dimension
head filter screen.

2. Verify there is an appropriate laser sum signal displayed on the image monitor (see Figure
7.2i). Typical laser sum values:

• Contact Mode AFM: 4 - 6V

• TappingMode: 1.5 - 2.5V

Note: If the laser sum signal is low, either the laser is not aligned or the photodetector
knob needs adjusting (described in Step 3).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 111

Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

Figure 7.2i Vision System Window

Laser
Signal Values

Detector
Schematic

Laser
Sum Signal

3. Center the laser detector signal using the photodetector adjustment knobs (see Figure 7.2i)
located on the left side of the Dimension head. The image monitor displays the laser signal
values and a schematic of the detector quadrants labeled Detector. The position of the laser
is denoted by a red dot on the detector schematic (see Figure 7.2i).

• The Vertical Deflection signal is the difference between the top and bottom
photodetectors. For TappingMode, adjust this signal to 0. For Contact Mode, adjust this
signal to -2 (see Figure 7.2j).

Note: In TappingMode, the RMS Ampl is an AC signal and does not have any real
magnitude until the cantilever tune has been completed.

Note: When the laser is positioned in the center of the detector schematic, the laser is
also in the center of the screen on the front of the head. If the laser is severely
out of alignment, it may help to first center the laser on the screen on the head
using the photodetector adjustment knobs, then use the detector schematic on
the image monitor to finish positioning the laser.

112 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

Figure 7.2j Photodetector Mirror Adjustment Knobs

(Vertical)
AFM / TM Detector
Mirror Adjustment

(Horizontal)
LFM Detector
Mirror Adjustment

7.2.11 Locate Tip

For initial start-up where the Z-stage and optics have been almost fully retracted (such as when you
performed Stage > Load New Sample), use the Focus Surface command to move the tip closer to
the surface. It is easier to focus on the tip with more light reflecting from the surface into the optics.

To locate the tip, complete the following steps:

1. Initiate the Locate Tip command in the Stage menu by clicking on Locate Tip.

Note: This command locates the tip position (Z height) using optical focal distance
measurements. When this step completes, the computer records the tip position
in memory.

2. Zoom out as far as possible using the trackball or Zoom Out button. This helps you locate
the cantilever in optical field of view.

3. Once you find the tip, use the optic adjustment knobs (lower-left corner of the zoom optics
assembly) to align the optical microscope lens so the tip is centered in the video display
window.

4. Focus on the cantilever using the trackball. You can zoom in using the Zoom button on the
trackball.

5. Quit the Locate Tip sequence by pressing ENTER on the keyboard or clicking OK at the
bottom of the Locate Tip dialog box.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 113

Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

7.2.12 Load the Sample

If it is your first time operating the microscope, we recommend that you first image the calibration
sample (a 10µm-pitch grid of 200nm step height) provided with the instrument.

Small Sample Preparation

Place the calibration sample or other small sample on one of the 1.5cm diameter metal disks used
for sample mounting. The Dimension 3100 SPM ships with several steel sample disks that you may
attach to a magnetic sample holder located in the Dimension Chuck Spare Parts Kit. Also provided
with the instrument are red and white colored double-sided adhesive patches, or “sticky tabs,”
designed to hold the sample chip to the disk.

1. Peel off a sticky tab from the provided sheet, and place it on the steel small sample puck (see
Figure 7.2k).

2. Peel off the red-and-white paper to leave a patch of the two-sided adhesive on the steel
sample disk holding the sample chip to the disk.

3. Using tweezers, place the small sample to be imaged firmly on the adhesive (see Figure
7.2l).

Note: Alternatively, you may glue a small sample down to the sample puck using
cyanoacrylate glue (super glue).

4. Place the small sample disk on the magnetic small sample holder.

Note: The small sample holder provided with the Dimension 3100 is not optimal for
imaging soft magnetic materials due to the magnetic hold-down properties. If
magnetic imaging is intended, use the vacuum chuck.

Note: For small samples with flat backs or samples mounted on metal discs, use the
vacuum chuck.

Figure 7.2k Securing Double-sided Tape to the Sample Disk

114 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

Figure 7.2l Securing the Sample

5. Secure the sample atop the stage.

Large Sample Preparation

You may place large, flat samples directly on the vacuum chuck which are held down using
vacuum. To engage the vacuum, use the toggle switch labeled Vacuum on the front of the black
SPM electronics box. The stage has five holes available for holding samples: the center hole, three
holes with machined rings for holding wafers and discs, and an isolated hole near the edge of the
chuck for small samples. Remove the screw from the hole you will use, and block all unused holes
with screws.

7.2.13 Focus Surface

1. Select the Focus Surface option under the Stage pop-down menu, or click on the Focus
Surface icon.

2. Focus on the sample surface by rolling the trackball up or down while pressing the bottom-
left button. This adjustment raises or lowers the vertical engage stage on which the SPM and
optics are mounted.

3. To move long distances hold both left trackball buttons down simultaneously and roll the
trackball with high speed to lock the peak speed of motion. Release these two buttons to stop
the motors. be careful when performing this in the downward direction

CAUTION: Since the command Focus Surface moves the scanner vertically,
be careful when making this adjustment to ensure that the tip does
not hit the sample surface.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 115

Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Basic AFM Operation

7.2.14 Cantilever Tune (TappingMode only)

1. Select Cantilever Tune from the View > Sweep pop-down menu, or click on the Cantilever
Tune icon.

2. For Auto Tune Controls, verify the following:

• Start Frequency is set to 100 kHz

• End Frequency is set to 500kHz.

• Target Amplitude is set to 2V.

3. Click on AUTO TUNE.

4. When the procedure ends, click on QUIT to exit the function.

7.2.15 Set Initial Scan Parameters

1. In the Scan Controls panel, set the following:

• Initial Scan Size is set to 1µm (or desired scan size). Veeco recommends you always
initially engage with small scan sizes.

• X and Y Offsets are set to 0.

• Scan Angle is set to 0.

2. In TappingMode, under the Feedback Controls panel, set the following:

• Integral Gain is set to 0.4.

• Proportional Gain is set to 0.8.

• Scan Rate is set to 1Hz.

3. In Contact Mode AFM, under the Feedback Controls panel, set the following:

• Setpoint is set to 0V.

• Integral Gain is set to 2.0.

• Proportional Gain is set to 3.0.

• Scan Rate is set to 1Hz.

116 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Advanced AFM Operation

7.2.16 Engage

• Select Motor > Engage, or click the Engage icon.

• Once engaged, refer to the appropriate chapter in this manual for further instructions for
the mode you are using (e.g. Contact AFM: Chapter 8, TappingMode AFM: Chapter
9, etc.)

7.2.17 Withdraw

When imaging is complete, withdraw the tip by selecting Motor > Withdraw, or the click

Withdraw icon. This typically raises the tip 1mm above the sample.

Although the 1mm withdraw distance provides enough clearance to loosen the dovetail and remove
the AFM head, if further distance is desired perform one of the following:

• Select Stage > Focus Surface to raise the Z-stage with the trackball.

• Execute Withdraw multiple times.

• Select Stage > Load New Sample.

Note: It is impossible to move the Dimension head if the laser sum signal is too low.

7.3 Advanced AFM Operation

7.3.1 Stage Parameters

The system ships with the following default stage parameters (see Figure 7.3a). Once you have
become familiar with using the system, you may want to adjust the stage parameters to speed up the
engage sequence.

1. To access the stage parameters panel, select SPM Parameters from the Stage pop-down
menu.

2. For initial set-up, use the following values. When done, click OK to close the SPM
Parameters window.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 117

Head, Probe, & Sample Preparation
Advanced AFM Operation

Figure 7.3a Default SPM Stage Parameters

SPM Parameters
Sample clearance: 1000.0 µm

SPM safety: 100 µm

SPM engage step: 1.00 µm

Load/Unload height: 3000 µm

Definitions of Stage > SPM Parameters fields are as follows:

Sample Clearance

Defines the height of the probe tip over the sample prior to Engage (set up by performing the
Locate Tip and Focus Surface routines). You may change the sample clearance parameter once
you are experienced with the system. The default parameter is 1000µm. This parameter also sets
the distance that the tip is raised above the sample each time Withdraw is executed.

SPM Safety

Defines the height of the probe tip over the sample where the fast approach changes over to the
slow approach. The default parameter is 100µm. You may reduce to 50-75µm once you are
experienced with the system. Reducing this number speeds up the approach sequence, but it
increases the risk of the tip reaching the surface during the fast engage if the Locate Tip and Focus
Surface focal points are not properly set. If this happens, the tip has “crashed” and may need
replacing.

SPM Engage Step

Defines the step size of the Z-stage during engage. The default parameter is 1µm. Increasing this
increases the speed of the approach.

CAUTION: Do not change this parameter by more than 0.5-1 µm because the
step size must be some modest fraction of the total Z range of the
scanner (i.e. 6-7µm).

Load/Unload Height

This parameter defines how high the tip moves above the sample when Stage > Load New Sample
is executed. After the Z-stage is raised, the sample stage moves as far forward in the Y direction
(towards you) as possible.

118 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 8 Contact AFM

This chapter covers procedures for operating the Dimension 3100 Scanning Probe Microscope
(SPM) in Contact Mode AFM. It is assumed that the operator has previously prepared a Contact
Mode tip and aligned the laser per instructions provided in Chapter 7 of this manual. Specific
information regarding tip preparation is also provided in Chapter 6.

• Basic Contact Mode AFM Operation: Section 8.1

• Select the Microscope: Section 8.1.1

• Select Mode of Operation: Section 8.1.2

• Head, Cantilever and Sample Preparation: Section 8.1.3

• Align Laser: Section 8.1.4

• Adjust Photodetector: Section 8.1.5

• Locate Tip: Section 8.1.6

• Focus Surface: Section 8.1.7

• Show All Items: Section 8.1.8

• Set Initial Scan Parameters: Section 8.1.9

• Engage: Section 8.1.10

• Advanced Atomic Force Operation: Section 8.2

• Cantilever Selection: Section 8.2.1

• Optimization of Scanning Parameters: Section 8.3

• Data Type: Section 8.3.1

• Gain Settings: Section 8.3.2

• Scan Size and Scan Rate: Section 8.3.3

• Setpoint: Section 8.3.4

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 119

Contact AFM
Basic Contact Mode AFM Operation

• Lowpass Filter: Section 8.3.5

• Highpass Filter: Section 8.3.6

• Force Calibration Mode: Section 8.4

8.1 Basic Contact Mode AFM Operation

The following is a general outline of basic operational procedures involved in Contact Mode AFM.
For more detailed instructions, refer to Chapter 7 of this manual.

8.1.1 Select the Microscope

1. Set the microscope head configuration by selecting Di > Microscope Select.

2. Click OK to close the Microscope Select dialog box. When enabled, the selected buttons are
black.

8.1.2 Select Mode of Operation

1. Select Microscope > Profile.

2. Select Contact Mode as the mode of operation.

8.1.3 Head, Cantilever and Sample Preparation

1. Install a silicon nitride tip onto an AFM cantilever holder (see Chapter 7).

2. Load the cantilever holder with installed tip onto the scanner tube of the Dimension SPM
head.

8.1.4 Align Laser

1. Align the laser using the laser control knobs.

2. Verify the laser beam is positioned on the back of the cantilever, with a spot visible in the
Dimension head filter screen and a sum signal of 4-6V.

120 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Contact AFM
Basic Contact Mode AFM Operation

8.1.5 Adjust Photodetector

1. Adjust the photodetector so that the red dot moves toward the center of the Dimension head
filter screen using the two photodetector adjustment knobs located on the side of the
Dimension head.

2. Verify that the red dot is centered and elliptical in shape in the Dimension head filter screen.

3. Set the Vertical Deflection to -2V.

8.1.6 Locate Tip

1. Select Stage > Locate Tip or click on the Locate Tip icon.

2. Center the tip end of the cantilever under the cross hairs using the two optics adjustment
knobs located left of the optical microscope objective.

3. Use the trackball with the bottom left button depressed to focus on the tip end of the
cantilever.

8.1.7 Focus Surface

1. Select Stage > Focus Surface or click on the Focus Surface icon.

2. Focus on the sample surface using the trackball with the bottom-left button depressed.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 121

Contact AFM
Basic Contact Mode AFM Operation

8.1.8 Show All Items

Before changing any parameters, you should display all of the available parameters. If you cannot
view a parameter in a panel, you might need to enable this parameter.

1. Click the “minus box” in the upper left corner of the panel, and click Show all items.

Figure 8.1a Select Show All Items

a.Click here
b.Select this

045
2. Ensure there is a “X” in the check box to the left of all parameters.

Note: Those parameters without a X will not display in normal Realtime mode.

Figure 8.1b Enable Parameters

With “X”
Parameter
will display

Without “X”
Parameter will
not display
044

3. Click the “minus box” in the upper left corner of the panel, and click Show all items.
The panel will once again appear in normal Realtime mode.

122 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Contact AFM
Basic Contact Mode AFM Operation

8.1.9 Set Initial Scan Parameters

Scan Controls Panel

In the Scan Controls panel, set the following initial scan parameters (see Figure 8.1c).

1. Set the Scan Rate to 2 Hz.

2. Set the Scan Size to 1µm.

3. Set the Scan Angle to 0.

4. Set X and Y Offsets to 0.

Figure 8.1c Suggested Scan Controls Settings

Other Controls Panel

Keep the Z limit at its maximum value.

Figure 8.1d Suggested Other Controls Settings

017

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 123

Contact AFM
Basic Contact Mode AFM Operation

Feedback Controls Panel

1. Set the Integral gain to 2.0 and the Proportional gain to 4.0 (see Figure 8.1e).

2. Set the Deflection Setpoint to 0V.

Figure 8.1e Suggested Feedback Controls Settings

018
Channel Panels 1 and 2

1. In the Channel 1 panel, set Data type to Height (see Figure 8.1f).

2. Set Data scale to a reasonable value for the sample.

Note: For example, for a 200nm step height calibration sample, a reasonable Data
scale setting is 300nm initially.

3. Set Line direction to either Trace or Retrace.

4. On the Channel 2 panel, verify Data type is set to Off to disable the panel.

Figure 8.1f Suggested Channel Controls Settings

124 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Contact AFM
Advanced Atomic Force Operation

8.1.10 Engage

1. Select Motor > Engage. A pre-engage check begins, followed by Z-stage motor motion.

2. To move to another area of the sample, execute a Withdraw command to avoid damaging
the tip and scanner.

3. Move the stage using the trackball to the next area of interest on the sample.

4. Select Motor > Engage.

Note: After the tip engages, adjust the control panel values to provide the desired scan
parameters.

8.2 Advanced Atomic Force Operation

Although a great deal can be accomplished with basic knowledge of AFM operation, there is far
more to operating the AFM.

Cantilever selection is critical and becomes more important as tip and cantilever technology
continues to develop. A clear understanding of the parameters in the Realtime control panel allows
the user to tune the microscope to accommodate a wide variety of samples. This section provides
more detailed information on the operation of the Dimension microscope in Contact Mode AFM.

8.2.1 Cantilever Selection

Two basic cantilever styles are available for Contact Mode AFM. Traditional triangular silicon
nitride cantilevers have been used successfully for years. They are robust and relatively
inexpensive. Etched silicon cantilevers with integral tips provide another scanning option. They
have a higher aspect ratio and smaller end radius than the silicon nitride cantilevers (Model ESP).

Note: There are a wide variety of tips available for Contact Mode AFM. Check the tip
buying guide on the Veeco website (www.veeco.com) for more information.

Silicon Nitride Cantilevers

Silicon nitride cantilevers for the Dimension 3100 SPM are available in two process variations:
standard and sharpened. Sharpened silicon nitride cantilevers (Model DNPS) are almost identical in
appearance to the standard silicon nitride cantilevers, but have a slightly sharper end at the very tip.
Sharpened silicon nitride cantilevers are available by mail order through www.veeco.com.

Each silicon nitride cantilever substrate includes four cantilever tips with different size and spring-
constants. Two of the cantilevers on each substrate measure 115µm from the substrate to the apex of
the triangular cantilever (referred to as 100µm cantilevers) while the remaining two cantilevers
measure 193µm from the substrate to the apex of the triangular cantilever (referred to as 200µm
cantilevers). Both cantilever lengths are available with wide legs and narrow legs; however,

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 125

Contact AFM
Advanced Atomic Force Operation

thickness of both cantilevers are equal. The calculated spring-constant for each of the cantilever
configurations is listed below in Table 8.2a. These values are approximations and significant
variability occurs. The tabulated values are used to approximate contact force unless more accurate
values are measured by the user.

Table 8.2a Cantilever Spring Constants

k (N/m) k (N/m)
Cantilever Type
Narrow Legs Wide Legs
100µm 0.38 0.58
(triangular)
200µm 0.06 0.12
(triangular)

The 100µm wide-legged cantilever are used on most samples. If the image degrades rapidly
because the tip damages the sample surface, switch to a cantilever with a lower spring-constant.
Cantilevers with smaller spring-constants are used on softer samples which are destroyed by
imaging with high-contact forces.

Etched Silicon Tips

Etched silicon tips have a higher aspect ratio and smaller end radius than the silicon nitride
cantilevers. Because they are sharper, etched silicon tips provide better resolution and have less
applied capillary forces. Most samples in air are covered by a thin layer of water and other
condensed contaminants. These contaminants often form a capillary bridge between the tip and
sample, generating large adhesive forces, also referred to as capillary forces (see Figure 8.2a). For
more force curve information, see Chapter 13.

Figure 8.2a Force Curve

A Approach

B Jump to contact

C
Contact

D
Adhesion

E
Pull-off

126 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Contact AFM
Optimization of Scanning Parameters

CAUTION: Large offsets are not recommended between engage and disengage
(2 volts) with etched silicon cantilevers in Contact Mode AFM
(450µm long only) because breakage is likely.

ATTENTION: Il est recommandé de ne pas utiliser de forts décentrements

pendant l’engagement et le désengagement des céramiques piézo-
électriques (2 V) avec des pointes en silicium (longueur: 450µm)
sous peine de destruction de celles-ci.

VORSICHT: Wir empfehlen, im Kontakt-Modus mit den geätzten

Siliziumspitzen (nur mit den 450µm langen) keine großen Offsets
zwischen engage und disengage-Zustand (2 Volt) zu haben, da
diese sonst leicht brechen könnten.

Note: The smaller end radius of etched silicon tips creates greater force between the
tip and sample. Therefore, etched silicon tips are not suggested for soft
samples.

8.3 Optimization of Scanning Parameters

Careful selection of scan parameters is important in the successful application of Contact Mode
AFM. In most cases, optimal parameter selection depends on the sample. It is beneficial to
experiment with a range of values within each parameter, however, please review discussions of the
scan parameters in the Realtime control panels in the Command Reference Manual before making
bold changes. The following section analyzes the effects of the most important parameters.

8.3.1 Data Type

Data type is the first parameter set because the settings of other parameters depend on it. The Data
type parameter in the Channel control panels selects the type of data collected by the system.
Height data corresponds to the change in piezo height needed to keep the cantilever deflection
constant. Deflection data comes from the differential signal off of the top and bottom photodiode
segments relative to the Deflection Setpoint.

The scan parameters required to collect accurate height data are different from the optimal
parameters for deflection data. To collect height data, the feedback gains must be high so that the tip
tracks the sample surface with minimal cantilever deflection. The position of the piezo during the
scan reflects the height of the sample. To collect accurate topographical data, set the Data type
parameter to Height. Topographical Deflection data is only reasonable on very smooth, flat
samples. Topograhpical Deflection data is used infrequently and only for high resolution work.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 127

Contact AFM
Optimization of Scanning Parameters

Collect Deflection data with low feedback gains to ensure the piezo remains at a constant position
relative to the sample. In this case, the tip and cantilever are deflected by the features on the sample
surface. The output fluctuations in the cantilever deflection voltage from the top and bottom
photodiode segments are recorded as a measure of the variation in the sample surface. Deflection
data is not automatically calibrated in units of distance. You must measure the sensitivity using the
procedures discussed in Chapter 13.

Deflection data collected with high feedback gains essentially equals the derivative of the height.
This is commonly referred to as the error-signal. The error-signal provides a sensitive edge-
detection technique and can be very helpful in visualizing fine details in topography that are
difficult to see in regular height data. Using two channels, you must capture both height and
deflection data simultaneously. Deflection (error-signal) data alone does not yield quantitative
height information.

8.3.2 Gain Settings

The Integral, Proportional, and LookAhead gains in the Feedback Controls panel determine the
feedback on the piezo height. The feedback loop keeps the deflection signal constant by adjusting
the height of the piezo tube. If the gains are high, as they should be for Height data, the piezo
height changes to keep the cantilever deflection nearly constant. If the gains are low, as they should
be for topographical Deflection data, the cantilever deflects from its nominal position as it
encounters features in the sample.

In general, set the gain settings as follows:

1. Set the Integral and Proportional gains to 2-3 to start scanning.

2. To optimize the gains for Height data, increase the Integral gain until the piezo begins to
oscillate, then eliminate the oscillations by reducing the gain with 2-3 clicks of the left arrow
key.

3. Repeat the process for the Proportional gain.

Note: Piezo oscillations typically cause high frequency wavy lines in the Realtime
image. Piezo oscillations are more easily observed in View > Scope Mode.

4. For Deflection data, engage the microscope with the gains high, then lower them as much as
possible without losing contact with the sample once the system begins scanning.

5. Set the LookAhead gain to 0.7 initially for samples with step-like features oriented
perpendicular to the fast scan direction. Otherwise, it should be left at 0.00.

Note: The LookAhead gain includes information from the previous scan line to
determine the current gain setting.

128 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Contact AFM
Optimization of Scanning Parameters

8.3.3 Scan Size and Scan Rate

In general, decrease the Scan rate as the Scan size increases. Use scan rates of 1.5 - 2.5 Hz for
large scans on samples with tall features. High scan rates help reduce drift, but use high scan rates
only on flat samples with small scan sizes. When first using the system, vary the scan rate enough to
observe a change in the image quality.

8.3.4 Setpoint

The Setpoint parameter defines the desired voltage (and, therefore, the desired deflection or force
of the cantilever) for the feedback loop. The setpoint voltage constantly compares to the present
vertical deflection signal of the photodiode to calculate the desired change in the piezo position.
When the gain values are high, and when the Data type is set to Height, the Z piezo position
changes to keep the photodiode output signal close to the Setpoint; therefore, the cantilever
deflection remains nearly constant.

Adjust the Setpoint to increase or decrease the cantilever deflection and, therefore, the contact
force of the tip on the sample. The Force Calibration command in the Realtime > View menu
allows you to adjust the setpoint while viewing a graph of the tip position versus the deflection
voltage. Using this procedure, described in detail in Chapter 13, minimizes the contact force of the
tip on the sample. This is especially important on soft materials such as biological samples.

8.3.5 Lowpass Filter

The Lowpass filter invokes a digital, one-pole, lowpass filter to remove high-frequency noise from
Realtime data. The filter operates on the collected digital data regardless of the scan direction.
Settings for this item range from Off through 9. Off implies no lowpass filtering of the data, while
settings of 1 through 9, successively, lower the cut-off frequency of the filter applied to the data
stream. The standard setting is Off.

8.3.6 Highpass Filter

The Highpass filter parameter invokes a digital, two-pole, highpass filter to remove low frequency
effects such as ripples caused by torsional forces on the cantilever when the scan reverses direction.
As with the Lowpass filter, the Highpass filter also operates on the digital data stream regardless
of scan direction. This parameter can be Off or set from 1 through 9. Settings of 1 through 9,
successively, lower the cut-off frequency of the filter applied to the data stream. Note that in
removing low frequency information from the image, the Highpass filter distorts the height
information in the image. As a result, this filter must be Off when accurate height information is
desired. The Highpass filter is typically used only for atomic images.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 129

Contact AFM
Force Calibration Mode

8.4 Force Calibration Mode

The Force Calibration command in the View > Force Mode > Calibration menu allows you to
check the interaction between the cantilever and the sample surface. For detailed information
regarding Force Calibration, see Chapter 13.

130 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 9 TappingMode AFM

This chapter details procedures for operating the Dimension 3100 SPM in TappingMode in air. For
information regarding TappingMode in fluids, see Chapter 10. For information regarding loading a
TappingMode tip and aligning the SPM laser see Chapter 7 of this manual. Additional information
regarding cantilever preparation is provided in Chapter 6.

This chapter addresses the following:

• Principles of TappingMode: Section 9.1

• Basic TappingMode AFM Operation: Section 9.2

• Select Mode of Operation: Section 9.2.1

• Head, Cantilever and Sample Preparation: Section 9.2.2

• Align Laser: Section 9.2.3

• Adjust Photodetector: Section 9.2.4

• Locate Tip: Section 9.2.5

• Focus Surface: Section 9.2.6

• Cantilever Tune: Section 9.2.7

• Show All Items: Section 9.2.8

• Set Initial Scan Parameters: Section 9.2.9

• Engage: Section 9.2.10

• Optimize Scan Parameters: Section 9.2.11

• Withdraw the Tip: Section 9.3

• Advanced TappingMode AFM Operation: Section 9.4

• Resonating Techniques: Section 9.4.1

• Cantilever Oscillation: Section 9.4.2

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 131

TappingMode AFM
Principles of TappingMode

• Decreasing the Cantilever Drive Frequency: Section 9.4.3

• Optimization of Scanning Parameters: Section 9.4.4

• Data Type: Section 9.4.5

• Gain Settings: Section 9.4.6

• Scan Size, Scan Rate, and Setpoint: Section 9.4.7

• Surface Tune: Section 9.4.8

• Troubleshooting: Section 9.5

• Frequency Response Plot: Section 9.5.1

• Engaging the Sample: Section 9.5.2

• Cantilever Will Not Tune: Section 9.5.3

9.1 Principles of TappingMode

Figure 9.1a depicts a cantilever oscillating in free air at its resonant frequency. A piezo stack excites
the cantilever substrate vertically, causing the cantilever to move up and down. As the cantilever
moves vertically, the reflected laser beam, or “return signal,” deflects in a regular pattern over a
photodiode array, generating a sinusoidal, electronic signal.

Figure 9.1a Tapping Cantilever in Free Air

Laser beam

Return signal
Cantilever

132 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 TappingMode AFM
Basic TappingMode AFM Operation

Figure 9.1b represents the same cantilever at the sample surface. Although the piezo stack continues
to excite the cantilever substrate with the same energy, the tip deflects in its encounter with the
surface. The reflected laser beam reveals information about the vertical height of the sample surface
and characteristics of the sample material itself. These material characteristics include elasticity,
magnetism, and presence of electrical forces.

Figure 9.1b Tapping Cantilever on Sample Surface

Laser beam

Return signal Sample surface

(deflected)

Note: Deflection of the cantilever and return signal are exaggerated in the figure for
illustrative purposes.

9.2 Basic TappingMode AFM Operation

The following is a general outline of basic operational procedures involved in TappingMode AFM.
For more detailed instructions, refer to Chapter 7 of this manual.

9.2.1 Select Mode of Operation

• Select Microscope > Profile.

• Select TappingMode as the mode of operation.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 133

TappingMode AFM
Basic TappingMode AFM Operation

9.2.2 Head, Cantilever and Sample Preparation

• Install an etched single crystal silicon tip onto an AFM cantilever holder (see Chapter
7).

• Load the cantilever holder with installed tip onto the scanner tube of the Dimension
SPM head.

9.2.3 Align Laser

• Align the laser using the laser control knobs (see Align Laser: Section 9.2.3 for more
detailed instructions).

• Verify the laser beam is positioned on the back of the cantilever, with a spot visible in
the Dimension head filter screen and a sum signal of at least 1V.

9.2.4 Adjust Photodetector

1. Adjust the photodetector so that the red dot moves toward the center of the Dimension head
filter screen using the two photodetector adjustment knobs located on the left side of the
Dimension head.

2. Verify that the red dot is centered and elliptical in shape in the Dimension head filter screen.

3. Set the Vertical Deflection to 0V.

9.2.5 Locate Tip

1. Select Stage > Locate Tip or click the Locate Tip icon.

2. Center the tip end of the cantilever under the crosshairs using the two optics adjustment
knobs located left of the optical microscope objective.

3. Use the trackball with the bottom left button depressed to focus on the tip end of the
cantilever.

Note: You may need to adjust the illumination and zoom to clearly see the probe.

134 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 TappingMode AFM
Basic TappingMode AFM Operation

9.2.6 Focus Surface

CAUTION: Use caution when focussing on the sample surface. Moving the
head too quickly while focussing can cause the tip to crash, which
may damage the tip and/or sample.

1. Select Stage > Focus Surface or click the Focus Surface icon.

2. In the Focus On box, select Choose either surface or Tip reflection. If the sample is very
flat or reflective, choose Tip reflection.

3. Focus on the sample surface using the trackball with the bottom left button depressed.

Note: You may need to adjust the illumination and zoom to clearly see the probe.

9.2.7 Cantilever Tune

This section describes the steps required to find the resonance peak of the cantilever and adjust the
oscillation voltage so the cantilever vibrates at an appropriate amplitude. A range of oscillation
frequencies are applied to the cantilever to determine the frequency which produces the largest
response (the resonant frequency). In most instances, the resonant peak has a sharp Gaussian
distribution but at times the peak can be ragged. The system tolerates some deviation in the shape of
the peak.

• Select View > Sweep > Cantilever Tune, or click on the Cantilever Tune icon.
The initial Cantilever Tune panel appears with the Frequency Sweep (a plot of
cantilever response as a function of applied oscillation frequency) on the display
monitor.

• Choose either the manual or automatic tuning method (see Automatic Tuning and
Manual Cantilever Tuning).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 135

TappingMode AFM
Basic TappingMode AFM Operation

Automatic Tuning

For most purposes, the Auto Tune function will suffice.

• Verify the starting parameters. The nominal resonant frequency of a probe can be found
on the probe box label. Ensure the start and end frequencies correlate with this value.

• Click Auto Tune. The computer and controller begin automatic tuning (see Figure
9.2a).

Figure 9.2a Auto Tune Control Panel

Manual Cantilever Tuning

With Force Modulation or Fluid Tapping applications, it may be useful to tune the cantilever
manually.

Note: More than one type of cantilever exists. Cantilevers can have different
dimensions and different resonant frequencies. Certain parameter values,
particularly the center frequency and the sweep width used in the following
example, apply to a particular cantilever type. In the following example,
nominal parameter values will vary depending on the actual cantilever used.

1. In the Cantilever Tune panel, set the Drive frequency parameter to a value near the center
of the resonant frequencies range specified for the wafer. For example, if the frequency range
is specified as 240—420 KHz, select a drive frequency of 330 KHz.

2. Set the Drive amplitude to 200 mV.

3. Set the Sweep Width to the same value as the Center Frequency.

4. The Sweep Width must be large enough to cover the frequency range specified for the
wafer.

5. Zero the Setpoint.

6. Set the Amplitude limit to 2.5V.

7. Center the peak on the frequency sweep plot shown on the display monitor using the Zoom
In and Offset commands after identifying the maximum amplitude peak with the lowest
frequency in the frequency response plot.

136 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 TappingMode AFM
Basic TappingMode AFM Operation

Note: The Offset command sets the center frequency equal to the cursor position to
shift the plot. The Zoom In command decreases the sweep width and shifts the
center frequency value to stretch the plot.

8. Increase the Setpoint until the peak appears.

9. Continue to Zoom In and center the peak until the peak coincides with the vertical center
line within 10 Hz. The value displayed for center frequency is now used as the resonant
frequency of the cantilever.

Note: The system works well in TappingMode if the center frequency is at, or below,
the peak in the resonance plot. The center frequency can decrease to the point
where the oscillation amplitude reaches 90 percent of the maximum value.
Operate at a frequency lower than the resonant frequency to avoid shifting the
resonant frequency upon approach of the tip to the surface (see Figure 9.2c).

Figure 9.2b Cantilever Tune Control Panels for Main Controls

022

10. Specify the RMS amplitude after tuning the cantilever to its resonant frequency. The desired
operating amplitude depends on the sample and other scanning conditions.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 137

TappingMode AFM
Basic TappingMode AFM Operation

Figure 9.2c Cantilever Tune Frequency Sweep

Frequency Sweep
Cantilever
Response
0.50 V/div

Setpoint

Center Frequency - 337.8723 KHz

0.05 KHz/div

11. Click OK. The parameters set in the Cantilever Tune control panel appear in the Realtime
control panel.

12. Click on CANCEL to exit the Cantilever Tune command and leave the parameters
unchanged.

138 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 TappingMode AFM
Basic TappingMode AFM Operation

9.2.8 Show All Items

Before changing any parameters, you should display all of the available parameters. If you cannot
view a parameter in a panel, you might need to enable this parameter.

1. Click the “minus box” in the upper left corner of the panel, and click Show all items.

Figure 9.2d Select Show All Items

a.Click here
b.Select this

045
2. Ensure there is a “X” in the check box to the left of all parameters.

Note: Those parameters without a X will not display in normal Realtime mode.

Figure 9.2e Enable Parameters

With “X”
Parameter
will display

Without “X”
Parameter will
not display
044

3. Click the “minus box” in the upper left corner of the panel, and click Show all items.
The panel will once again appear in normal Realtime mode.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 139

TappingMode AFM
Basic TappingMode AFM Operation

9.2.9 Set Initial Scan Parameters

Scan Controls Panel

In the Scan Controls panel, set the following initial scan parameters (see Figure 9.2f).

1. Set the Scan Rate to 2 Hz.

2. Set the Scan Size to 1µm.

3. Set the Scan Angle to 0.

4. Set X and Y Offsets to 0.

Figure 9.2f Suggested Scan Controls Settings

Other Controls Panel

Verify the Z Limit is at the maximum value.

Figure 9.2g Suggested Other Controls Settings

140 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 TappingMode AFM
Basic TappingMode AFM Operation

Feedback Controls Panel

• Set the Integral gain to 0.5 and the Proportional gain to 0.7 (see Figure 9.2h).

• Set the Look Ahead gain to zero.

Figure 9.2h Suggested Feedback Controls Settings

Note: The Drive frequency and Drive amplitude values were determined during the
Cantilever Tune procedure. It is not necessary to enter a value for the
Amplitude setpoint; this will be determined automatically during the engage
process.

9.2.10 Engage

1. Select Motor > Engage. A pre-engage check begins, followed by Z-stage motor motion.

2. To move to another area of the sample, execute a Withdraw command to avoid damaging
the tip and scanner.

3. Move the stage using the trackball to the next area of interest on the sample.

4. Select Motor > Engage.

Note: After the tip engages, adjust the control panel values to provide the desired scan
parameters. Refer to Section 9.4.4 for scan parameter optimization.

5. After engaging, it may be necessary to recheck the Cantilever Tune parameters. Select View
> Sweep > Cantilever Tune. In the Tip Offset box, enter 200nm and click OK. Adjust the
Drive frequency if necessary.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 141

TappingMode AFM
Withdraw the Tip

9.2.11 Optimize Scan Parameters

The procedure to optimize the scan parameters is similar to that of Contact Mode.

1. In the Scan Controls panel, set Slow scan axis to Disabled.

2. Select View > Scope Mode.

3. Observe the agreement between the trace and retrace lines. Adjust the Scan rate, Gains, and
Amplitude setpoint to bring these two lines in to coincidence. A more detailed discussion of
these parameters can be found in Section 9.4.

9.3 Withdraw the Tip

1. Select Withdraw from the Motor menu. The SPM stops scanning, and ascends to the
sample clearance height defined in the SPM Parameters menu.

2. Select the Stage > Load New Sample option to replace or move the sample.

3. Use the Focus Surface command to move the SPM up if you desire more clearance between
the tip and sample.

CAUTION: Never withdraw samples without verifying that the tip has
adequate clearance during the entire sample removal sequence.

142 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 TappingMode AFM
Advanced TappingMode AFM Operation

9.4 Advanced TappingMode AFM Operation

This section discusses the more subtle aspects involved in operating the Dimension 3100 in
TappingMode.

9.4.1 Resonating Techniques

Without a thorough understanding of principles associated with cantilever resonating techniques,

you may generate distorted data. Understanding the Cantilever Tune process and the effects of
real-time scan parameters is critical for effective operation of the microscope. It is also important to
understand similarities and differences between Force Calibration Mode in Contact AFM and
Force Calibration Mode in TappingMode (see Chapter 13).

9.4.2 Cantilever Oscillation

The response of the cantilever to inputs plays an important role in the operation of the Dimension
3100 SPM while in TappingMode. There is an important trade-off between the response time of the
cantilever and the force applied to the sample. The cantilever does not respond instantly to
perturbations in oscillation amplitude. The cantilever drive system pumps energy gradually into the
cantilever oscillation. Figure 9.4a illustrates a typical response curve of the cantilever amplitude as
a function of time. To demonstrate the conflicting requirements, the performance of the system is
analyzed at two operating points.

Figure 9.4a Cantilever Response Curve

Cantilever Vibration Amplitude

Free Amplitude
∆x
Setpoint 1

∆x
Setpoint 2
∆t 2 ∆t1

Time
At Setpoint 1 the operating point is only slightly lower than the free oscillation amplitude. This has
the advantage of dissipating very little energy to the sample surface. The disadvantage is that the
system takes longer to recover from a given perturbation in the amplitude. Consider the situation
where the tip travels off a step with a height of ∆x. At Setpoint 1 it takes longer for the amplitude of
the cantilever oscillation to increase; therefore, the feedback system is slow in responding to the
error created by going off of the step. At operating Setpoint 2 the cantilever amplitude builds up

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 143

TappingMode AFM
Advanced TappingMode AFM Operation

more rapidly. The feedback system senses the error caused by going off of the step and responds
more rapidly. Unfortunately, more energy transfers to the sample surface while scanning at this
operating point.

The nature of the sample influences the decision between response time and contact force. For
example, harder samples can withstand higher contact forces, so the response time improves by
lowering the Setpoint amplitude. Soft samples that are relatively flat should run with higher
Setpoint values to reduce the energy imparted to the sample. In general, the solution to the problem
is to decrease the scan rate and increase the feedback gains. In some situations, the feedback gains
cannot increase without causing piezo oscillations; in such cases there is no choice but to reduce
the scan rate.

Inadequate response time typically occurs when the tip encounters a low point in the sample. The
amplitude of the cantilever oscillation decreases very quickly when taller portions of the sample are
encountered. As a result, the system response is markedly different depending on whether the tip is
climbing or descending a feature in the sample. For this reason, Scope Mode is very useful when
setting scan parameters. As the tip descends, features are evaluated by comparing the Trace and
Retrace in Scope Mode. Figure 9.4b illustrates the effects of poorly selected scan parameters on a
calibration standard that includes a series of sharp-walled pits. Regardless of the scan direction, the
tip does not track the wall of the pit when the tip encounters a pit. However, it does track the surface
closely when moving out of the pit.

Figure 9.4b Scope Trace with High Scan Rate

Trace
Retrace

Z Range
50.00 nm/div

Scan Size - 2.50 µm/div

Figure 9.4c depicts the same sample with a slight increase in the Integral gain and a twofold
decrease in the Scan rate. The tip now tracks the surface when it descends into the pit as well as
when it exits. The Trace and Retrace lines now coincide closely.

144 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 TappingMode AFM
Advanced TappingMode AFM Operation

Figure 9.4c Scope Trace with Correct Scan Rate

Trace
Retrace

Z Range
50.00 nm/div

Scan Size - 2.50 µm/div

9.4.3 Decreasing the Cantilever Drive Frequency

The Drive frequency selected to oscillate the cantilever plays an important role in the performance
of the microscope while in TappingMode. As a first step it is important to determine the resonant
frequency of the cantilever, but the Drive frequency could be further tuned to improve scanning
performance.

The microscope produces better data in TappingMode when the Drive frequency is set lower than
the resonant peak of the cantilever. The Drive frequency is set such that it coincides with a 1-10
percent decrease in the oscillation amplitude by setting Peak offset in the Auto Tune controls to the
desired percent. Figure 9.4d shows a suggested operating region. This is a suggestion based on our
observations; users are encouraged to experiment with the microscope and decide what produces
the best results.

Figure 9.4d Suggested Range of Drive Frequencies

Drive Frequency should
be within this range.
Cantilever
Response
12.54 nm/div

Setpoint

Center Frequency - 338.8723 KHz

5.0 KHz/div

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 145

TappingMode AFM
Advanced TappingMode AFM Operation

9.4.4 Optimization of Scanning Parameters

The user is encouraged to review Section 8.3 which discusses parameter optimization for Contact
AFM.

9.4.5 Data Type

Data type is the first parameter to set because the values of other parameters depend on it. The
Data type parameter in the Channel 1, Channel 2 and Channel 3 panels selects the type of data
collected by the system. Height data corresponds to the change in piezo height needed to keep the
amplitude of the cantilever constant. Amplitude data measures the change in amplitude relative to
the amplitude setpoint.

The scan parameters required to collect good Height data are different than the optimal parameters
for Amplitude data. To collect Height data while tracking the sample surface with minimal
change in the tip’s oscillation amplitude, the feedback gains must be high.

CAUTION: Do not conduct TappingMode microscopy with low feedback gain

values, as this will cause damage to both the tip and sample. The
maximum amplitude of the cantilever oscillation is not sufficient to
track tall features.

Amplitude data collected with high feedback gains is the derivative of the height. Amplitude
mode provides a sensitive edge detection technique. With the dual screen mode it is possible to
capture both Height and Amplitude data simultaneously.

9.4.6 Gain Settings

The Integral and Proportional gains on the Feedback Controls panel must be high enough to
force the feedback system to track the sample surface. When scanning in TappingMode, set the
Integral and Proportional gains to lower values than those values used in Contact mode. The
Proportional gain can usually be set 30%-100% higher than the Integral gain. To optimize the
gains, increase the Integral gain until the piezo begins to oscillate (feedback oscillation usually
occurs with Integral gains of 1-2), then eliminate the oscillations by reducing the gain with two or
three clicks of the left arrow key. Repeat the process for the Proportional gain.

9.4.7 Scan Size, Scan Rate, and Setpoint

The Scan size, Scan rate, and Setpoint values effect data output differently. As in Contact mode,
decrease the Scan rate as the Scan size is increased. Use Scan rates of 0.5-1.0 Hz for large scans
on samples with tall features. High scan rates help reduce drift, but only use them on flat samples
with small scan sizes.

146 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 TappingMode AFM
Advanced TappingMode AFM Operation

The Setpoint parameter defines the desired voltage for the feedback loop. The Setpoint voltage is
constantly compared to the present RMS amplitude voltage to calculate the desired change in the
piezo position. When the gain values are high, as they should be when the Data type is set to
Height, the Z piezo position changes to keep the amplitude voltage close to the Setpoint; therefore,
the oscillation amplitude remains nearly constant.

As discussed above, changing the Setpoint alters the response of the cantilever oscillation and
changes the amount of force applied to the sample surface.

The force applied by the tip on the sample increases as the setpoint is decreased. To minimize the
force on the sample:

• Increase the setpoint using the right arrow key on the computer keyboard until the
tip is no longer interacting with the surface. This can be observed by monitoring the
trace and retrace lines in View > Scope Mode, and by monitoring the Z Center
Position display in the Image Monitor. When the tip is no longer interacting with
the surface, the Z Center Position will move to the retracted limit.

• Slowly decrease the setpoint using the left arrow key on the keyboard until features
appear in the trace and retrace lines in View > Scope Mode.

The setpoint can also be adjusted by using View > Force Mode > Calibrate. Force calibration
mode is used to compare the amplitude of the cantilever oscillation on the surface to the free-air
amplitude. Other uses of Force Calibration include characterizing the forces on the cantilever tip,
diagnosing the performance, and calibrating the RMS amplitude voltage as a function of the
oscillation amplitude of the cantilever. The use of Force Calibration is described in Chapter 13.

9.4.8 Surface Tune

It is often desirable to check the cantilever tune after engaging. You will notice that the Cantilever

Tune icon is grayed out when the tip is engaged. However, you can still access the
Cantilever Tune panel by selecting View > Sweep > Cantilever Tune.

A warning appears indicating that cantilever tuning while engaged can result in damage to the tip or
sample. This warning prompts you to enter a Tip offset. This is the distance above the sample that
the tip will be raised before displaying the tuning spectrum. Use a minimum Tip offset of 100-
200nm.

Observe the plot of amplitude vs. driving frequency to see if the cantilever tuning curve shifted
during the engagement. The drive frequency can be adjusted to compensate for such a shift by using
the Offset command located above the Cantilever Tune plot. The phrase response curve can be
adjusted as well.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 147

TappingMode AFM
Troubleshooting

9.5 Troubleshooting

9.5.1 Frequency Response Plot

If a peak in the frequency response plot does not appear, perform the following steps:

1. Increase Sweep width to the maximum value.

2. Increase the Drive amplitude in intervals of 200-300mV until you have reached 2-3V.

3. If the peak still has not appeared, then increase the Sweep width by first increasing the
Center Frequency, then maximizing the Sweep width. If there is still no peak on the
response plot, check the laser alignment.

9.5.2 Engaging the Sample

If the engage aborts because the tip is still too far away from the surface, return to Stage/Focus
Surface and use the trackball to relocate the surface. After successful re-engaging, a well formed
image appears on the display monitor.

9.5.3 Cantilever Will Not Tune

If the Cantilever Tune fails, check the following:

• Ensure the laser is properly aligned at the free end of the cantilever (the end furthest
from the substrate).

• Ensure there is good physical coupling between the probe and the probe holder. Make
sure the groove the probe is held in is free of debris, and that the probe substrate is in
firm contact with the back wall of the groove and is pushed firmly against one side of
the groove.

148 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 10 Fluid Imaging

The imaging of samples under fluid is an ever-increasing realm for SPM technology. Imaging
samples under fluid minimizes surface forces on delicate samples, allows observation of biological
specimens in their natural, fluid environments, and allows real-time observations of samples
undergoing electrochemical reactions (ECAFM). In order to conduct ECAFM observations with
electrical potentials, an external potentiostat unit is necessary. Contact Veeco for more information.

This chapter details basic operation of the Dimension 3100 SPM in fluid, using both Contact Mode
and TappingMode. Methods of preparing the sample for fluid operation are also included.
Specifically, this chapter addresses the following:

• Basic Principles: Section 10.1

• Acknowledgments: Section 10.1.1

• Fluid Operation Hardware: Section 10.2

• Fluid Tip Holder: Section 10.2.1

• Tip Suggestions: Section 10.2.2

• Rubber Protective Skirt: Section 10.2.3

• Sample Mounting: Section 10.3

• General Notes on Sample Binding: Section 10.3.1

• Larger Samples: Section 10.3.2

• Smaller Samples: Section 10.3.3

• Precautions: Section 10.4

• Spillage Precautions: Section 10.4.1

• Operating Principles: Section 10.5

• Clean Fluid Cell and Protective Skirt: Section 10.5.1

• Select Mode of Operation: Section 10.5.2

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 149

Fluid Imaging

• Load the Probe: Section 10.5.3

• Install the Fluid Tip Holder: Section 10.5.4

• Install the Protective Skirt: Section 10.5.5

• Align Laser: Section 10.5.6

• “False” Reflections: Section 10.5.7

• Load Sample: Section 10.5.8

• Lower Probe into Fluid: Section 10.5.9

• Readjust Laser Alignment: Section 10.5.10

• Adjust Photodetector: Section 10.5.11

• Locate Tip: Section 10.5.12

• Focus Surface: Section 10.5.13

• Cantilever Tune (TappingMode Only): Section 10.5.14

• Show All Items: Section 10.5.15

• Set Initial Scan Parameters: Section 10.5.16

• Engage: Section 10.5.17

• Adjust Scan Parameters: Section 10.5.18

• Clean Cell and Protective Skirt: Section 10.5.19

• Troubleshooting: Section 10.6

• Cantilever Tune Plot Looks Poor: Section 10.6.1

• Laser Sum Signal Absent or Weak: Section 10.6.2

• Poor Image Quality: Section 10.6.3

• Unable to Locate Particulate Samples: Section 10.6.4

150 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Basic Principles

10.1 Basic Principles

Attractive forces due to surface tension effects are eliminated when imaging samples under fluid.
This enables the sample surface to be imaged with minimal cantilever tip force—a decided
advantage when imaging biological specimens and delicate materials. The procedure for observing
samples under fluid is similar to that for observation in air; however, special hardware is utilized to
contain the fluid. In addition, minor adjustments must be made to correct for refractive effects as the
laser beam transits air-fluid boundaries.

This chapter assumes familiarity with standard operation of the Dimension 3100 AFM in air. If you
are not familiar with air operation of the AFM in Contact Mode, please follow the procedures
outlined in Chapter 8 before attempting to operate the AFM under fluid. If you are not familiar with
air operation of TappingMode, refer to Chapter 9.

10.1.1 Acknowledgments

Veeco appreciates the following individuals’ assistance with the following sections: Monika Fritz,
Manfred Radmacher, Magdalena Benzanilla, Helen G. Hansma, Jan H. Ho, Craig B. Prater.

10.2 Fluid Operation Hardware

10.2.1 Fluid Tip Holder

The Dimension 3100 can be equipped with an optional tip holder that permits operation under fluid
(see Figure 10.2a). The fluid tip holder interchanges with the standard tip holder quickly and easily.

The fluid tip holder consists of a small glass assembly with a wire clip for holding an AFM
cantilever substrate. The glass surfaces provide a flat, beveled interface so that the AFM laser beam
may pass into the fluid without being distorted by an unstable fluid surface. The four sockets
located on the top of the fluid tip holder are used to attach the tip holder to the four pins at the end
of the scanner tube.

Use the fluid tip holder in an open environment where the holder is dipped into a user-supplied fluid
container (or into a drop of fluid on larger samples). A method for mounting samples for fluid
operation is illustrated in Figure 10.3a in Section 10.3.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 151

Fluid Imaging
Fluid Operation Hardware

Figure 10.2a Fluid Tip Holder

Probe Clip Spring Lever

SIDE VIEW

tip installed

sockets not shown!!

Cantilever Probe Tip
( tip faces down )
Spring Loaded Probe Clip

Mounting Sockets ( 4 plcs.)

( Top Side )

BOTTOM VIEW
Cantilever
Mounting tip not installed
Groove
( no tip
sockets shown are
installed ) on top but viewed
through bottom !!

10.2.2 Tip Suggestions

Soft cantilevers, particularly oxide sharpened tips, produce the best results for biological
applications. These cantilevers are typically 100µm long, narrow-legged with oxide sharpened
silicon-nitride tips. Models DNP-S or DNP-STT are good examples. Users should experiment to
find which cantilevers work best for their sample. The application note “Choosing AFM Probes for
Biological Applications” discusses the appropriate probes for different fluid imaging applications.
Contact Veeco for a copy.

Note: For additional information on selecting a cantilever, please refer to the Veeco
website (www.veeco.com).

Removing Organic Contamination

CAUTION: When cleaning the cantilever holder, take care to avoid scratching
the glass surfaces in the center of the cantilever holder. Be careful
to prevent dripping any liquid onto the Dimension 3100 system,
especially onto the SPM head.

Contaminants on the cantilever tip may limit the AFM’s resolution. Use ultraviolet light to remove
contaminants as follows:

1. Place the fluid cell with installed tip face-up on a clean surface.

2. Position a UV lamp very close (3-5mm) to the fluid cell and irradiate the unit for two
minutes at full intensity.

Note: Washing probes in 1-5% SDS (sodium dodecyl sulfate) is also effective.

152 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Sample Mounting

10.2.3 Rubber Protective Skirt

A rubber protective skirt (see Figure 10.2b) is also provided with the fluid tip holder. This protective
skirt is used to protect the Dimension scanner from getting liquid on it. It is recommended that the
protective skirt be used with all wet samples. Skirts wear over time and may need to be replaced.

Figure 10.2b Rubber Protective Skirt

10.3 Sample Mounting

10.3.1 General Notes on Sample Binding

Immobilize samples for AFM imaging on a rigid support. Macroscopic samples (biomaterials,
crystals, polymer membranes, etc.) can be attached directly to a stainless steel sample disk with an
adhesive. Biological samples like cells, proteins, DNA, etc. are usually bound to a flat substrate
such as mica or glass. Many sample preparations have been developed and AFM applications
articles are an excellent source of information or sample binding.

Note: For a list of articles describing biological applications of AFM, including

sample preparation techniques, contact Veeco.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to operate the standard air tip holder in a fluid
environment. The standard tip holder has exposed electrical signal
lines that could short circuit if exposed to a conducting fluid.

ATTENTION: En milieu liquide, ne pas utiliser le support de pointe standard

prévu pour une utilisation à l’air. Le support de pointe standard
présente des contacts électriques qui peuvent être endommagés
(court-circuit) suite à une exposition à un liquide conducteur
d’électricité.

VORSICHT: Versuchen Sie nicht, den Standard-Luft-Cantileverhalter in

Flüssigkeiten zu betreiben. Am Standard-Cantileverhalter liegen
elektrische Leitungen frei, die in leitfähigen Flüssigkeiten
kurzgeschlossen werden könnten.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 153

Fluid Imaging
Sample Mounting

10.3.2 Larger Samples

For larger samples, it may be desirable to image a small region under a drop of fluid (see Figure
10.3a).

1. Put the drop of fluid onto the sample.

2. Lower the AFM fluid tip holder into the drop.

Figure 10.3a Imaging a Sample Covered by a Drop of Fluid

Fluid Tip Holder

Fluid Meniscus

Cantilever and Tip Sample

10.3.3 Smaller Samples

Alternatively, it may be desirable to image smaller samples that are totally immersed in a liquid
bath.

1. Place the sample in a plastic petri dish.

Note: If you wish to construct a custom sample holder, please contact Veeco for more
information.

2. Secure the sample to the bottom of the petri dish lid or other sample holder with epoxy or
other non water-soluble adhesive.

Note: For non-critical applications, Devcon 2-Ton Epoxy works well. For
applications where contamination control is more critical, use a more inert,
solvent-free epoxy like Master Bond EP21LV, EP21AR, or a hot melt adhesive.

3. Follow the manufacturer's directions for mixing and curing to obtain the best resistance to
leaching and chemical attack. For lower resolution applications where it is desirable to image
a sample quickly without waiting for an adhesive to cure, you can use double-sided tape as
long as fluid never touches the tape.

Note: Do not use cyanoacrylate glue (like Super Glue) for mounting samples in fluid.

154 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Precautions

10.4 Precautions

10.4.1 Spillage Precautions

Throughout all procedures outlined in the following sections, you will work with fluids on and
around the Dimension 3100 SPM. When handling fluids, keep a quantity of filter paper and/or
paper towels nearby for wicking away any spilled fluid. The Dimension head is designed to be
immersed in no more than 3mm of fluid when used with a protective skirt.

CAUTION: Users occasionally experience problems with moisture wicking up

through fluid cell seals. Users should avoid prolonged cell
immersion in fluids. Always remove the cell from the fluid, detach
it from the scanner, and dry thoroughly prior to storage. Any
moisture present on the end of the scanner must be dried
immediately to prevent shorting the piezo.

ATTENTION: A la suite de problemes occasionnels, certains utilisateurs ont

experimentes des fuites du joint de la cellule liquide. Il est donc
recommande d'eviter les immersions prolongees dans un liquide.
Une fois l'experience termine, veuillez enlever la cellule de la
solution, la retirer de la sonde de balayage piezo et la ranger apres
sechage. Afin d'eviter un endommagement du piezo, l'extremite de
la sonde de balayage piezo doit etre nettoyer et secher des que la
moindre trace d'humidite et/ou de moisissure apparaissent.

VORSICHT: Da es zu Problemen mit Flüssigkeit kommen kann, die durch die

Silikonabdichtung an der Meßzelle bis hinauf zum Scanner
wandert, beachten Sie bitte das Folgende:Es wird empfohlen, ein
längeres Verweilen des Meßkopfes (fluid-cell) in Flüssigkeit zu
vermeiden. Nach Abschluß der Messungen entfernen Sie bitte
immer die Meßzelle aus der Flüssigkeit, ziehen sie vom Scanner ab
und trocknen sie vorsichtig und gründlich bevor sie gelagert wird.
Jegliche Flüssigkeit am Ende des Scanners muß SOFORT entfernt
werden, um einem Kurzschluß des Piezos vorzubeugen.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 155

Fluid Imaging
Precautions

CAUTION: When imaging fluid samples, use extraordinary precautions against

spillage. Fluids must not be spilled on or around the sample stage,
electronics boxes, or other components containing electronic parts.

ATTENTION: Lors d’un travail en milieu liquide, prendre toute précaution pour
éviter des fuites. Les liquides ne doivent pas se répandre sur la
platine porte échantillons, le boîtier électronique ou toute autre
partie du microscope contenant de l’électronique.

VORSICHT: Falls Sie Proben in Flüssigkeiten abbilden, lassen Sie äußerste

Vorsicht walten, damit keine Flüssigkeit verspritzt wird.
Flüssigkeiten dürfen nicht auf die oder nahe der Probenhalterung,
der Elektronikbox oder anderen Komponenten, die elektronische
Bauteile enthalten, verspritzt werden.

CAUTION: Avoid spilling all corrosive fluids on exposed surfaces; otherwise,

damage may result. In the case of a spill, immediately clean and
dry all affected surfaces carefully.

ATTENTION: Eviter toute fuite de liquide corrosif sur les surfaces exposées. Le
non respect de cette recommandation peut entraîner des
dommages. En cas de fuite, nettoyer et sécher immédiatement les
surfaces touchées.

VORSICHT: Vermeiden Sie bitte, korrosive Flüssigkeiten auf freiliegende

Oberflächen zu verspritzen; andernfalls wären Beschädigungen die
Folge! Falls Sie Flüssigkeit verspritzt haben, säubern und trocknen
Sie alle betroffenen Flächen sorgfältig.

156 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

10.5 Operating Principles

10.5.1 Clean Fluid Cell and Protective Skirt

To reduce contamination problems and to obtain high quality images, clean the fluid cell and
protective skirt as follows:

1. When sample imaging is complete, carefully remove the protective skirt and fluid tip holder.

2. Place the fluid cell and protective skirt in warm, soapy water and place a few drops of liquid
dish soap on them.

3. Gently rub the fluid cell and protective skirt with a cotton swab or finger.

CAUTION: Avoid scratching the glass surface with abrasive material.

4. Using distilled water, rinse the fluid cell and protective skirt completely.

5. Using filtered, compressed air or dry nitrogen, blow dry the fluid cell until all moisture
evaporates to prevent the buildup of salts or other contaminants on the parts.

10.5.2 Select Mode of Operation

Select Microscope > Profile and choose the profile for either Contact Mode or TappingMode.
Click Load.

10.5.3 Load the Probe

The probe is held in a small pocket on the bottom side of the tip holder by a gold-plated stainless
steel wire. The cantilever installation fixture has three docking stations where different tip holders
may be mounted. Use the docking station that has a small wire between two of the sockets. The
steel wire is held against the cantilever substrate by a leaf spring mounted on the top of the tip
holder.

1. To mount a probe in the holder, turn the holder over so that the leaf spring and four sockets
are facing down and plug the holder onto the appropriate docking station of the cantilever
installation fixture.

2. Grip the tip holder by the edges and gently push down on the holder.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 157

Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

Note: When pushing down on the holder, the steel wire in the docking station will
press on the leaf spring to raise the gold-plated wire that will hold the probe in
the pocket.

3. With the gold wire raised, use tweezers to slide a probe under the wire and into the pocket.

4. Check that the cantilever substrate is set squarely against one side of the pocket and flush
against the back.

CAUTION: Avoid scratching the tip holder's glass surface with the tweezers or
the cantilever substrate, especially in the area under the cantilever
itself.

5. Gently lift the tip holder off the docking station.

Note: When removing the tip holder from the docking station, the leaf spring should
pull the gold wire tight against the cantilever substrate.

6. Check that the probe is held firmly by the wire.

10.5.4 Install the Fluid Tip Holder

1. Check that there is sufficient clearance between the bottom of the SPM head and the sample.

Note: The cantilever tip position extends roughly 1 mm further towards the sample
with the fluid cantilever holder over the standard air cantilever holder.

2. If the height of the SPM head needs adjustment, use one of the following methods: Focus
Surface, Motor > Step Motor, or Withdraw.

3. Gently unplug any cantilever holders attached to the base of the scanner.

Note: If necessary, lift the SPM head out of the dovetail to allow for easier access to
the base of the scanner.

4. Pull the cantilever holder straight off to prevent bending any of the pins on the cantilever
holder or scanner cap.

5. Fit the fluid cantilever holder onto the four pins of the scanner cap.

Note: The four sockets on the cantilever holder will only align with the pins on the
scanner cap when the cantilever tip points to the left of the microscope.

6. Set the head back into the dovetail and lock into place by releasing the knurled head clamp
screw, located at the upper-right of the Z-stage, until the thread is just loosened.

158 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

10.5.5 Install the Protective Skirt

The protective skirt is a rubber seal used to protect the SPM scanner tube from liquids. Install it by
sliding it over the fluid tip holder and onto the shoulder on the SPM tube. Make sure that the seal is
tight on both the tip holder and the SPM tube. See Figure 10.5a below for an illustration of the SPM
head and the fluid tip holder with the protective skirt installed.

Figure 10.5a Tip Holder Installed With Protective Skirt

Maximum Fluid Depth

7 mm protective skirt

sample

fluid tip holder

cantilever substrate

10.5.6 Align Laser

Use the technique for aligning the laser onto the cantilever discussed in Chapter 7 of this manual.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 159

Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

10.5.7 “False” Reflections

The cantilever substrate rests on a smooth, angled, glass surface. The laser reflects off the angled
glass surface resulting in a visible laser reflection on the laser viewing window on the microscope
head, even when the laser is not aimed at the cantilever (see Figure 10.5b). This reflection from the
glass surface does not affect the operation of the AFM, but it can be a source of confusion when
aligning the laser on the cantilever. Ignore this fainter reflection and look instead for the much
brighter reflection off the cantilever.

Figure 10.5b False Reflections from Fluid Tip Holder

false reflection
laser beam

laser reflects off glass

Once the fluid tip holder is plugged into the bottom of the AFM scanner, note the faint laser
reflection visible on the glass in the tip holder (in the laser viewing window).

Note: The SUM signal on the display monitor will typically show less than 1V when
the laser is not yet aligned on the cantilever. The SUM signal should rise above
1V when the laser is truly reflecting off the cantilever.

10.5.8 Load Sample

Prepare the Sample for Imaging

Set the sample on the microscope stage. For TappingMode in fluid, use a petri dish, or if the sample
is hydrophobic, image the surface within a drop of fluid.

Note: Immersed samples may tend to dry out during imaging due to evaporation;
therefore, keep a quantity of fluid nearby to periodically replenish lost fluid.

160 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

Remount the Dimension Head

With the sample prepared and positioned on the stage, slowly remount the Dimension head in its
dovetailed, vertical mount.

CAUTION: If the fluid level is too high, the end of the scanner tube may be
dunked too far into fluid. Do not allow this to happen. Permanent
damage to the scanner tube may occur.

ATTENTION: Si le niveau du liquide est trop important, l’extrémité des

céramiques piézo-électriques peut tremper dans le liquide. Ceci ne
doit jamais arriver. Ce cas de figure peut entraîner des dommages
définitifs sur les céramiques piézo-électriques.

VORSICHT: Falls der Flüssigkeitsspiegel zu hoch ist, könnte das Ende des
Scannerröhrchens in die Flüssigkeit eintauchen-dies darf auf
keinen Fall passieren. Es könnte sonst eine dauerhafte Schädigung
des Scannerröhrchens eintreten.

Ideally, the Dimension head should come to rest in its mount at a level where the tip is just above
the level of the fluid. If the head rests too low in its mount, use either of the following methods to
raise the mount:

• Raise the mount further by using the Motor > Step Motor > Tip Up command.

• Remove the head from its mount and lower the sample into the fluid level. Remount the
head.

Note: Because the tip is lowered through a fluid layer, the laser beam will refract
slightly requiring minor adjustments. Refer to Section 10.5.10 for more
information regarding aiming the laser through a fluid layer.

At this point, the fluid cell should be prepared for TappingMode imaging: the cantilever is aligned
with the laser, the sample is prepared and the tip is immersed in fluid and positioned one millimeter
above the sample surface. All that remains is to tune the cantilever.

Verify that the Microscope is Dry

Verify that all Dimension 3100 surfaces are free of spilled fluid. Wick away moisture and droplets
with filter paper.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 161

Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

10.5.9 Lower Probe into Fluid

Lower the head, allowing the fluid tip holder to enter the liquid. The fluid should form a meniscus
around the fluid tip holder (see Figure 10.3a).

Note: The laser sum signal must be greater than 0.5V to use the Z motor. It may be
necessary to use the detector mirror adjustment screws to roughly center the
reflected laser beam on the detector before using either the Focus Surface or
Stepper Motor commands.

Note: To prevent air bubbles, you may first place a drop of fluid on the probe.

10.5.10 Readjust Laser Alignment

Lowering the tip holder into fluid causes the laser spot to move towards the fixed end of the
cantilever by roughly 25µm. To compensate for this shift, proceed with the following:

1. Turn the right-rear laser aiming screw slightly counter-clockwise to move the laser spot back
to the free end of the cantilever.

2. Check that a bright reflected laser spot is still present on the laser viewing window.

Occasionally, air bubbles will become trapped near the cantilever and these may interfere with the
laser beam's optical path. If this occurs, it may be impossible to get a good reflection from the
cantilever after putting the tip holder into fluid. In this case, do the following:

3. Remove the SPM head from the dovetail.

4. Lightly rinse the tip holder with liquid.

5. Replace the SPM head.

10.5.11 Adjust Photodetector

Adjust Detector Offsets

Turn the detector mirror adjustment screws to center the laser spot on the laser detector as
described in Chapter 7.

Set several parameters:

• For Contact Mode: Vertical Deflection signal = roughly -1V, and Setpoint = 0V.
(These are typical starting parameters).

• For TappingMode: Vertical Deflection signal = 0V.

162 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

Note: The difference between the vertical deflection before engaging and the setpoint
is related to the amount of force that the cantilever probe tip applies to the
sample.

Note: Verify that there is not too large a difference between the setpoint and the
vertical deflection signal before engaging. Samples are typically softer in liquid
than in air. It may be desirable to reduce the setpoint once engaged to obtain the
minimum tracking force.

Adjust Photodetector

1. Adjust the photodetector so that the red dot moves toward the center of the laser alignment
window using the two photodetector adjustment knobs located on the side of the Dimension
head.

2. Set the Vertical deflection to 0.

3. Verify that the red dot is centered and elliptical in shape in the laser alignment window.

10.5.12 Locate Tip

1. Using the mouse, select Locate Tip from under the Stage pop-down menu or click the
Locate Tip icon.

2. Center the tip on the cantilever under the cross hairs using the two adjustment screws located
to the left of the optical objective on the microscope.

3. Focus on the tip end of the cantilever using the trackball while holding the bottom left button.

Note: See Chapter 7 for more detailed instructions for locating the tip.

10.5.13 Focus Surface

When focusing on the sample surface in air before adding fluid to the sample area, the following
procedure is necessary:

1. Align laser

2. Locate tip

3. Focus surface

4. Add fluid

5. Readjust laser alignment

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 163

Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

6. Adjust laser alignment in photodetector

Fluid changes the optical path length as the angle of refraction changes, therefore, you must offset
the focus position in Focus Surface by 300µm to a point below the surface when focusing in fluid.

Note: For example, if the surface is in focus with the Z motor positioned at -5000µm,
you must move the Z motor position down until it is at -5300µm.

When focusing on the sample surface directly in fluid, the following procedure is necessary:

a. Align laser (in air)

b. Locate tip (in fluid)

c. Focus surface (hit engage several times)

OR

d. Focus surface (beyond surface by another 300µm)

e. Realign laser

f. Realign laser in photodetector

164 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

Focus Surface Procedure

1. Use the Stage > Focus Surface command to bring the sample into focus on the video camera
monitor, as described in Chapter 7.

2. Move the X-Y sample stage to bring an area of interest under the AFM cantilever tip.

CAUTION: Use extreme caution moving the X-Y stage if the sample holder
has a lip that extends above the sample surface (i.e. petri dish). The
SPM head can be destroyed if the sample stage is moved such that
the tip holder crashes sideways into the lip of your sample holder.
Also, check that the position of the lip of the sample holder will not
interfere with the movement of the Z-stage.

ATTENTION: Il est recommandé de déplacer avec une extréme vigilance la

platine quand le support d’échantillon présente un rebord qui se
trouve à une hauteur supérieure à mesurer (comme une boîte de
Petri). La tête de mesure peut être endommagée si le support de
pointe vient heurter le rebord du support d’échantillon lors d’un
déplacement de la platine. De plus, il est impératif de vérifier que
le rebord du support d’échantillon ne viendra pas perturber le
mouvement vertical du moteur de la tête de mesure.

VORSICHT: Seien Sie extrem vorsichtig mit XY-Bewegungen des

Probentisches, wenn der Rand Ihrer Probenbefestigung über die
Probenfläche hinausragt (wie zum Beispiel bei einer Petrischale).
Der SPM-Kopf kann zerstört werden, falls der Probentisch derart
bewegt wird, daß der Spitzenhalter seitlich gegen den Rand der
Probenbefestigung schlägt. Versichern Sie sich außerdem, daß der
Rand Ihrer Probenbefestigung bei Bewegung der Z-
Verschiebeeinheit nicht im Weg ist.

10.5.14 Cantilever Tune (TappingMode Only)

This section describes the steps required to find the resonance peak of the cantilever and adjust the
oscillation voltage so the cantilever vibrates at an appropriate amplitude. A range of oscillation
frequencies are applied to the cantilever to determine the frequency which produces the largest
response (the resonance frequency). In most instances, the resonance peak has a sharp Gaussian
distribution but at times the peak can be ragged. The system tolerates some deviation in the shape of
the peak.

Manual Cantilever Tune is the counterpart to the step used in standard (air) TappingMode to find
the resonant frequency of the cantilever. In liquid, however, the cantilever resonance is largely

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 165

Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

damped. Instead, this step is used to find an oscillating frequency specific to the fluid and cantilever
holder where the cantilever can be driven into oscillation.

Enter the View > Sweep > Cantilever Tune menu to select a drive frequency. The optimal drive
frequency can depend upon sample, fluid and fluid volume inside the fluid cell. Experiment to find
the best drive frequency for specific imaging conditions. Two frequency ranges that are commonly
used are 16-19kHz and 8-12kHz; higher frequencies have also been used. Start with a Sweep width
of 20kHz. Users of TappingMode in air will notice that their is not a single well-defined resonance,
but instead a large number of broad peaks. The peaks are resonances of the fluid cell and fluid, and
do not usually depend so much on the cantilever dimensions.

A typical Cantilever Tune screen is shown in Figure 10.5c. It is necessary to select a frequency
where there is some cantilever response, (i.e., near a peak), but experience suggests that it is best to
avoid the tops and sides of extremely sharp peaks. The best frequencies appear to be on the side of
a peak or in a shallow valley between peaks. Figure 10.5c shows a typical operating frequency that
produces good fluid tapping images.

Figure 10.5c Typical Cantilever Tune Curve for Silicon Nitride Tip in Fluid

038

1. In the Feedback Controls panel, set Z Modulation to Enabled.

2. Select View > Sweep > Cantilever Tune, or click on the Cantilever Tune icon. The
initial Cantilever Tune panel appears with the Frequency Sweep (a plot of cantilever
response as a function of applied oscillation frequency) on the display monitor.

3. In the Cantilever Tune panel, set the Drive frequency parameter to 10kHz and the Sweep
width parameter to 20kHz.

4. Set the Drive amplitude to 200mV.

5. Zero the Amplitude setpoint.

6. Set the Amplitude limit to 2.5V.

166 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

7. Center the peak on the frequency sweep plot shown on the display monitor using the Zoom
In and Offset commands after identifying the maximum amplitude peak with the lowest
frequency in the frequency response plot. This peak is usually in the 8-12kHz range.

Note: The Offset command sets the center frequency equal to the cursor position to
shift the plot. The Zoom In command decreases the sweep width and shifts the
center frequency value to stretch the plot.

8. Increase the Drive Amplitude until the peak appears.

9. Continue to Zoom In and center the peak until the peak coincides with the vertical center
line within 10Hz. The value displayed for center frequency is now used as the resonant
frequency of the cantilever.

Note: The system works well in TappingMode if the center frequency is at, or below,
the peak in the resonance plot. The center frequency can decrease to the point
where the oscillation amplitude reaches 90 percent of the maximum value.
Operate at a frequency lower than the resonant frequency to avoid shifting the
resonant frequency upon approach of the tip to the surface (see Figure 10.5e).

Figure 10.5d Cantilever Tune Control Panels for Main Controls

024

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 167

Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

10. Adjust the Drive amplitude until obtaining an RMS Amplitude of 0.3 - 0.6V. This value
has produced good results for protein samples like RNA polymerase and lysozyme.

Note: In general, larger RMS amplitudes (approximately 2V) work better for taller
samples such as cells.

Figure 10.5e Cantilever Tune Frequency Sweep

Frequency Sweep

Cantilever
Response
0.25 V/div

Setpoint

Center Frequency — 18.44 KHz

0.50 KHz/div

11. Click OK. The parameters set in the Cantilever Tune control panel appear in the Realtime
control panel.

12. Click on CANCEL to exit the Cantilever Tune command and leave the parameters
unchanged.

168 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

10.5.15 Show All Items

Before changing any parameters, you should display all of the available parameters. If you cannot
view a parameter in a panel, you might need to enable this parameter.

1. Click the “minus box” in the upper left corner of the panel, and click Show all items.

Figure 10.5f Select Show All Items

a.Click here
b.Select this

045
2. Ensure there is a “X” in the check box to the left of all parameters.

Note: Those parameters without a X will not display in normal Realtime mode.

Figure 10.5g Enable Parameters

With “X”
Parameter
will display

Without “X”
Parameter will
not display
044

3. Click the “minus box” in the upper left corner of the panel, and click Show all items.
The panel will once again appear in normal Realtime mode.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 169

Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

10.5.16 Set Initial Scan Parameters

Scan Controls Panel

In the Scan Controls panel, set the following initial scan parameters (see Figure 10.5h)

1. Set the Scan Rate to 2Hz.

2. Set the Scan Size to 1µm.

3. Set the Scan Angle to 0.

4. Set X and Y Offsets to 0.

Figure 10.5h Suggested Scan Controls Settings during TappingMode

023

Feedback Controls Panel

1. For TappingMode, set the Integral gain to 0.5 and the Proportional gain to 0.7. For
Contact Mode, set the Integral gain to 2.0 and the Proportional gain to 3.0.

2. Set the Look Ahead gain to zero.

3. For Contact Mode, in the Feedback Controls panel set the Deflection Setpoint to 0V. It is
not necessary to enter a value for Amplitude Setpoint for TappingMode because this value is
automatically determined during the engage process.

170 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

10.5.17 Engage

1. Select Motor > Engage. A pre-engage check begins, followed by Z-stage motor motion.

2. To move to another area of the sample, execute a Withdraw command to avoid damaging
the tip and scanner.

3. Select Stage > Focus Surface and move the stage using the trackball.

Note: After the tip is engaged, adjust the control panel values to provide the desired
scan parameters.

10.5.18 Adjust Scan Parameters

Once engaged, the scan parameters should be adjusted to obtain the best image. Set the Slow scan
axis to Disabled and select View > Scope Mode. Observe the agreement between the trace and
retrace lines into, and adjust the Setpoint, Gains and Scan rate to bring the trace and retrace lines
in to coincidence. This procedure will be similar to operation in air, with the following exceptions:

• Samples are generally softer in fluids. Adjusting the applied forces becomes more
critical.

• Scan rates tend to be slower in fluid.

Adjusting Setpoint

Contact Mode

1. Adjust the Setpoint to as low a value as possible using the cursor keys until the cantilever
pulls off the surface (and the Z-center voltage jumps to -220V).

2. Increase the Setpoint slightly until the cantilever begins to touch the surface again and an
image appears. Or, use the Force Calibration command to select the Setpoint and estimate
the contact force, as described in Chapter 17.

Note: The cantilever will typically adhere to the sample surface much less in fluid;
therefore, it is often possible to image at much smaller contact forces in liquid
than in air.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 171

Fluid Imaging
Operating Principles

TappingMode

Usually the best images are obtained at setpoints 5-10 percent less than the cantilever RMS
amplitude before engaging. The setpoint may be optimized in one of two ways:

• Use the Force Calibration Command: The Force Calibration command plots the
cantilever amplitude versus the scanner position. A typical Force Calibration is shown in
Figure 10.5c. The curve should show a mostly flat region where the cantilever has not
yet reached the surface and a sloped region where the amplitude is being reduced by the
tapping interaction. Set up the Force Calibration as described for TappingMode in air
(see Section 13.5). (Experienced users may use the Force Step command instead). To
protect the tip and sample, take care that the cantilever amplitude is never reduced to
zero. Adjust the setpoint until the green “setpoint line” on the graph is just barely below
the flat region of the Force Calibration curve. This is the setpoint that applies the lowest
force to the sample.

Note: The slope of the Force Calibration curve shows the sensitivity of the fluid
TappingMode measurement. In general higher sensitivities will give better
image quality. If the sensitivity is very poor, consider changing to a different
drive frequency or check the mounting of the sample and fluid cell.

• Optimize the Image Quality: The Setpoint can also be adjusted by simply monitoring
the image quality.

• Select a Scan size of 500nm.

• Increase the Setpoint in small increments until the cantilever pulls off the surface
and the Z center voltage is at -220V.

• Reduce the Setpoint in small increments until an image appears. Continue reducing
the Setpoint until the image is optimized. Usually the best images are obtained at
setpoints just below where an image appears.

When operating in TappingMode, it may be necessary to check the cantilever tuning after the
system is engaged. To check the cantilever tuning:

1. Select View > Sweep > Cantilever Tune.

2. Set the Tip Offset to 200nm and click OK.

3. Once in the cantilever tuning window, adjust drive frequency and drive amplitude if
necessary.

10.5.19 Clean Cell and Protective Skirt

When you are finished scanning, remove and clean the fluid probe holder and protective skirt,
following the procedure described in Section 10.5.1. In the Feedback Panel, set Z Modulation to
Disabled.

172 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Fluid Imaging
Troubleshooting

10.6 Troubleshooting

10.6.1 Cantilever Tune Plot Looks Poor

Become familiar with the characteristics of the Cantilever Tune plot when you successfully obtain
good images. You may use the Cantilever Tune plot as a diagnostic tool. If the plot looks
substantially different from previous successful experiments, there may be a problem with the fluid
cell or the cantilever may be loose in its holder. Ensure there is good physical coupling between the
probe and the fluid cell, and that the laser is positioned correctly at the free end of the cantilever.

10.6.2 Laser Sum Signal Absent or Weak

Remove all air bubbles from the cantilever. Bubbles may attach themselves to the cantilever,
causing the laser beam to diffract. Remove bubbles by gently squirting the tip and sample with a
stream of fluid, taking care not to squirt or splash fluid into spaces above the protective skirt.

10.6.3 Poor Image Quality

Some types of samples may adhere to the cantilever and tip (e.g., certain proteins). If you suspect
tip contamination, you must protect the tip against contamination using either of the following
methods:

• If the tip adheres to a sample surface through diffusion (e.g., diffusion of protein onto
mica), first diffuse the sample substance into the substrate, then flush away stray
substance using a straight fluid media. Lower the tip into a fluid containing little or no
stray substances that may adhere to the tip.

• If the sample is short-lived and must be imaged quickly, mask the tip against
contamination by bringing the tip into gentle contact with an uncontaminated substrate
surface. Set the Dimension 3100 in Contact Mode by switching the AFM mode
parameter on the Other Controls panel to Contact. Engage the substrate surface using
a zero scan size. While keeping the tip gently in contact with the substrate surface, add
the sample substance to be imaged to the petri dish and allow the sample substance to
settle onto the substrate. Once diffusion is reached, quickly lift the tip from the substrate
surface. Switch to TappingMode and image the sample.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 173

Fluid Imaging
Troubleshooting

10.6.4 Unable to Locate Particulate Samples

Some particulate samples (i.e., proteins) may prove difficult to find directly beneath a cantilever if
the cantilever remains stationary during a diffusion or settling period. This may be due to the fact
that some types of particulates are more attracted to the cantilever than to the substrate intended to
support them. The result is a “shadow” on the substrate directly beneath the cantilever where fewer
sample individuals are located; they are stuck to the cantilever. If you suspect this problem, simply
shift the imaging site to a location outboard of the tip and cantilever. You should find more
individual samples there.

174 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 11 Scanning Tunneling
Microscopy (STM)

This chapter includes the following sections:

• Introduction: Section 11.1

• Overview of STM: Section 11.1.1

• Basic STM Operation: Section 11.2

• Imaging Samples: Section 11.2.1

• STM-Specific Information and Operations: Section 11.3

• STM Hardware: Section 11.3.1

• Fine Points of STM Operation: Section 11.3.2

• STM Operating Modes: Section 11.3.3

• STM-Specific Menu Parameters: Section 11.3.4

• Spectroscopy with the STM: Section 11.4

• Operation of STS: Section 11.4.1

• Troubleshooting Operation of STM: Section 11.5

• Head and Microscope-Related Problems: Section 11.5.1

• Head Engages Immediately: Section 11.5.2

• Etching Tungsten Tips: Section 11.6

• Procedure: Section 11.6.1

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 175

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Introduction

11.1 Introduction
STM relies on “tunneling current” between the probe and the sample to sense the topography of the
sample. The STM probe, a sharp metal tip (in the best case, atomically sharp), is positioned a few
atomic diameters above a conducting sample which is electrically biased with respect to the tip. At
a distance under 1 nanometer (0.001µm), a tunneling current will flow from sample to tip. In
operation, the bias voltages typically range from 10 to 1000mV while the tunneling currents vary
from 0.2 to 10nA. The tunneling current changes exponentially with the tip-sample separation,
typically decreasing by a factor of 2 as the separation is increased by 0.2nm. The exponential
relationship between the tip separation and the tunneling current makes the tunneling current an
excellent parameter for sensing the tip-to-sample separation. In essence, a reproduction of the
sample surface is produced by scanning the tip over the sample surface and sensing the tunneling
current.

11.1.1 Overview of STM

The STM option is generally employed under the following conditions:

• For samples having deeply relieved features, where AFM probes may not be able to
penetrate, and/or where feature verticality is very close to 90 degrees.

• On polished samples, where it is necessary to image different layers having similar

topography but different electrical conductivities.

• Under conditions where contact with the sample surface is prohibited.

STM relies on a precise scanning technique to produce very high-resolution, three-dimensional

images of sample surfaces. The STM scans the tip over the sample surface in a raster pattern while
sensing and outputting the tunneling current to the NanoScope control station. The digital signal
processor (DSP) in the workstation controls the Z position of the piezo based on the tunneling
current error signal. The STM operates in both the “constant height” and “constant current” data
modes, depending on a parameter selection in the STM Control Panel. The DSP always adjusts the
height of the tip based on the tunneling current error signal, but if the feedback gains are low, the
piezo remains at a nearly “constant height” and tunneling current data is collected. With the gains
high, the piezo height changes to keep the tunneling current nearly constant, and the change in
piezo height is collected by the system. The exponential relationship between the tip separation and
the tunneling current allows the tip height to be controlled very well. For example, if the tunneling
current stays within 20 percent of the setpoint value (the current to be maintained by the feedback
system), the variation in the tip-sample separation is less than 0.02nm.

The STM tip is held using a dedicated STM tip holder which plugs into the end of the Dimension
head’s tube (see Figure 11.1a).

176 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Basic STM Operation

Figure 11.1a Dimension Tip Holder and Head Connection

SIDE VIEW

(tip installed)

Op Amp
STM Metal Tip

Tip Holding Tube

BOTTOM VIEW

Electrical Mounting
Sockets (4)

11.2 Basic STM Operation

11.2.1 Imaging Samples

This section explains how to use the NanoScope to image the 10µm, silicon standard supplied with
the system.

1. Select the STM option— Click the left mouse button with the cursor on the Realtime icon in
the menu bar to select the Realtime operating mode. Pull down the Microscope menu by
clicking on the Microscope item in the menu bar, click on the Select command, then click on
STM and OK to place the microscope into STM mode.

2. Insert a new tip in the tip-holding tube mounted on the STM tip holder. The tips come in a
small, plastic snap-box filled with black foam. Grip the tip with tweezers near the sharp end,
then insert the blunt end of the tip into the tip-holder. For the tip to be held in the tube, it is
necessary to put a small bend in the tip before it is completely inserted. The tip should be
inserted so that it protrudes about 2mm beyond the end of the head and should be fairly tight
in the tip-holder. The business end of the tip must project beyond the bottom profile of the tip
holder’s preamp chip; otherwise, the chip will bottom out on the sample surface before the
tip engages.

3. Load the calibration standard (sample) onto the stage using a magnetic puck. Ensure that the
standard is in electrical contact with the stage surface. This usually necessitates using an
electrically conductive epoxy (silver-based) to affix the sample to the surface of the puck
(e.g., Dynaloy 325).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 177

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Basic STM Operation

4. Plug the loaded tip holder into the end of the Dimension head, then mount the head into the
dovetail slot. Select Stage > Locate Tip to find the end of the STM probe—it will resemble
a metallic bee stinger. Once the tip has been located, proceed with using the Stage > Focus
Surface controls to position the sample beneath the probe.

Note: Using the microscope’s optical system, the tip will be difficult or impossible to
view if it is not located over a very reflective surface. Usually, the stage surface
is sufficiently reflective to accomplish this; however, most polished, silicon
wafers will work just as well. If the sample is dark in appearance, it may be
necessary to load it onto the stage AFTER the tip has been located using a
reflective background.

5. Set the Scan Controls panel parameters to the values shown below:
Scan Controls
Scan size: 90.0 µm

X offset: 0.00 nm

Y offset: 0.00 nm

Scan angle: 0.00 deg

Scan rate: 2.44 Hz

Number of samples: 256

Slow scan axis: Enabled

Z limit: 440 V

6. Engage the sample surface using the Motor > Engage option. The display monitor should
render an image of the sample surface immediately. Depending on the condition of the tip,
the image on the screen will be either clear or noisy. The status bar on the control monitor
shows how many microns the tip has traveled. When the tip engages with the surface and
tunneling occurs, the computer will beep and an Engaged message will appear in the status
bar.

7. Click on a scan parameter and drag the mouse to change the parameter. Lower the Integral
gain and Proportional gain (Feedback Controls panel) near zero and vary the Bias voltage
to see how the image changes. Vary the Scan size to observe how the image can be
magnified, then vary the X offset and Y offset to see how the image can be moved. Transfer
to the Channel panels, and instead of displaying an image using Height data, select Current
at the Data type field to observe image changes.

Note: Generally, the Data type field is set to Height whenever the Dimension is used
in STM mode to image sample surfaces with large fields of view. The Current
setting is usually selected for imaging atomic features—a more difficult feat for
the Dimension-series microscopes due to their much larger stages and frames.
Customers desiring to image atomic features should use Veeco’s dedicated
STM microscope, which is equipped with a much smaller, more rigid frame.
For more information, contact Veeco.

178 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Basic STM Operation

Click on the Scope Mode command in the View menu to see what the signal looks like for each
trace across the sample. Return to the Image Mode by clicking on the Image Mode command.

Note: A poor tip, either because it has touched the sample, has contamination on the
end, or because of its manufacturing, will render a poor image. In this case,
there is little likelihood that the tip will recover, and the best procedure is to
replace the tip. Pull down the Motor menu by clicking on Motor in the menu
bar, then click on Withdraw to stop scanning, and retract the probe from the
surface. After the tip is withdrawn, the “Secured” message will appear in the
status bar of the control monitor. To simplify tip holder removal, position the
stage so that it is no longer beneath the head; the tip holder may be pulled
straight off without the need to remove the entire head. Be certain there is
sufficient clearance between tip and sample after installing the new tip—a new
tip will extend a different distance out of the tip holder than the old tip.

The nominal Z position of the piezo provides useful diagnostic information. The bar graph to the
right of the image on the display monitor reflects the Z position of the piezo during the scan. Under
most circumstances, the “Z center position” should be in the center of the graph, indicating that the
Z voltage for the piezo is fluctuating around zero volts. If the sample is not level, or if there is drift
in the mechanical system after the tip has engaged, the “Z center position” will fluctuate during the
scan or drift off-scale.

To Improve Image Quality...

• Vary the Scan size and the X offset and Y offset. Move to a new location on the sample
by changing the X offset and/or Y offset of the scan. The X and Y offset parameters
define the center of the scan. Often, a better image can be obtained on a different portion
of the sample. The X and Y offsets can be changed by altering the values in the control
panel, or by using the Offset command in the menu bar on the display monitor.

• Oscillate the tip by briefly setting the Integral gain up to about 500. The oscillation will
show up on the display as a grainy pattern of light and dark. Set the Integral gain back
down after about a second and check if the signal is quieter than before. Setting the
Integral gain high for a brief period is also useful for cleaning debris from the tip.

• Alternate the commands Withdraw and Engage a couple of times. This raises and
lowers the tip and may get rid of contamination on the end of the tip.

• Use the Step Motor command to single-step the tip down a step or two. Be sure to
minimize the SPM step size before stepping the motor down. Watch the Z Center
Position scale on the display monitor to verify that the piezo has sufficient room to
retract so the tip will not harm the surface of the sample. Stepping the tip down until the
Z Center Position goes to the retracted end of the scale where the indicator turns red
will usually destroy the tip.

• Vary the Setpoint current over the range 2 to 10nA. As a last resort, current may be
increased up to 48nA for a very brief period of time.

• If none of the above procedures improves the quality of the signal, replace the tip and try
again. If that doesn't work, call Veeco for technical assistance.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 179

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
STM-Specific Information and Operations

8. After a clean image has been obtained, it can be saved onto disk with the Capture command
in the Capture menu (or click on the Capture icon). The Capture command saves the
current scan image (or the next image if any changes have been made in the STM control
panel) into the Capture directory. The Capture Filename command can be used to define a
custom filename or the captured file will be named with the concatenation of a date/time
stamp. In either case, a three-digit suffix which incrementally increases after each capture
operation is appended to the filename. If the date/time stamp is used, a file captured at 3:32
p.m. on July 31 would be assigned the file name 07311532.001. A second file captured the
same minute would be named 07311532.002.

9. Some simple filtering operations can improve the look of the captured image. Enter the
Offline mode and select the image to work on by clicking on it in the file list. There are a
number of image processing options available in the Modify menu. Click on Modify in the
menu bar to display the menu. The simplest way to remove high frequency noise is with the
lowpass filter.

Pull-down the Modify menu and click on the Lowpass command to apply the lowpass filter to the
image and redraw it on the display monitor. Successive Re-execute clicks will continue to filter and
redraw the image. The entire filtering operation can be undone with the Undo command, the
filtered image can be saved, or the Quit command will return the system to the Modify menu.
There is also the option of changing the display with the Color table, Color contrast, or Color
offset parameters.

Note: The Z range parameter will have no effect if the Plot type parameter in the
Top View menu is set to Equal area.

11.3 STM-Specific Information and Operations

The NanoScope STM is a digitally-controlled instrument capable of producing high resolution,
three-dimensional images. The sample is held in position while a piezoelectric crystal in the form
of a cylindrical tube scans the sharp metallic probe over the surface in a raster pattern. The digital
signal processor (DSP) calculates the desired separation of the tip from the sample by sensing the
tunneling current flowing between the sample and the tip. The bias voltage applied to the sample
encourages the tunneling current to flow. The DSP completes the digital feedback loop by
outputting the desired voltage to the piezoelectric tube. The NanoScope STM can be operated in
two modes. In one case the feedback gains are set high, the tunneling tip closely tracks the sample
surface, and the variation in the tip height required to maintain constant tunneling current is
measured by the change in the voltage applied to the piezo tube. In the other case, the feedback
gains are set low, the tip remains at a nearly constant height as it sweeps over the sample surface,
and the tunneling current is imaged. This section provides greater insight into the operation of the
STM.

180 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
STM-Specific Information and Operations

11.3.1 STM Hardware

Some individual STM components are described below:

1. Tip holder—To keep the mass on the end of the tube low, a simple tip holder, designed to
take 0.010" diameter tips, is used. The holder is a stainless steel tube with a 0.012" inner
diameter mounted in ceramic. This design mounts the tip at the center of the piezo tube on a
ceramic support element. This design preserves the symmetry of the scan, although it makes
it difficult to see the tip-sample interface. This design is used on all large-range, “G” and “J”:
scanners.

2. Tips— The probes for the NanoScope STM must be less than 0.012" in diameter to fit into
the tip holder. The two most commonly used tips are made from either a platinum iridium
(PtIr alloy or tungsten. The PtIr tips are mechanically formed and can be purchased directly
from Veeco. At the end of this chapter, instructions are provided on how to etch tungsten tips
from tungsten wire with an electrochemical process. In general, PtIr tips provide better
atomic resolution than tungsten tips, but tungsten tips are more uniformly shaped. They may
perform better on samples with steeply sloped features such as compact or optical disks.

3. Preamp—Mounted on the tip holder is a circuit which contains the preamplifier for the
tunneling current and provides interconnections to the tube electrodes. A schematic for this
preamp is at the end of this section.

The preamplifier is an FET input amplifier with an input bias current of 25 picoamps, small,
compared to the nanoamps or fractions of nanoamps which are being measured. The preamp is
configured such that the tunneling tip is connected through a 1 megohm resistor to ground. The tip
is also connected to the input of the amplifier which is wired as a x100 non-inverting amplifier with
a cutoff frequency of 15KHz. The transimpedance gain of the input resistor/preamp combination is
100mV/nA with an input range from 0 to 100nA. The noise of the preamp is essentially the Johnson
noise in the 1 megohm resistor and the standard filtering is 2mV rms, equivalent to an input
tunneling current of 0.02nA rms.

A disadvantage of this amplifier configuration is that there is a voltage drop across the 1 megohm
resistor which raises the voltage of the tip above ground, reducing the effective bias voltage. The
actual bias voltage is equal to:

Vsample = Vbias - Itunneling x Rinput

This effect is accounted for in the NanoScope software so the actual bias voltage between the tip
and the sample agrees with the menu value.

Special low-noise preamps have been developed for spectroscopic functions. The preamps which
are included on scan heads designated as either AI or Veeco, have no voltage drop due to the
tunneling current.

Scanning heads with four maximum scan ranges are available for NanoScope. The “G” scanner-
based, Dimension heads is designed for a nominal 90µm scan size.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 181

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
STM-Specific Information and Operations

11.3.2 Fine Points of STM Operation

Getting the best images on NanoScope requires a good interface between sample and tip,
reasonable vibration isolation, and proper settings in the Computer Workstation menus. This
section provides greater detail on the operation of the STM.

11.3.3 STM Operating Modes

The two operating modes available on the NanoScope STM are selected with the Data type option
in the Channel panel (see Figure 11.3a). Height data reflects the change in tip position required to
maintain a constant tunneling current. The DSP senses the tunneling current, calculates the
difference from the desired tunneling current, and determines the voltage that must be applied to
the piezo tube to keep the tunneling current constant. Due to the known characteristics of the
piezoelectric material, the change in voltage applied to the piezo tube translates directly to a change
in distance. This distance data is recorded throughout the scan and displayed on the screen as the
“height” of the sample.

Figure 11.3a Typical STM Channel 1 Control Panel Parameters

Channel 1
Data type: Height
Z range: 30 nm
Line direction: Retrace
Scan line: Main
Realtime Planefit: Main
Offline Planefit: Main

Highpass filter: Off

Lowpass filter: Off

Current data is a measure of the tunneling current at each point tested on the sample. The DSP
measures the voltage drop across a resistor in series with the tip and calculates the tunneling current
as the tip scans the surface of the sample. The tunneling current at each data point is recorded and
displayed on the screen.

The two scan modes (height and current) require subtle changes in the menu parameters to operate
effectively. The parameter changes also affect the application of the two modes. To operate
effectively in collecting height data, the tip must closely track the sample surface. The gains must
be maximized to force the piezo to respond quickly to the variations in the sample surface. The
height mode is used for most applications. Conversely, the gains must be very low to keep the piezo
from responding while collecting current data. After engaging, the tip scans the surface of the
sample with very little variation in the piezo height. This constant height provides a reference from
which to measure and record the fluctuations in the tunneling current. The current mode is most
useful for imaging atoms with relatively small scan sizes.

182 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
STM-Specific Information and Operations

11.3.4 STM-Specific Menu Parameters

In addition to the Data type discussed above, the STM control panels contain three items that are
specific to the operation of the scanning tunneling microscope. The Feedback type, Bias, and
Setpoint parameters pertain exclusively to the control of the STM.

The Feedback type parameters in the Other Controls panel determine the transformation
performed on the tunneling current prior to the feedback calculations. The three settings select
Linear, Log, or Boost operations. Remember that tip-to-sample separation is proportional to the
log of the tunneling current. The Linear selection causes the error signal for the feedback loop to
be the difference between the instantaneous tunneling current and the setpoint current. The Log and
Boost selections calculate the error signal as the difference between the log of the instantaneous
tunneling current and the log of the setpoint current. The Boost mode performs additional
operations to optimize the feedback performance for high scan rates over rough surfaces.

The Bias parameter controls the magnitude and sign of the bias voltage applied between the tip and
the sample. A bias voltage encourages the tunneling current to flow. Although settings of 20 to 100
mV are typical for conductive samples, the allowable setting ranges from -10 to 10 volts. Positive
settings of the bias voltage induce negative tunneling currents (i.e. electrons flowing from the tip to
the sample).

Optimization of STM Scanning Parameters

The process of selecting and optimizing the scan parameters can be streamlined. In most cases the
scan parameters are dictated by the sample. The Data type is usually the first parameter set and the
Proportional and Integral gains are directly related to the Data type. The Scan size depends on
the sample and the features of interest. The maximum Scan rate is usually related to the Scan size.
The Bias voltage and the tunneling current Setpoint depend on the sample. Usually, they are set at
a standard value for engagement and fine-tuned along with the gains and filter to enhance the
quality of the image.

As discussed above, a Data type of Current is the best for atomic-scale images. This mode is not
practical for rough surfaces, because the tip will crash into the surface at low feedback gains. The
Height Data type is usually better for all but atomic-scale scans. In general, height data images are
best at higher feedback gains and slower scan rates.

Settings for feedback gains depend on many factors, but perhaps the most important is the Data
type. If the Data type is set to Current, the Integral and Proportional gains should be set as close
to zero as possible. The LookAhead gain adds information from the previous scan line into the
feedback calculation so it is most useful for samples with long vertical features. The gains should
be lowered for data captured using the linear Feedback type, especially with high Setpoint current
levels. Large-scale images should be taken at increased gain, except for the LookAhead gain,
which is best kept to low values. Experimentation may yield other values for your samples.

Often the best way to set the gains for the Height Data type is to view the Realtime scan in the
Scope Mode with the Y scan disabled. This allows the feedback to be tuned while looking at a
single scan line of data. First, increase the Integral gain until oscillations start to appear, and then,
back off a little. Next, adjust the Proportional and LookAhead gains. High frequency fuzz will
appear on the signal when the Proportional gain is set too high. Setting the LookAhead gain too

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 183

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
STM-Specific Information and Operations

high will cause oscillations in the scope image and ripples on top view images. Setting the
LookAhead gain even higher will cause the feedback loop to become unstable. The Setpoint
current and the Bias voltage can also be adjusted using the Scope display.

Bias voltages below 20mV usually provide the best quality images on samples with surface
conductivities equal to or better than graphite, but there are exceptions. Resistivity across the
surface of a sample can be measured with an ohmmeter. For samples with high resistivity (greater
than 1 megohm/cm), bias voltages of 100mV or even higher may work best. For scans larger than
0.5µm, it is sometimes better to increase the bias voltage by 50mV to 100mV over the value for
smaller scans. A higher bias keeps the tip further from the surface, giving the feedback loop greater
tolerance in tracking the surface at high speeds.

Increasing the Setpoint current can also be helpful for larger scans. This has the effect of raising
the gain, but also brings the tip closer to the surface by a small amount. High setpoint currents of 6
nanoamps or more can also be useful in improving the signal-to-noise ratio for atomic images on
some materials.

The Feedback type can be set to either Log, Boost, or Linear input transformations. Because the
tip-to-sample separation is proportional to the log of the tunneling current, the transformation
performed on the tunneling current prior to the feedback calculation can have dramatic effects on
the performance of the feedback loop. Linear input is more protective of the tip, because the
feedback error signal responds exponentially to tip-sample separation. When the tip-to-sample
separation decreases, the error signal rises exponentially, quickly driving the tip away. However, the
error signal is unsymmetrical. The same sample-to-tip separation change that caused the tip to
move away so quickly will generate a small error signal when the tip is higher than it is supposed to
be. This unsymmetrical response in the Linear mode will distort data. For this reason, the Boost
and Log modes (with ln(I) used in the feedback calculation) are preferable for most samples,
because they respond in a more symmetrical fashion to positive and negative sample slopes. The
Boost mode is preferable for large scans with high vertical features such as compact disc stampers
or integrated circuits. The proportional and integral gain can be reduced greatly when the Boost
mode is used. The log input has the advantage of having a gain which is insensitive to the value of
the Setpoint current.

Large scans cannot be taken at the same scan rate as small scans. When using the large scan heads
with scans above a few microns, the Scan rate should be lowered below 10Hz. Best results can be
obtained at scan rates of 1 Hz or less, although image-taking is slow. At these scan rates, the 128 x
128 and 256 x 256 data formats are most useful, quadrupling and doubling the frame rate over the
512 x 512 format for a given scan rate. To be sure that there is no image degradation due to too high
of a scan rate, lower the rate and check for changes in the image. Check the Scope Mode view to
ensure that the scan is not slew-rate limited in Z, as evidenced by an artificial “sawtooth”
appearance in the scope trace.

The Filter parameter (if available) provides the option of filtering the tunneling current signal. A
lowpass filter with a cut-off frequency of 25KHz can be applied to the analog tunneling signal in
hardware. Typically, the filter is selected for atomic-scale images; otherwise, no filtering should be
selected.

184 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
STM-Specific Information and Operations

Tunneling Tips

Although the microscope will accept any 0.010" diameter tip, tips made of platinum iridium (PtIr)
and tungsten are used most often. PtIr tips are supplied by Veeco while tungsten tips can be
electrochemically etched from tungsten wire by following instructions at the end of this chapter. In
general, most of the discussion in this manual involving tips and noise reduction applies to both
types of tips, but there are some applications which are tip specific.

PtIr tips seem to give better atomic resolution than tungsten in air and liquids, probably due to the
lower reactivity of platinum. The PtIr tips are not as uniformly shaped as the tungsten tips, so
freshly etched tungsten tips may provide cleaner data when scanning steeply sloped surfaces such
as compact or optical disks. For tunneling on surfaces immersed in conductive liquids, coated tips
have been used. Glass coatings are removed from the very end of the tip by briefly applying a high-
bias voltage.

The quality of the mechanically formed PtIr tips will vary. Some give beautiful images as soon as
tunneling starts; others start poorly but improve over time; while others start noisy and stay noisy.
Some tips have very flimsy points which give an image that is stretched out on one side; this
indicates that the tip is unable to turn around quickly at the ends of the X scan. These tips should be
replaced unless the artifacts can be eliminated by increasing the X-rounding using the Calibrate
command in the Realtime > Microscope menu, or by capturing large scans and using the Offline >
Modify Zoom to focus on the desired information.

Sample Surface

Samples to be imaged with a scanning tunneling microscope must conduct electricity to some
degree. In many cases nonconductive samples can be coated with a thin layer of a conductive
material to facilitate imaging. The sample surface must be conductive enough to allow a few
nanoamps of current to flow from the bias voltage source to the area to be scanned. NanoScopes
have been used to scan gold, silver, platinum, nickel, copper under oil, chrome plating, doped
silicon under oil, conducting polymers, amorphous carbon, blue diamond, diamond-like carbon
films, carbon fibers, graphite, iron-oxide compounds, semi-metals, doped semiconductors
(molybdenum disulfide), cobalt-chromium compounds, stainless steel, liquid crystals, and other
materials. Oxide layers more than a few atoms thick on the sample, tend to affect the scanning and
wear down the tip as it is dragged through the oxide. The feedback loop will extend the tip until a
tunneling current flows, even if it must push the tip through an oxide layer (if it can). If oxide
presents a problem, keep the sample covered with oil or operate the microscope in a glove bag filled
with nitrogen or argon. The standard NanoScope microscope heads were not designed to operate in
UHV.

On samples which are noisy or tend to oxidize, tunneling under oil or scanning in a glove box filled
with inert gas can improve the imaging. Silicon oil or paraffin oil (mineral oil) also work well with
some samples. The only problem involved with the use of oil is the increased difficulty in the coarse
positioning of the tip. The reflection of the tip comes off the liquid instead of the surface of the
sample. It is difficult to tell when the tip is close to the sample surface. The best approach is to
lower the tip until it just touches the surface of the oil, falsely engage the tip (use Ctrl-E quickly
after the Motor > Engage command), then lower the tip the rest of the way with the stepper motor.
It may take the motor about a minute or so, but it is better than smashing the tip on the surface of
the sample.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 185

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
STM-Specific Information and Operations

Vibration Isolation

The microscope should be isolated from sources of vibration in the acoustic and subacoustic
frequencies. This requirement can be relaxed somewhat for large-scale images, but atomic-scale
work is extraordinarily sensitive to ordinary room vibrations.

As a final note, the best way to reduce coupling from vibrations is to eliminate as many sources of
vibration as possible. Remember that vibrations can be transmitted to the microscope over the
cable. To reduce this phenomenon, prevent tension in the cable and keep it away from fans and
other noise sources. Also, keep the microscope away from sources of acoustic noise. Loud
conversation can disrupt atomic scale images. Air currents can also disturb atomic images, so it is
best to run the microscope with the cover on.

Piezoelectric Sensitivity and Derating

The sensitivity of the piezoelectric tube in nanometers per volt and the derating of the piezo
sensitivity as the scan voltage is decreased are calibrated using the Autocalibration command in
the Offline > Utility menu. Prior to using the Autocalibration command, the calibration images
must be captured with the Capture Calibration command in the Realtime > Capture menu.
Generally, a silicon calibration standard is used for the “G” scanner-based, Dimension head.

The sensitivity of the piezoelectric tube decreases as the applied range of the applied scan voltage is
reduced. Over a small scan range, the sensitivity of the piezo is constant and a plot of scan size
versus scan voltage is linear. However, for large scans, sensitivity variations are an important factor.
For example, the G head shows sensitivity variation. A plot of the sensitivity of a long-range head
as a function of scan voltage looks similar to the graph in Figure 11.3b. As shown, the Derating
(the slope of the head's sensitivity plot) indicates how much the piezo sensitivity decreases as the
scan voltage is reduced.

Figure 11.3b Scan Derating Graph

Maximum Sensitivity
Sensitivity (Å/V)

300

slope = Derating

250

110 220 440

Scan Size (V)

The NanoScope software accounts for the reduction in sensitivity as the scan voltage is decreased
through the Derating parameters in the Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner dialog box. As
described in the following paragraphs, the Head Autocalibrate command in the Offline > Utility
menu can be used to calculate the sensitivity and derating parameters of STM heads.

186 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Spectroscopy with the STM

Head Offset

The value of the head preamplifier offset can be measured and corrected with the Offset command
in the Realtime > Microscope menu. The procedure is as follows:

• Withdraw the tip from the sample surface.

• Invoke the Offset command to observe the offset current of the preamplifier in
nanoamps.

11.4 Spectroscopy with the STM

The NanoScope STM performs limited spectroscopic operations under the two scanning tunneling
spectroscopy STS modes of operation. The variation of the tunneling current due to variations of
the bias voltage or tip-to-sample separation can be tested and recorded at a single point with the
View > STS Plot modes.

STS Plot Modes

In the STS Plot modes, the tip is positioned at a point on the surface, and a spectroscopic plot is
acquired and displayed in a scope format. Between plots, the feedback is run to establish the
tunneling current to the setpoint value. The different types of STS Plots that can be acquired are:

STS i(v)— The tunneling current as a function of the bias voltage is displayed. The tip height is
held constant while the I-V plot is being acquired. In addition to I vs. V, F(d i,dv), F(d ln(i),dv), or
F(d ln(i),d ln(v)) vs. V can be plotted.

STS i(s)— The tunneling current as a function of the tip height is displayed. The bias voltage is
held constant while the I-S plot is being acquired. In addition to I vs. S, ln(I) vs. S can be plotted.

11.4.1 Operation of STS

In the following sections, the operation of the spectroscopic functions of the NanoScope STM will
be discussed. Additional information can be obtained from the Command Reference Manual.

STS Plot

There are several items that you should be aware of when using the NanoScope to acquire
spectroscopic plots with the STS Plot commands. The spectroscopic capabilities can provide
information that can help to distinguish different species although exact species identification is
difficult, especially in air. The spectroscopic plots should aid in comparative studies between
samples or between different regions on a sample, but they will not reveal the precise make-up of
that sample.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 187

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Troubleshooting Operation of STM

A comparison to STM imaging reveals two somewhat conflicting requirements. As a good starting
point, the sample and tip should produce consistent STM images. The images should repeat well
from frame to frame and be fairly free of noise or areas on the surface that appear unstable. For
current-versus-voltage type plots, the spectroscopic plots may be nice and smooth and repeat well,
but switching back to the STM imaging mode reveals images which are quite noisy. This can be
attributed to the fact that the quality and uniformity of the tip is probably more critical for imaging
than for making the rather simple spectroscopic plots. This is generally not true for the I vs. S plots.
Some general recommendations for acquiring spectroscopic plots are:

1. Low settings for the Integral gain are preferred. Since the tip is not tracking any topography,
the lower gains are acceptable and tend to make the plots more stable.

2. The maximum input range of ±100nA on the NanoScope with the standard preamps will
restrict the current-versus-voltage plots.

3. The spectroscopic functions do not adjust for any loss of bias voltage due to IR losses caused
by the input impedance of the preamplifier. This has different effects for the STS i(v) and
STS i(s) functions which are discussed individually below:

STS i(v)

The spectroscopic plots do not correct for reductions in bias voltage caused by the preamplifier,
which for current-versus-voltage is typically small, anyway. For example, a 1V scan on the bias
voltage, producing a 50nA response in the tunneling current would have a 5 percent error at the
extremes of the scan (50nA x 1 MΩ = 50mV or 5 percent of 1V).

Input impedance of the preamplifier leads to reduced bias voltages at increased tunneling currents.
This effect can cause the I vs. S plot to be inaccurate. For example, a bias voltage of 20mV will
restrict the upper limit of the tunneling current to 20nA since that level of current would effectively
reduce the bias voltage to zero. Even before the tunneling current gets to 20nA, the reduced bias
voltage will make the measured current appear lower than it should be for a given tip height.

11.5 Troubleshooting Operation of STM

This section addresses errors or malfunctions encountered during the operation of the STM.

11.5.1 Head and Microscope-Related Problems

This section deals with problems related to the scan heads or the microscope. If a problem exists
with a scan head, try a second one under the same conditions, if possible. Otherwise, the following
list of symptoms and cures may be helpful:

188 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Troubleshooting Operation of STM

11.5.2 Head Engages Immediately

If the STM engages immediately after initiating the Motor > Engage command, then one of the
following probably occurred:

1. Tip On Surface—Make sure the tip is not touching the surface of the sample. Adjust the
coarse-adjustment screws upward until the tip is far from the surface.

2. Controller Off—Verify that power to the controller is on and that the controller is connected
to the computer workstation via the beige 25-pin cable.

3. Head has Offset—Follow the directions in section 9.3. to determine if your scan head
requires its offset to be adjusted.

4. Head has Leakage—Follow the directions in section 9.3. to determine whether your scan
head has leakage current between the Y electrode and tip holder.

Head Never Engages

If the scan head never engages, test for the following:

• Disconnected—Make sure the microscope is connected to the Controller.

• Bias Shorted—Measure the bias by using a voltmeter between the head and stage chuck.
If this is not in agreement with the settings in the Bias voltage item in the STM
Parameter control panel and appears to be grounded, then check to see if anything is
providing a conduction path between the Base and the Base Support or any other
ground.

Tip Crashes

If the tip always crashes into the surface with the Z center either changing erratically or stuck in the
fully retracted position, try the following:

• Check the Polarity of the Z Piezo—Use the Calibrate command in the Realtime >
Microscope menu to review the calibration parameters for the head in use. The Z
polarity should be set to Forward.

• Check Sample Conductivity—There are two problems associated with sample

conductivity. First, the bulk conductivity of the sample may make it difficult to image. If
the resistance of the sample is greater than 1 Kohm/cm, higher bias voltages should be
tried. If the resistance is greater than 1 Megohm, bias voltages of 100 mV or more
should be used. Samples with resistances 1 Megohm or greater will be difficult to image
even with high bias voltages.

Measuring the bulk conductivity of the sample with probes may not tell the whole story. Probes
may easily penetrate oxide or contamination layers on the sample surface yielding reasonable

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 189

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Troubleshooting Operation of STM

resistance measurements. However, oxide and contamination layers on the sample surface can
make imaging very difficult. Higher bias voltages are required for these types of samples.

Problems During Realtime Operation

This section deals with problems that are associated with the Realtime aspects of the NanoScope
software although they often point to the scanning head or microscope.

Image goes out of Range

If the Z center position tends to go out of range at the edges, top and bottom or right and left of the
scan, then try the following:

• Level Sample to Head—The Z center position is affected by sample tilt and the
Dimension head may be less tolerant of sample tilt due to its small vertical range
compared to the large, lateral scan range. Try leveling the head relative to the sample by
noting the trend in Z center position and adjusting the head tilt accordingly. The View >
Scope Mode with the Show slope option can also be very helpful in eliminating tilt
along the scan direction.

• Measure Coupling— A broken wire to one of the electrodes can cause this problem and
will usually result in a large, monotonic increase (or decrease) in Z center position from
the bottom of the scan to the top.

Z drift

If the Z center voltage tends to drift out of range rather quickly after the head is engaged, it may be
a result of the following:

1. Thermal Drift— Allow some time for the temperature to stabilize if the microscope and/or
scan head has been stored in a cold place overnight. Drift can be minimized by keeping the
STM in a thermally stable environment.

2. Tip not Tight—Make sure the tip is held tightly in the tip holder. Push and pull on the tip
with the tweezers to see that it is not loose. Increase the bend in the tip if the tip seems loose.

3. Sample Hold-Down—Verify that the sample is flat against the chuck and cannot move
vertically. This may be become problematic if the sample has been affixed using uncured,
conductive epoxy, and/or if foam adhesives are used.

Realtime Image Hides Features

If the Realtime image appears to be flat, but captured images reveal detail, then try rotating the
sample 90° in the microscope. The Realtime image leveling software tends to hide features that are
parallel to the X-scan direction.

190 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Troubleshooting Operation of STM

Image is Streaky or Wavy

If high-resolution images appear streaky or wavy, it may be a result of the following:

• Insufficient Vibration Isolation— Atomic-scale scans are the most susceptible to

vibration in the acoustic and subacoustic frequencies. Verify that the Dimension is
acoustically isolated with a functioning isolation table and, if required, an acoustic
cover. Make certain that vibration tables are properly pressurized and adjusted.

• Bad Tip— Many strange effects have been pondered and hunted down for hours only to
find that changing the tip fixes the problem. Try a different tip to see if the problem
persists.

• Low-Scan Rates— The brute force method for reducing the effects of drift and even low
frequency vibration is to simply raise the scan rate. Collect small-scale images at 156
Hz with 256 x 256 sample points.

Image is Triangular over Step-like Features

• The performance of the STM over large scans with high vertical features is very
dependent on the ability of the feedback loop to force the tip to track the sample surface.
The digital feedback used in the NanoScope has been designed to maximize
performance on a variety of samples. Try the following to improve the image quality
over step-like features:

• Log or Boost Feedback—The most dramatic increase in performance of the feedback

over large scans is achieved using the Log or Boost feedback modes. These make the
error signal symmetrical for conditions with the tip too far or too close to the surface.
Boost mode further optimizes the feedback performance for large scans.

• Gain—The settings of the Integral and LookAhead gain terms also tend to be critical
for large scans. They should be high enough to produce a little fuzz on the image but not
so high as to cause large oscillations.

• Scan Rate—The Scan rate should be lowered for large scans, especially, if the sample
surfaces are rough or contain large steps. Moving the tip quickly along the sample
surface at high scan rates with large scan sizes will usually lead to a tip crash.
Essentially, the Scan rate should be inversely proportional to the Scan size, since the tip
must still be maintained roughly 1 nanometer above the surface.

• Setpoint Current—Raising the Setpoint current will effectively raise the gain of the
feedback loop which can be quite helpful for large scans. It will also bring the tip closer
to the surface but only by a small amount (i ≈ e-s).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 191

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Etching Tungsten Tips

11.6 Etching Tungsten Tips

You can purchase tungsten tips from Veeco or make them yourself. This section describes the
process of etching tungsten tips for use with the NanoScope.

Materials Required

• Variac auto transformer

• Optical microscope (20-100X)

• Sodium nitrite (NaNO2)

• Distilled water

• Ethyl alcohol

• WD-40 (anti-oxidant)

• Two 50ml beakers

• Tipholder

• Platinum wire

• Tungsten Wire, 0.010" Diameter

• Miscellaneous Wire/Clips

11.6.1 Procedure

1. Mix a 5 percent (by weight) solution of Sodium Nitrite in water.

2. Pour ≈ 40ml of the Sodium Nitrite solution into a beaker.

3. Pour ≈ 40ml of WD 40 into a beaker.

4. Construct an electrode out of the platinum wire and insert it into the beaker.

5. Adjust the variac for 30V, and with it Off, connect one output to the platinum electrode.

6. Cut 10 to 12 pieces of tungsten wire ≈ 1.25cm long. Before etching, check to make sure that
at least one end of the wire has not split by inserting the ends into a tip holder. If an end has
split, you will not be able to insert it into the tipholder. You can etch the end that has split,
however, preserve the unspoiled end.

192 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Etching Tungsten Tips

7. Place the tungsten tips into a holder. We like to use an IC socket (the low cost, edge-grip
square contact type, not the machine-grip round contact type), with all the pins soldered
together. The tips will then be held in place while inverting them over the solution. We also
find it helpful to solder the IC socket to the back of a proto-board (perf-board). You can then
invert the tips over a beaker with the proto-board sitting on the rim of the beaker.

8. Invert the tips over the Sodium Nitrite solution with ≈2mm of the tips’ surface submerged.
More than 2mm will cause excessive foaming of the solution during etching, and less than
2mm will result in tips that are too blunt.

9. Connect the other output of the variac to the common of all the tips.

10. Turn on the variac and etch the tips. While the tips are etching, the solution will foam, and
the tips will start to glow. As the tips etch towards the surface, the foaming will be reduced.
Continue to etch the tip until it stops.

11. Re-submerge the tips ≈1mm into the solution for ≈15 seconds at 30V. Turn on the variac and
re-etch the tips. There should be only slight bubbling from the tip and it should not glow.

Note: It possible to vary the tip shape at this point by lowering the voltage on the
variac and increasing or decreasing the amount of time the tips are submerged.

Note: Longer time gives blunter tips.

12. Dip the tips into ethyl alcohol to clean them. If you plan to keep the tips around for more than
a day, then dip them into the WD 40 after cleaning. Dispose of unwanted tips in an
appropriately labelled solvent-contaminated waste container.

13. Examine the tips under the optical microscope. Ones that are too long, too blunt, or split at
the end will hardly ever be good tips and can be thrown out at this time. Of course, this is a
subjective process. As your experience in etching grows, you will get better at throwing out
the bad ones.

14. Repeat the etching procedure. Replace the etching solution when a fairly large amount of
residue is present. Typically, you can etch 60 to 80 tips in a 40ml solution.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 193

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM)
Etching Tungsten Tips

194 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 12 Lateral Force Mode

This chapter includes the following sections:

• Introduction: Section 12.1

• Basic LFM Operation: Section 12.2

• Advanced LFM Operation: Section 12.3

• Scan Direction: Section 12.3.1

• Tip selection: Section 12.3.2

• Understanding the LFM Signal: Section 12.3.3

• Understanding the Color Scale: Section 12.3.4

• Using TMR Voltage to Measure Friction: Section 12.3.5

• Enhancing the LFM Data by Subtracting Two Images: Section 12.3.6

• Height Artifacts in the Signal: Section 12.3.7

12.1 Introduction
The Dimension 3100 SPM is capable of measuring frictional forces on the surfaces of samples
using a special measurement known as lateral force microscopy (LFM). The name derives from the
fact that cantilevers scanning laterally (perpendicular to their lengths) are torqued more as they
transit high-friction sites; low-friction sites tend to torque cantilevers less. The relative measure of
lateral forces encountered along a surface yields a map of high- and low-friction sites.

After obtaining a good topographical image in Contact mode, it is relatively easy to use LFM to
view and acquire lateral force data. It is important to obtain a good image in Contact mode before
measuring LFM data. The NanoScope system will continue to run the feedback based on measuring
the vertical deflection signal and feedback gains in the control panel while LFM data is acquired
and displayed.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 195

Lateral Force Mode
Basic LFM Operation

12.2 Basic LFM Operation

1. Set up and run the system in Contact mode as described in Chapter 6, assigning the Channel
1 image to Data Type: Height and the Channel 2 image to Data Type: Friction. Set the
Scan angle to 90.00.

2. Optimize the scan parameters in AFM mode for Channel 1.

3. For Channel 2, set Line direction to Trace. This will place high lateral forces on the top of
the color bar and low lateral forces on the bottom of the color bar. If the Line direction
parameter is changed to Retrace, the plus-minus sign of the lateral force changes and low
lateral force will be displayed on the top of the color bar. LFM data can now be collected and
stored.

Note: LFM is a qualitative measurement, not quantitative. NanoScope software does

not provide a way to calibrate the torsional spring constant of a cantilever.

Note: The trace and retrace LFM signals may not be the same magnitude. The tip will
never be exactly perpendicular to the sample. In most cases, internal stress in
the material of the cantilever will cause the cantilever to have a natural bias in
some direction.

196 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Lateral Force Mode
Advanced LFM Operation

12.3 Advanced LFM Operation

12.3.1 Scan Direction

The cantilever is most susceptible to frictional effects when the scan direction runs perpendicular to
the major axis of the cantilever as shown in Figure 12.3a. The Scan angle parameter in the Scan
Controls panel must be set to 90° or 270° to produce this scan direction.

Figure 12.3a Scan Angle Selection

Scan Direction
without Scan
Rotation
scan angle 0°

Scan Direction
for Friction
Measurements
scan angle
90° or 270°

Cantilever
(Top View)

The contact mode setpoint voltage will slightly adjust the “gain” of the lateral force signal. By
increasing the setpoint, the contact force applied will increase, and so will the frictional or torsional
forces in an approximately linear fashion. If the frictional effects are far too large or too small, it
will be necessary to resort to changing the cantilever probe used, but if the value is near the
dynamic range desired, adjustment of the contact force will produce modest changes in the lateral
force or frictional signal.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 197

Lateral Force Mode
Advanced LFM Operation

12.3.2 Tip selection

The analog-to-digital converter on the auxiliary input channel which is used for LFM data has a
maximum input range of ±10V. This, and the anticipated interaction between tip and sample define
the selection of the cantilever to be used for the measurement.

The 200µm cantilever with wide legs provides a good starting point for frictional measurements. It
is flexible enough to provide reasonable signal levels on samples with moderate friction. If the
signal exceeds + 10.00V with the 200µm wide-legged cantilever, one of the stiffer 100µm
cantilevers should be used. If the signal level is too small, the narrow-legged 200µm cantilever will
provide a larger signal.

12.3.3 Understanding the LFM Signal

To understand LFM, examine a sample’s trace and retrace in scope mode. Figure 12.3b below
illustrates the movement of the tip as it encounters friction during a scan.

Figure 12.3b Example of Frictional Forces on Tip During Scan (Front View)

1 2 3 4 5

Trace

Horizontal
Deflection

Retrace

10 9 8 7 6

= Higher Frictional Areas

198 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Lateral Force Mode
Advanced LFM Operation

Table 12.3a Key for LFM Example Above

Trace or Tip Level of

Number Photo Diode Voltage
Retrace? Movement Friction
1 trace slightly right slight slightly positive
2 “ severely right higher increases positive
3 “ straightens slight returns to slightly positive
4 “ severely right higher increases positive
5 “ straightens slight returns to slightly positive
6 retrace slightly left slight slightly negative
7 “ severely left higher increases negative
8 “ straightens slight returns to slightly negative
9 “ severely left higher increases negative
10 “ straightens slight returns to slightly negative

12.3.4 Understanding the Color Scale

LFM data is typically monitored in the trace direction with the scan angle set to 90 degrees. The
data then follows a convention where lighter colors mean higher friction. Darker colors mean less
friction. The sign of the color is inverted if Retrace is monitored (see Figure 12.3c).

Figure 12.3c Friction Data

High Friction

Trace

Low Friction

Retrace

High Friction

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 199

Lateral Force Mode
Advanced LFM Operation

12.3.5 Using TMR Voltage to Measure Friction

The signal called TMR (Trace minus Retrace) in the scope mode display measures the voltage
difference between the Trace and the Retrace scan directions. In the case of LFM data, this directly
corresponds to the amount of total tip twist that occurs as the tip scans back and forth across the
sample.

It is common to study the frictional differences between two different samples. Monitoring the
TMR voltage between two different samples will give you a comparative frictional measurement.

Figure 12.3d TMR Data

Less Frictional Surface More Frictional Surface

TMR TMR
0.123V 0.456V

Be aware that friction force is also affected by the amount of tracking force. The force needs to be
the same when comparing two samples. You should use the force calibration curve to verify the
force after substituting samples. Also note that the laser spot position and changing the probe will
also cause changes in the LFM measurement.

12.3.6 Enhancing the LFM Data by Subtracting Two Images

It is possible to enhance the magnitude of the LFM data by subtracting the trace from the retrace.
This is done by collecting three data channels with one scan.

1. Set channel 1 to Height.

2. Set channel 2 to Friction – Trace – Offline plane fit = none

3. Set channel 3 to Friction – Retrace – Offline plane fit = none

4. Collect a scan at 90 degree scan angle.

5. Use the Image subtract feature in Offline mode to subtract Retrace from Trace. The resulting
data will show double the LFM data and half the background noise caused by tracking error.

Note: The X-Y motion of an open loop scanner in trace and retrace does not overlap
exactly. You can still use image subtraction, but some erroneous height data
might be added to the LFM data in the final image. This is not an issue for
closed loop scanners.

200 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Lateral Force Mode
Advanced LFM Operation

12.3.7 Height Artifacts in the Signal

LFM is subject to height artifacts due to coupling with surface topography. Delay in the feedback
loop causes the tip to momentarily twist as it climbs up an edge. This will be visible in the friction
data if it’s severe enough.

To distinguish real friction data from height artifacts, remember that friction causes the cantilever to
twist in the opposite direction as it travels. Actual LFM information will always show up as a mirror
image in the trace and retrace directions in the scope display. Height artifacts will be the same
direction in the scope display (see Figure 12.3e).

Figure 12.3e Height Artifacts in LFM Data

High Friction
Trace

Low Friction

Retrace
High Friction

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 201/(198 Blank)

Chapter 13 Force Imaging

Force plots measure tip-sample interactions and determine optimal setpoints. More recently,
microscopists have plotted force measurements across entire surfaces to reveal new information
about the sample. This area of scanning probe microscopy promises to open new chapters in
materials science, biology and other investigative areas.

Specifically, this chapter details the following topics:

• Force Plots–An Analogy: Section 13.1

• Force Calibration Mode: Section 13.2

• Example Force Plot: Section 13.2.1

• Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus: Section 13.3

• Main Controls (Ramp Controls): Section 13.3.1

• Main Controls Panel (Display): Section 13.3.2

• Channel 1, 2, 3 Panels: Section 13.3.3

• Feedback Controls Panel: Section 13.3.4

• Scan Mode Panel (Advanced Mode Only): Section 13.3.5

• Menu Bar Commands: Section 13.3.6

• Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM): Section 13.4

• Obtaining a Good Force Curve: Section 13.4.1

• Helpful Suggestions: Section 13.4.2

• Advanced Techniques: Section 13.4.3

• Interpreting Force Curves: Section 13.4.4

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 203

Force Imaging
Force Plots–An Analogy

• Force Calibration (TappingMode): Section 13.5

• Force Plots: Section 13.5.1

• Obtaining a Force Plot (TappingMode): Section 13.5.2

• High Contact Force: Section 13.5.3

• Tip Selection: Section 13.5.4

• Force Modulation: Section 13.6

• Introduction: Section 13.6.1

• Selecting a Force Modulation Tip: Section 13.6.2

• Operating Principle: Section 13.6.3

• Force Modulation Procedure: Section 13.6.4

• Notes About Artifacts: Section 13.6.5

• Force Modulation with ‘Negative LiftMode’: Section 13.7

• Set Interleave Controls: Section 13.7.1

• Obtain a TappingMode Image: Section 13.7.2

• Obtain a Negative LiftMode Force Modulation Image: Section 13.7.3

• Force Volume: Section 13.8

13.1 Force Plots–An Analogy

A force plot is an observation of tip-sample interactions which yields information regarding the
sample and tip. By way of analogy, suppose a materials researcher must determine how powerful
two different types of magnets are. One magnet is made of iron, the other is a stronger, so-called
“rare earth” magnet.

A simple way of measuring each magnet’s power would be to determine its pull upon a steel plate.
For example, the researcher could hang each magnet from a simple spring scale, “zero” the scale,
then lower the magnet toward a heavy steel plate. At regular distances from the plate, the amount of
pull shown on the scale is recorded. At some unique height above the plate, each magnet is attracted
strongly enough to attach itself to the plate. A plot of height, H, versus magnetic pull gives a
comparative index of each magnet’s power. Similarly, after attachment the researcher could pull
each magnet away from the plate and measure the pulling force at regular intervals until the magnet
breaks free. The pull-off point of each magnet gives an additional index of its holding power.1 A
representation of this setup during a lowering cycle of one magnet is illustrated in Figure 13.1a.

204 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Plots–An Analogy

Figure 13.1a Comparative Index of Pulling Forces

H = 11 cm
F = 0 kg H
H = 10 cm
(0 N) F =.08 kg H = 9 cm
(0.8 N) F =.12 kg 11
H = 8 cm
(1.2 N) 10
F =.30 kg H = 7 cm
(2.9 N) F = 1.0 kg 9
(9.8 N) 8
7
6
5
4
3
2

Steel plate

The pulling force is measured at 1 cm height intervals while the scale and magnet lower and lift in a
controlled cycle. Figure 13.1b depicts a plot of this experiment using two magnets. The plot depicts
each magnet’s attraction as it approaches the plate, and its tenacity when pulled off the plate.
Assuming both magnets are the same size, this reveals information about each magnet’s power.
First, magnet #1 is weaker, attaching to the steel plate with 7N of pulling force at 6cm, and magnet
#2 is stronger, attaching at 7cm with 10N.

Figure 13.1b Pulling Forces Graph

N kg
+1
10

0 0
Magnet #1

-5 Magnet #2

-10 -1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Height above steel plate (cm)

1. For the sake of simplicity, forces are represented here using a common scale in kilogram units; however, force is properly
measured in Newtons (1 kg = 9.8 N).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 205

Force Imaging
Force Calibration Mode

This oversimplified model depicts activity between SPM tips and various materials. In reality, SPM
force plots reveal far more. For example, by combining force curves at regularly spaced intervals
across the sample, you may generate a force map of the sample’s electric properties, elastic
modulus, and chemical bonding strengths.

13.2 Force Calibration Mode

The Force Calibration command in the View > Force Mode > Calibration menu allows you to
quickly check the interaction between the cantilever and the sample surface. In Force Calibration
mode, the X and Y voltages applied to the piezo tube are held constant and a triangular waveform
similar to the one depicted in Figure 13.2a is applied to the Z electrodes of the piezo tube.

Figure 13.2a Force Calibration Z Waveform

Retracted
Scan period
- 220

Ramp size
Z Voltage

Z scan start

Time

1
Scan period (sec) = -------------------------------------------
Z scan rate (Hz)
+ 220
Extended

As a result of the applied voltage, the cantilever tip moves up and down relative to the stationary
sample as shown in Figure 13.2b. The Z scan start parameter sets the offset of the piezo travel,
while the Ramp size parameter defines the total travel distance of the piezo. Therefore, you can
obtain the maximum travel distance by setting the Z scan start to +220V, with the Ramp size set to
440V.

206 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration Mode

Figure 13.2b Piezo Travel in Force Calibration Mode

Retracted Extended

Z Piezo

A B
(Distance fixed
by head height)

Ramp Size

Sample
Z Scan Start

A: Z = Z Scan Start - Ramp Size

B: Z = Z Scan Start

As the piezo moves the tip up and down, the cantilever-deflection signal from the photodiode is
monitored. The force curve, a plot of the cantilever deflection signal as a function of the voltage
applied to the piezo tube, displays on the display monitor. The control panel detailing parameters
for controlling the microscope in Force Calibration mode displays on the control monitor.

Force Calibration mode is frequently used to adjust and calculate contact forces between the
cantilever and the sample. Other uses of Force Calibration mode include characterization of the
forces on the cantilever tip, diagnosing AFM performance, and determination of the sensitivity of
the cantilever deflection voltage in terms of voltage applied to the piezo. If used correctly, Force
Calibration mode provides a variety of useful information.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 207

Force Imaging
Force Calibration Mode

Figure 13.2c Tip-Sample Interaction During a Force Plot

3 4 5

208 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration Mode

13.2.1 Example Force Plot

A Contact Mode AFM force plot using a silicon nitride tip is the most simple SPM force plot.
Because of the lower spring constant of silicon nitride tips, they are very sensitive to attractive and
repulsive forces. A force plot in Contact Mode AFM is shown in Figure 13.2d.

Figure 13.2c compares portions of the force curve shown in Figure 13.2d to relative positions of the
tip and sample at seven points. The force curve represents the deflection signal for each complete
extension-retraction cycle of the piezo (Figure 13.2a). The Z scan rate parameter in the Main
Controls panel defines the rate at which the piezo completes an extension-retraction cycle (and
therefore the rate at which new curves are displayed).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 209

Force Imaging
Force Calibration Mode

Figure 13.2d Anatomy of a Force Curve

3
Piezo extension

Up
Piezo retraction

Cantilever deflection
4 1
2 6 7

Down
5

Piezo extends; tip descends.

No contact with surface yet.
1

Attractive forces near surface

2 pull tip down.

As tip presses into the surface,

cantilever bends upward.
3

4
Piezo retracts; tip ascends until forces are in
equilibrium with surface forces.
Cantilever relaxes downward.

Piezo continues retraction; tip ascends further.

5 Cantilever bends downward as surface
attraction holds onto the tip.

As tip continues its ascent, tip finally

6 breaks free of surface attraction. Cantilever
rebounds sharply upward.
7
As piezo continues retracting, tip continues
its ascent. No further contact with surface
this cycle.

The horizontal axis plots the tip movement relative to the sample. By extending the Z-axis piezo
crystal, the tip descends toward the sample and the tip-sample distance decreases. The descent plots
from right-to-left in yellow on the NanoScope display monitor. By retracting the Z-axis piezo
crystal, the tip ascends away from the sample and the tip-sample distance increases. The ascent
plots from left-to-right in white on the NanoScope display monitor.

Cantilever deflection plots on the vertical axis of the graph. When the cantilever deflects downward,
it plots on the graph’s downward vertical; when the cantilever deflects upward, it plots on the
graph’s upward vertical.

210 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration Mode

You can use force plots to adjust the setpoint so that minimal force is applied to the sample.
Although attractive forces appear small, the tip is extremely sharp. Because only a few nanometers
of the tip actually touch the sample, even minute forces add up quickly when distributed over an
exceedingly small area. The tip can easily dent many materials under such conditions.

The graph detailed in Figure 13.2a reveals the following types of information:

Tip-Sample Attraction

As the tip approaches the sample, various attractive forces reach out and grab the tip. This is evident
at point 2 (slight dip) in the graph above. The tip plunges toward the sample during its descent. This
is also referred to as the “jump-to-contact” point and is usually due to electrostatic attraction or
surface tension (capillary) forces.

Attraction is also evident between points 4 and 5 (sloped line) as the cantilever pulls away from the
sample. If attractive forces are strong enough, the tip clings to the sample surface as it pulls clear.
Eventually, the sample retracts and the tip rebounds sharply upward (white line between points 5
and 6). You can measure attractive forces of tip-sample interactions if you know the spring constant.

Material Elasticity

It is possible to extract information regarding the elasticity of the material by studying force curves.
In the graph above, the tip is in constant contact with the sample between points 2 and 4. As the tip
presses further into the sample material, the cantilever flexes. The amount of cantilever flexion for a
given amount of downward tip movement indicates the material’s elasticity.

For example, if the material is extremely hard, pressing the tip downward results in a relatively
large amount of cantilever flexion. On the other hand, if the material is soft, the cantilever will flex
less during its descent. The shape and slope of the contacted portion of the force curve gives
detailed information about surface elasticity. It is possible to obtain quantitative measurements of
sample elasticity. (See Radmacher, et al. 1994. Science, Vol. 265:1577-1579).

Two imaging techniques measure and display elasticity at multiple points on a sample surface:
force modulation and force volume imaging.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 211

Force Imaging
Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus

13.3 Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus

The Force Calibration Control window (see Figure 13.3a) manipulates the microscope in Force
Calibration mode. The parameters control the rate, start position and amplitude of the triangle
wave applied to the Z piezo. You can also adjust the Setpoint value of the cantilever deflection
voltage used in the feedback loop during imaging. The Capture button stores the force curve for
Offline viewing. Some parameters influence the operation of the microscope during imaging; most
of the menu parameters affect only Force Calibration mode.

Figure 13.3a Advanced Force Calibration Control Window (Contact Mode AFM)

038

There are 2 methods to enter Force Calibration Mode:

• View > Force Mode > Calibrate will open a simplified subset of the parameters and
commands available.

• View > Force Mode > Advanced includes the full set of available parameters and
commands.

Additionally:

• View > Force Mode > Step enters force mode with the parameter start mode = step
and the piezo fully retracted.

• View > Force Mode > Volume enters Force Volume Mode.

Items in the Force Calibration Control Window are discussed individually below.

212 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus

13.3.1 Main Controls (Ramp Controls)

Ramp Channel (Advanced Mode Only)

This parameter specifies the channel you will ramp. To collect force plots, this parameter should be
set to Z. For IV curves, Bias is typically selected.

Ramp Size

As shown in Figure 13.2a, this parameter defines the amplitude of the triangular waveform applied
to the Z piezo. The units of this item are volts or nanometers, depending on the setting of the Units
parameter. Regardless of the size of the scan, the entire scan is shown in the force curve; therefore,
increasing the value of this parameter increases the horizontal axis scale on the force plot.

Z Scan Start

This parameter defines the maximum voltage applied to the Z electrodes of the piezo during force
calibration operation. The triangular waveform shown in Figure 13.2a displaces the piezo up and
down in relation to the value of Z scan start. Increasing the value of the Z scan start parameter
moves the cantilever closer to the sample by extending the piezo tube. The units of this item are
volts or nanometers, depending on the setting of the Units parameter. The initial value of Z scan
start is equal to the average Z-center voltage defined by the feedback just prior to entering the
Force Calibration mode. Decreasing the value of this parameter shifts the force curve on the
display to the left, while increasing the parameter shifts the curve to the right.

Scan Rate

This parameter defines the rate that force plots are collected (typically ~1Hz). The ramp size,
forward velocity and reverse velocity determine the scan rate.

Forward Velocity (Advanced Mode Only)

This parameter defines the piezo speed to bring together the tip and sample.

Reverse Velocity (Advanced Mode Only)

This parameter defines the piezo speed to separate the tip and sample.

X Offset, Y Offset

These parameters define the X and Y positions where the force plot will be collected.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 213

Force Imaging
Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus

Number of Samples

This parameter defines the number of data points captured during each extend and retract operation
of the Z piezo during Force Calibration. This parameter does not affect the number of samples
used in Image Mode.

Average Count (Advanced Mode Only)

This parameter defines the number of Force Calibration scans taken to average in the display of
the Force Calibration graph. Set to 1 unless the user needs to reduce noise. Otherwise, set between
1 and 1024. No curves are displayed until “Average Count” curves have been collected. Also, drift
may cause systemic error in the resulting plot.

13.3.2 Main Controls Panel (Display)

Spring Constant

The parameter defines the spring constant of the cantilever. The spring constant will be saved with
captured force plots.

Display Mode

This parameter defines the display as either the approach, the retract, or both.

Units

This item selects the units, either metric lengths or volts on the piezo, that define the parameters
and the axes of the graph. Changing this item in Force Calibration mode also changes it in the
Realtime imaging mode.

X Rotate

X Rotate allows you to move the tip in the X direction during ramping. This is useful because the
cantilever is at an angle relative to the surface. X Rotate prevents the cantilever from plowing the
surface laterally, typically along the X direction, while it indents in the sample surface (in the Z
direction). Plowing occurs when the cantilever bends during indentation or with X movement
caused by coupling of the Z and X axes of the piezo scanner. X Rotate moves the scanner in the
opposite direction in which the cantilever points. Without X Rotate control, the tip moves in the
direction of the cantilever during indentation. Normally, it is set to about 22.0 degrees. This
parameter typically ranges between 12 and 25 degrees.

214 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus

13.3.3 Channel 1, 2, 3 Panels

Data Type

This parameter allows you to select the type of data you want to display on the vertical axis.

Data Scale

This parameter sets the vertical scale in the force plot. Increasing this parameter expands the range
of the display about the centerline causing more of the force curve to fall on the graph. Initially, set
this parameter to its maximum value, then gradually reduce.

Data Center

This parameter shifts the displayed force plot in the vertical axis.

Note: For Data type = Deflection in Contact Mode or Data type = Amplitude in
TappingMode, the data is also shifted by the setpoint.(i.e., if the Data type =
Deflection and Data Center = 0, then the setpoint is at the center of the vertical
scale.

Deflection Sensitivity

This item relates the cantilever deflection signal in volts from the controller to the actual deflection
of the cantilever (in nm). It equals the inverse of the slope of the deflection versus Z piezo position
line when the tip is in contact with a very hard, stiff sample as shown in Figure 13.4d. The
NanoScope system automatically calculates and enters the value from the graph once you use the
mouse to draw a line parallel to the graph. You must properly determine the deflection sensitivity
value before deflection data in nanometers can accurately display. For a proper force curve, the line
has a negative slope with typical values of 10-100 nm/V; however, by convention, values appear as
positive in the menu.

Amplitude Sensitivity (TappingMode)

Amplitude Sensitivity relates the vibrational amplitude of the cantilever (in nm) to the amplitude
signal (in V) from the controller. To calculate the Amplitude Sensitivity, measure the slope of the
RMS amplitude versus the Z piezo position when the tip is in contact with a very hard, stiff
sample. The NanoScope software automatically calculates and enters the value from the graph after
you use the mouse to draw a line to the graph. You must properly calibrate the Amplitude
Sensitivity before amplitude data can be correctly displayed in nm.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 215

Force Imaging
Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus

13.3.4 Feedback Controls Panel

All of the parameters in the Feedback Controls panel also affect Image mode.

Deflection Setpoint (Contact Mode)

By changing the deflection setpoint, you can adjust the cantilever deflection voltage maintained by
the feedback loop in Image mode. This parameter defines the center of the range of Cantilever
Deflection Voltages that can be collected. If the Data Center = 0, then the setpoint is at the center
line of the force plot shown on the display monitor. Changing the setpoint shifts the force
calibration curve on the graph. For example, if the setpoint is set to -3.0V and the data center is 0,
the cantilever deflection axis of the graph centers around -3.0V. Raising the setpoint to -2.0V shifts
the force calibration curve down by one volt so the graph centers at -2.0V. Changing the value of
this parameter in Force Calibration mode also changes the Image mode.

Amplitude Setpoint (TappingMode)

The RMS value of the cantilever deflection voltage maintained by the feedback loop in Image
mode can be adjusted by changing Setpoint. In a TappingMode force plot mode, the setpoint
defines the centerline of the vertical, “Amplitude” axis of the amplitude calibration plot shown on
the display monitor (the Data Center must be 0 for that Channel). Changing the Setpoint shifts the
amplitude curve on the graph. For example, if the setpoint is at 3.0V, the RMS amplitude axis of the
graph will be centered around 3.0V; raising the setpoint to 4.0V will shift the amplitude curve down
by one volt, so the graph will be centered at 4.0V. Changing the value of this parameter in the
Amplitude Calibration mode also changes the setpoint parameter in Image mode.

Deflection/Amplitude Limit

This parameter changes the gain applied to the input signal. You can reduce the input signal by a
factor of eight for a NanoScope IIIa (or set it to one of seven different levels for a NanoScope IV) to
see more of the Force Calibration plot deflection or amplitude. This parameter also affects Image
mode and the resolution of the system; therefore, change the value to 2.5V for a NanoScope IIIa (or
5V for a NanoScope IV) before returning to imaging.

Drive Frequency (TappingMode)

This parameter defines the frequency at which the cantilever is vibrated. This frequency should be
close to the resonant frequency of the cantilever. Changing the value of this parameter in the Force
Plot menu also changes the Drive frequency parameter in the Image mode.

Drive Amplitude (TappingMode AFM)

This parameter defines the amplitude of the voltage applied to the piezo system which drives the
cantilever vibration. Changing the value of this parameter in Force Plot mode also changes the
Drive amplitude parameter in the Image mode.

216 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus

13.3.5 Scan Mode Panel (Advanced Mode Only)

Trigger Mode

The Scan Mode panel allows you to use various triggers when obtaining Force Plot and Force
Volume plots. The idea of triggering simple: it limits the total amount of force exerted by the tip
upon the sample. Depending upon which trigger you use and how it is set, you may operate the
trigger independent of drift (Relative) or at some arbitrarily fixed point (Absolute).

Figure 13.3b Absolute and Relative Triggers

Total Force

The plots in Figure 13.3b show the effect of drift on each of the two trigger types. The plot series
shown on the right side of Figure 13.3b utilizes a Relative trigger and maintains force at a constant
level defined by the Trig threshold parameter. The Relative trigger threshold is relative to the data
at the right of the plot where the cantilever is typically undeflected. As illustrated, the total force is
maintained, even as the system drifts.

The plot series on the left side of Figure 13.3b utilizes an Absolute trigger. Notice that as the
system drifts (plot moves slowly downward), total force increases. Drift may be due to mechanical
causes, or due to thermal effects on the cantilever. An Absolute trigger permits the total force to be
set using Setpoint values.

Trigger Channel

This parameter defines the channel to watch to determine when to reverse the ramp.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 217

Force Imaging
Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus

Trigger Threshold

This parameter as well as the Trigger Direction and Trigger Mode define the level at which
trigger occurs.

Trigger Direction

The Trigger Directions are defined as follows:

• Positive: Trigger occurs on positive values only (Trigger Threshold must be positive)

• Negative: Trigger occurs on negative values only (Trigger Threshold must be negative)

• Absolute: Sign of Trigger Threshold is ignored (trigger may occur on positive or

negative values).

Start Mode

The Start Mode parameters are defined as follows:

• Calibrate and Step: Normal ramping (no stepping) unless you use Probe > Approach
Single or Approach Continuous.

• Motor Step: Uses the stepper motor to offset ramp instead of the piezo.

End Mode

The End Mode parameters specify the location of the tip when the mode is switched back to Image
mode. Retracted is the typical setting.

CAUTION: Use caution when using the Extended Mode parameter; you could
damage the tip.

Z Step Size

This parameter defines the size of Z step for Step or Motor Step modes. For Step, it the amount to
move the piezo; for Motor Step it is the amount to move the motor.

Auto Start

When Enabled this parameter starts taking force curves upon entering Force Calibrate Mode.

218 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration Control Panels and Menus

Ramp Delay

This parameter sets the amount of time to wait with the piezo extended before retracting.

Reverse Delay

This parameter sets a delay to occur each time the piezo is retracted while continuously ramping.

Auto Offset

If the trigger is not achieved within a range twice the ramp size, then the retract will begin without
reaching the trigger voltage. Enabling this parameter allows the software to automatically move the
range to attempt to reach the trigger.

13.3.6 Menu Bar Commands

Capture

The Capture button stores the force plot for Offline viewing. Use other options in the
Capture menu to change a capture filename and for “continuous capture” of all the force plots
collected.

Probe Menu Commands

These commands allow for highly controlled tip movement designed to prevent damage to the tip.
Each of these commands has an icon to access directly from the menu bar.

• Run Continuous: The tip is continuously lowered and raised by a distance equal to the
Z scan size. This is the normal, default motion during Force Calibrate. “Raising” and
“lowering” are relative to your system (e.g., On Dimension Series SPMs, the tip is
raised and lowered to the surface; however, other SPMs raise and lower the sample
beneath the tip).

• Run Single: Lowers and raises tip once by a distance equal to the Z scan size, then
halts.

• Stop: Halts all tip movement.

Note: View additional menu subcommands by accessing the advanced Force Mode
command.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 219

Force Imaging
Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM)

Motor

The Motor menu allows you to withdraw or manually control the tip position using the stepper
motor. Selecting Step Motor opens a dialog box containing the following buttons:

• Tip Up: This command moves the tip up by the SPM step size displayed inside the
window.

• Tip Down: This command moves the tip down by the SPM step size displayed inside
the window.

13.4 Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM)

13.4.1 Obtaining a Good Force Curve

Figure 13.4a Typical Force Calibration Curve

Cantilever Off Surface
+
3
Cantilever Deflection

2 1
4
Voltage

6
Setpoint

V csmin

(Z Scan start) Z Piezo Voltage (Z Scan start -Ramp size)

Slope = Volts of Deflection/nanometers (or volts) of piezo travel

Figure 13.4b Piezo Positions for Typical Force Curve

Down Down At Up Up
Up
Piezo travel Bottom
direction

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6
number

To minimize or calculate the contact force between the tip and sample, obtain a good force curve
which shows the typical features displayed in the example curve in Figure 13.4b. However, the
force curve rarely looks “typical” right after invoking Force Calibration mode. This section

220 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM)

discusses general approach adjustments to improve force curves obtained after engaging the
microscope.

The basic approach to obtaining a good force curve entails adjusting the Z motion of the piezo
relative to the sample (with the Z scan start and Ramp size parameters) and shifting the graph
(with the Setpoint parameter) so the pull-off point of the tip displays on the graph. In general, use
the following steps to obtain a good force curve:

1. Engage and verify the tip is tracking the surface. Then switch to Force Calibration mode.

2. Maximize the Deflection Limit parameter in the Feedback Controls panel.

3. In the Channel 1 panel select Deflection as the Data Type.

4. Maximize the Data Scale parameter.

5. Adjust the Ramp size parameter to about 1µm.

6. If the tip does not reach the sample surface (for example, see Figure 13.4a, between points 2
and 3), slowly increase the Z scan start value.

7. As the Z scan start increases, the traces on the force curve move to the right.

8. Adjust the Setpoint parameter.

Note: Adjusting the Setpoint value moves traces up and down on the graph.
Decreasing the value moves the curve up while increasing the value moves the
curve down. (Remember that the green horizontal centerline of the graph is
equal to the Setpoint if the Data Center = 0, so that changing the Setpoint
actually shifts the graph up and down.) Typically, changing the Setpoint value
to -2 volts shows the desired features of the force curve. If it does not, decrease
the Setpoint value further.

Note: Sometimes the entire ramp will occur in the contact portion of the curve (see
Figure 13.4a, between points 3 and 5). If this occurs, increase the Ramp size
and/or decrease the Z scan start.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 221

Force Imaging
Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM)

13.4.2 Helpful Suggestions

To minimize or calculate the contact force between the tip and sample, it is important to obtain a
good force curve; however, there will be situations where you will not obtain a good force curve no
matter how much you adjust the Ramp size, Z scan start and Setpoint. The following sections
discuss a few such situations. Suggestions on working in Force Calibration mode are included.

False Engagement

Figure 13.4c illustrates a force curve resulting from a falsely engaged tip. The photodiode receives
light reflected off the sample, causing an increase in the deflection signal until the signal equals the
setpoint and the system “engages” (even though the tip is not on the surface). Interference in the
reflected light causes the hump-shaped waveform.

The easiest way to correct a false engagement is to withdraw the tip, adjust the photodetector
positioner to make the top/bottom differential voltage more negative, then re-engage the tip. This
compensates for the slight slope in Figure 13.4c).

Figure 13.4c False Engagement (G Scanner)

Retracting
Extending Possible False Engage Points
Tip
Deflection
0.48 V/div

Setpoint

Z Position - 9.27 V/div

Motor Control

Motor Control > Tip Up and Tip Down buttons provide coarse adjustment of Z center voltage.
With these buttons the SPM head moves vertically. The feedback loop causes the Z piezo to adjust
to compensate for the head movement. If you use Tip Up, the Z piezo extends. If you use Tip
Down, the Z piezo retracts.

Note: The Step Motor function is generally used only when the scanning range of the
Z piezo is exceeded or when it is necessary to position a force measurement in
the center of the scanner range. Because the Z-axis leadscrew has some
backlash, it may be necessary to rotate the leadscrew several turns by clicking
on the Tip Up or Tip Down buttons before obtaining movement.

222 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM)

Adjust Photodiode

In an analogous manner, you can use the photodiode positioner as a coarse adjustment for Setpoint
voltage. Changing the laser beam position on the photodiode by rotating the photodiode adjustment
knobs shifts the force curve on the graph. Rotating the top photodiode adjustment knob clockwise
shifts the curve up, just as decreasing the Setpoint parameter shifts the curve up. Conversely,
rotating the top photodiode adjustment knob clockwise moves the curve down.

13.4.3 Advanced Techniques

Sensitivity Determination

The Deflection Sensitivity allows conversion from the raw photodiode signal (in Volts) to
deflection of the cantilever (in nm), and is normally set from the Force Calibration mode. The
sensitivity must be calibrated before accurate deflection data can be obtained. Sensitivity is equal to
the inverse of the slope of the force curve while the cantilever is in contact with a hard sample
surface. Complete the following steps to calculate the sensitivity:

1. Obtain a good force curve on the display monitor using a hard sample so that the sample does
not deform.

2. Position the cursor on one end of the contact portion of the curve.

3. Click on the left mouse button to fix the line segment.

4. Drag the mouse to position the “rubber band line” parallel to the contact portion of the force
curve (see Figure 13.4d).

Figure 13.4d Set the Sensitivity Parameter

Click and drag line parallel to plot

5. The second click on the mouse causes the system to calculate the slope of the line segment
and enter the -1/slope as the Sensitivity in the panel.

6. A click of the right mouse button will remove the line segment from the screen.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 223

Force Imaging
Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM)

If Sensitivity is calibrated on a material much stiffer than the cantilever, it measures the inverse of
the value of the AFM’s optical lever sensitivity; i.e., how many volts of deflection signal are
produced by a given deflection of the cantilever tip. The sensitivity will change for different
cantilever lengths and styles (shorter cantilevers give lower Sensitivities). Sensitivity will also
change with the position of the laser on the cantilever and the quality of the laser beam reflection
from the cantilever.

Note: It is important to calibrate the Sensitivity parameter on a hard substrate as

described here BEFORE using the force curve’s vertical scale for quantitative
measurements.

Note: Deflection Sensitivity can be expressed in terms of the photodiode voltage

versus the distance traveled by the piezo, or the photodiode voltage versus the
voltage applied to the piezo, depending on the setting of the Units parameter.

Force Minimization

Force Calibration mode allows minimization of the contact force of the cantilever on the sample
surface. The force curve clearly illustrates the relationship between the Setpoint and the cantilever
deflection voltage when the cantilever is off the sample surface. You can adjust the Setpoint to set
the normal deflection of the cantilever and, therefore, the normal force applied by the cantilever
during data collection.

You can run the microscope below the point of zero deflection of the cantilever to minimize the
contact force of the cantilever on the sample. It is possible to get a negative deflection whenever the
cantilever sticks to the surface. To engage, you must the set Setpoint greater than the deflection
voltage when the tip is not interacting with the surface. However, you can change the setpoint after
engaging.

In Force Calibration mode, you can lower the setpoint to the zero cantilever-deflection point and
beyond, while viewing the force curve. You can adjust the setpoint (most often made more
negative) so that it lies between the flat segment of the force curve which corresponds to the zero
deflection point, and the tip of the retraction scan where the cantilever pulls off the sample surface
VCSmin (see Figure 13.4e). The contact force is at its minimum when VCSmin is on the centerline
of the deflection-signal axis (Setpoint = VCSmin).

In practice, VCSmin must be a little below the centerline because VCSmin is the point where the
cantilever pulls off the surface and operation at this deflection is unstable. Changing the Setpoint
option in the Feedback Controls panel changes the setting of the Setpoint parameter in its Image
Mode counterpart when you exit the Force Calibration Mode. After exiting, if the image looks
good, you can decrease the force further by lowering the Setpoint in small increments until the
cantilever pulls off the sample surface. Resetting the Setpoint to a value higher than the voltage
when the tip is not interacting with the surface, recaptures the cantilever. (Slowly adjust to a more
positive value until the tip is back on the surface.) Adjusting the Setpoint a few tenths of a volt
above the point where the cantilever pulled off provides a low contact force.

If a high initial contact force adversely affects the sample, engage the cantilever with a very small
scan size. Then, minimize the force while the tip is confined to a small area of the sample where it
experiences the relatively high initial engagement force. Once the force is minimized, increase the

224 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM)

Ramp size or offset the scan to a different area of the sample. However, keep in mind that if the
force is minimized in a smooth area of the sample, the cantilever may pull off when it translates to a
rougher part of the sample.

Calculating Contact Force

The force curve clearly shows the relationship between the setpoint and the deflection of the
cantilever. Because the setpoint defines the value of the deflection signal maintained by the
feedback loop, the force curve can be used to calculate the contact force of the tip on the sample if
the spring-constant, k , of the cantilever is known. The contact force is defined by the equation:
F = k×d

where “ d ” is the deflection measured from the setpoint to VCSmin in nanometers. An example of
how to compute the contact force from the Force Plot graph is shown in Figure 13.4e.

Figure 13.4e Computing Contact Force

Tip
Deflection
1.0 V / div

Setpoint

VCSmin

Z Position (10.0 V / div)

Recalling that contact force F = kd, we can calculate the contact force from the sample plot above.
0.6N
Let us assume, for example, that the spring constant of the cantilever is k = ------------ and that
m
70nm
deflection sensitivity = -------------- . The plot above may be measured at the points where the retract
V
portion of the curve intersects the setpoint to the pull-off (point). The distance is then multiplied
times the deflection sensitivity to obtain d . In this example:

d = (4.5 div) (1V/div) (70nm/v) = 315nm

Therefore, the contact force is calculated as:

F = (0.6N/m) (315nm)
= 189nN

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 225

Force Imaging
Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM)

When the Data type is set to Height with the feedback gains set high, the tip tracks the sample
surface with nearly constant deflection of the cantilever. When the cantilever deflection is constant,
the force is constant and the force calculation above determines the contact force between the tip
and the surface over the entire scan area.

Force calculations are not as straightforward on images captured with the Data type set to
Deflection. When collecting deflection data, the feedback gains are ideally set low so the sample
stays at a nearly constant position relative to the cantilever holder. In this case, the cantilever
deflection (and therefore the force applied to the sample) varies as features on the surface are
encountered. The contact force can be calculated by adding the deflection data from the image to d
before multiplying by the spring constant: F = k (deflection image data + d). Note that the
Sensitivity parameter must be accurate—that is, previously determined and entered—before the
deflection data will be accurate.

A simple alternative to calculating force is to follow these five steps:

1. Set sensitivity using the mouse.

2. Change units to metric.

3. Count vertical units from Setpoint to VCS min.

4. Multiply by Deflection Scale (adjacent to plot).

5. Multiply by the spring-constant, k.

226 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration (Contact Mode AFM)

13.4.4 Interpreting Force Curves

An examination of force curves can prove useful in determining adhesion, hardness, and elastic
characteristics of samples. The examples in Figure 13.4f represent some of the general variations in
force curves. For more information regarding force imaging, refer to Veeco’s application note
Probing Nano-Scale Forces with the Atomic Force Microscope.

Figure 13.4f Force Curve Examples

Large adhesion Small adhesion

Stiff sample Soft sample

Long-range repulsion Long-range attraction

Plastic Deformation

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 227

Force Imaging
Force Calibration (TappingMode)

13.5 Force Calibration (TappingMode)

CAUTION: Because TappingMode cantilevers are relatively stiff, Force Mode
can potentially damage the tip and/or surface. Before using Force
Calibration, read and understand the following section.

Force Mode allows the imaging of forces between the tip and surface, including chemical bonds,
electrostatic forces, surface tension and magnetic forces. In TappingMode, you can observe forces
by measuring changes in tip RMS amplitude, phase, or TM deflection. The user may collect force
plots in one of two forms: Force Plot and Force Volume. The two forms are similar, with Force
Volume generating a map of many individual force plots. To produce high-quality force plots, it is
necessary to precisely control tip position relative to the surface.

13.5.1 Force Plots

When performing Force Plot in TappingMode, the piezo moves to the center of the current X-Y
scan, then turns off the X-Y scan motion. Next, a triangular waveform is applied to the Z electrodes
of the piezo tube resulting in the oscillating tip moving up and down relative to the sample. The
same Z-axis piezo motion occurs in Contact Mode AFM force plots. However, in TappingMode,
the force plot is a graph of the piezo’s extension versus oscillating tip amplitude, phase or TM
deflection, instead of deflection or friction.

Uses of Force Calibration in TappingMode include characterizing forces on the cantilever tip,
diagnosing SPM performance, calibrating the RMS amplitude or TM deflection, and configuring
Lift Mode. For example, as the oscillating tip is brought closer to the surface, tip motion is
dampened, which shows as an immediate drop in amplitude. When plotted, the graph resembles
Figure 13.5a.

228 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration (TappingMode)

Figure 13.5a Piezo Extension Versus RMS Amplitude and Deflection

Piezo extension
1 Piezo retraction
5
Tip is clear of the surface

z - 10.00nm/div

036
z - 10.00nm/div

Figure 13.5a illustrates a two-channel TappingMode force plot. The vertical axes of the graphs
represent the amplitude (top) and TM deflection signal (bottom) of the cantilever. The position of
the Z piezo plots along the horizontal axis. Channel 1 (top) demonstrates how the cantilever
amplitude decreases as the tip moves closer to the sample. The plot represents the amplitude for one
complete extension-retraction cycle of the piezo. The scan rate parameter in the Main Controls
panel defines the rate at which the piezo completes an extension-retraction cycle; therefore, the rate
at which new curves display. At point 1, the tip encounters the sample surface. Upon encountering
the surface, the tip oscillation amplitude decreases, dropping off as the tip moves closer to the
sample surface. Between points 1 and 2, voltage to the Z piezo is increased, bringing the tip about
50 nm closer to the surface. Over the same interval, the cantilever amplitude diminishes about 2
volts due to dampening effects.

Collecting a force plot on a hard sample and dividing the change in amplitude by the change in Z
piezo position gives the responsiveness of the electronics that measure the amplitude. The
Amplitude Sensitivity value in the Main Controls menu is the inverse of the responsiveness. You
can determine this value by using the mouse to draw a line parallel to the plot’s slope in the region
between points 1 and 2 where the tip amplitude dampens. Tip damping occurs as a result of
mechanical-acoustic coupling between the tip and sample. As the z piezo is extended further,
oscillation eventually ceases and the amplitude drops to zero (point 2).

For TappingMode in air on a hard sample, each nanometer decrease in the cantilever position
decreases the peak-to-peak vibration of the cantilever by two nanometers. Once the tip encounters

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 229

Force Imaging
Force Calibration (TappingMode)

the sample surface, the oscillation amplitude of the cantilever decreases as the piezo is extended.
When the piezo turns around and begins to retract, the oscillation amplitude of the cantilever
increases until the tip is free of the surface, leveling off at the free-air amplitude (point 5).

Channel 2 (bottom) in Figure 13.5a plots average cantilever deflection (TM deflection) versus
piezo extension. The deflection signal is low-pass filtered to eliminate the high-frequency
TappingMode oscillation. Even as tip RMS amplitude dampens during its encounters with the
sample surface, the average deflection is unchanged. This condition changes once the tip is so close
to the sample that all oscillation ceases. Extending the piezo still further causes the average
deflection to increase, applying an increasing force to the sample (point 2).

At point 3 in Figure 13.5a,the cantilever begins to deflect. The region between points 3 and 4 may
be hazardous to the tip, because the tip is pressed firmly against the sample surface. Most single
crystal silicon TappingMode tips rapidly become dull in this region, depending upon the hardness
of the sample.

13.5.2 Obtaining a Force Plot (TappingMode)

CAUTION: Use Force Calibration with caution or when it is important to

obtain experimental information shown in Force Calibration.
When using stiff TappingMode cantilevers, it is easy to blunt the
tip with excess contact force during Force Calibration
measurements.

When obtaining force plots in TappingMode, set up scan parameters so that the reduction of
amplitude is minimal (approximately 25 percent of the free air amplitude). If the amplitude is
reduced to zero, the tip and sample may sustain damage.

To generate a TappingMode force plot of a silicon calibration reference, complete the following
steps:

1. Verify the cantilever holder is loaded with a TappingMode tip.

2. Mount the calibration reference on the SPM stage.

3. Set the AFM mode parameter to Tapping, engage, and obtain a TappingMode image.

Note: You are now in Image mode.

4. To switch to Force Mode, click on the Realtime > View > Force Mode > Calibration or
Advanced option. At least two panels should be visible:

• Main Controls

• Channel 1 Panel

230 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Calibration (TappingMode)

Note: Collectively, these panels control tip-sample interactions. If any panels do not
appear, pull down the Panels menu to select them. The Probe menu offers a
number of tip approach options detailed in the Command Reference Manual.

5. Set the Main Controls and Channel 1 panel parameters to the settings shown in Figure
13.5b.

Note: The Sensitivity value shown in Figure 13.5b may differ from yours.

Figure 13.5b TappingMode Force Plot Parameter Settings (Force Calibrate)

6. Set the Data type parameter to Amplitude under the Channel 1 panel. 037

7. Adjust the Z scan start parameter to obtain a satisfactory force plot using the left-right arrow
keys.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 231

Force Imaging
Force Calibration (TappingMode)

13.5.3 High Contact Force

Figure 13.5c shows a curve produced when the tip pushes too far into the sample. The flat portion
on the left side of the amplitude curve in Figure 13.5c occurs because the tip is so close to the
surface that it no longer vibrates. As the piezo extends the tip further, the amplitude of vibration
does not change because the tip is always in contact with the sample surface. The contact force is
very high due to the stiffness of the TappingMode cantilevers. The tip may shatter if deflection
continues.

Figure 13.5c Amplitude Force Plot with High Contact Force

3536

You can avoid this situation by using triggers (see Section 13.3.5) or by reducing the value of Z
scan start until there is no flat portion on the left side of the curve. Rapidly increasing the value of
Z scan start is dangerous because the total oscillation amplitude of the cantilever is small relative
to the total Z travel of the long-range scanner.

13.5.4 Tip Selection

You may use virtually any TappingMode tip to obtain TappingMode force plots; however, the
ultimate choice depends upon the delicacy of the sample and the magnitude of the forces to be
gauged. Longer cantilevers have lower spring constants (i.e., they are more pliant) and therefore
offer greater sensitivity for most samples. Shorter cantilevers afford better control when gauging
strong attractive forces and are less prone to entrapment by surface tension forces. Sharper tips are
more likely to plastically deform the sample, and are less sensitive to adhesive forces, than tips that
are more blunt. Experiment to determine the tip that best meets your needs.

232 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Modulation

13.6 Force Modulation

13.6.1 Introduction

This section describes the operation of force modulation mode, which you can use to image local
sample stiffness or elasticity. This method is useful for imaging composite materials or soft samples
on hard substrates where you can obtain contrast between regions of different elasticity. This
section assumes knowledge of operation of Contact Mode AFM in air (see Chapter 8). It is useful,
but not essential, to have experience operating in TappingMode (see Chapter 9).

Force modulation measures local sample elasticity by oscillating a cantilever such that the tip
indents slightly into a sample. The tip indents soft materials more easily than harder materials. The
amount of cantilever deflection is inversely related to the amount of indentation. For example, a soft
sample allows the tip to indent more deeply into the surface, resulting in a very small deflection of
the cantilever. A hard sample allows less indentation, with the cantilever deflected by a larger
amount. To measure the relative elasticity of the sample the system records the amplitude of the tip
deflection versus position over the sample as depicted in Figure 13.6a.

Figure 13.6a Contrast Generation in Force Modulation Mode

Small Cantilever
Response on Soft Material Large Cantilever Response
on Hard Material

Soft Material Hard Material

Large Indentation Small Indentation

Force modulation requires the use of a special optional cantilever holder, shown in Figure 13.6b.
This cantilever holder uses a piezoelectric bimorph to oscillate the cantilever against a sample
surface. The force modulation cantilever holder is similar to the standard tapping cantilever holder;
however, its piezo stack is much larger, allowing larger driving amplitudes.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 233

Force Imaging
Force Modulation

Figure 13.6b Force Modulation Cantilever Holder

Bimorph

13.6.2 Selecting a Force Modulation Tip

The key consideration when selecting a force modulation cantilever is its spring constant. Ideally,
the cantilever must have a spring constant which compliments the pliancy of the two contrasting
materials (or close to the pliancy of one, but not the other). This way, the tip indents into one
material more than the other providing good force modulation image contrast. If the tip is so stiff
that it indents equally into both materials, or so soft that it indents neither material, then you will
not see contrast in the force modulation image. Instead, the image will consist primarily of edge
and frictional artifacts. It may take experimentation to find a cantilever that matches the sample's
requirements. For rubber and plastic samples Veeco recommends using 225µm long force
modulation (Model # FESP) silicon cantilevers. For more delicate, samples, use 450µm long
silicon cantilevers or silicon nitride cantilevers. For hard materials, use stiffer tips like the 125µm
single crystal silicon TappingMode tips.

Veeco offers cantilevers with a wide range of spring constants (see Table 13.6a). Choosing a tip
depends upon how stiff the sample is For samples of unknown hardness, start with a force
modulation cantilever (Model FESP) and determine whether the tip is sufficiently stiff then adjust
accordingly.

234 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Modulation

Table 13.6a Force Modulation Tips

Model Cantilever Spring

Cantilever
No. Length Constant

SOFTER
Standard Silicon Nitride NP, DNP 100—200µm 0.01—0.6 N/m
Oxide-sharpened NP-S, 100—200µm 0.01—0.6 N/m
Silicon Nitride DNP-S
Contact AFM ESP 450µm 0.02—0.1 N/m
Etched Silicon
Force Modulation FESP 225µm 1—5 N/m
Etched Silicon
TappingMode LTESP 225µm 20—70 N/m

HARDER
Etched Silicon
TappingMode TESP 125µm 20—100 N/m
Etched Silicon

13.6.3 Operating Principle

Force modulation mode is very similar to Contact Mode AFM. The NanoScope system scans the
cantilever over the sample surface while trying to keep the cantilever deflection constant. The
deflection setpoint determines the average deflection during operation. In addition, the cantilever is
oscillated up and down by a piezoelectric bimorph in the tipholder so that the tip indents slightly
into the sample surface as it is scanned across the surface. The NanoScope system records the
amplitude of the cantilever, motion, which indicates the relative indentation of the tip into the
surface. For softer samples the tip penetrates further into the surface resulting in a smaller change in
the angle of the cantilever. A small change in angle results in a small measured amplitude which
displays as a bright area on the image. For harder samples the tip penetrates less into the surface
resulting in a larger change in angle of the cantilever. A large change in angle causes a large
measured amplitude which displays as a dark area on the image.

13.6.4 Force Modulation Procedure

This section gives instructions for operating in Force Modulation mode.

1. Choose the Force Modulation profile under Microscope > Profile.

2. Verify that the Microscope mode parameter in the Other Controls panel is set to Tapping
and the SPM Feedback in the Feedback Controls panel is set to TM Deflect.

3. Load the special force modulation cantilever holder with a cantilever. The procedure for
loading a cantilever is exactly the same as for operation with the standard air cantilever
holder.

Note: Refer to the section on Tip Selection earlier in this chapter to help you choose
an appropriate cantilever.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 235

Force Imaging
Force Modulation

4. Install the cantilever holder on the Dimension SPM head.

5. Align the laser on the cantilever.

Note: Methods for aligning the laser are discussed in Chapter 7.

6. Adjust the Setpoint. Begin with a Setpoint of 0V. Recall that higher setpoints cause the
cantilever to push harder on the surface during scanning.

7. Turn the photodetector adjustment knobs to center the laser spot on the laser detector. Adjust
the Vertical Deflection to approximately -0.5V for FESP or TESP cantilevers, -2V for NP
cantilevers.

Note: The force the cantilever applies to the surface is related to the difference
between the Vertical Deflection and the Setpoint and the spring constant of the
cantilever used. If the sample is very delicate, set the Vertical Deflection value
closer to the chosen Setpoint.

8. Find the Bimorph Resonant Frequency: The cantilever is oscillated by a small

piezoelectric bimorph mounted in the cantilever holder. For Force Modulation, oscillate the
bimorph at or near its resonant frequency. The bimorph resonance frequency is usually the
largest peak in the 5-30kHz range. This ensures the cantilever moves with sufficient
amplitude to produce elasticity contrast.

Note: You need to find the bimorph’s resonant frequency only once. (Resonant
frequencies are unique to each force modulation cantilever holder.) Once you
find the resonant frequency, write it down for future use. This Drive frequency
may be used as a starting place each time you perform force modulation
imaging; however, recheck the bimorph’s resonant frequency in free air using
Cantilever Tune each time you install a new cantilever.

a. Use a FESP or TESP cantilever. NP probes have confusing low frequency resonances.

b. Select View > Sweep > Cantilever Tune or click on the Cantilever Tune icon.

c. The display monitor plots the Frequency Sweep, showing cantilever oscillation
amplitude versus frequency. To set the parameters controlling the Frequency Sweep
plot, use the parameters in the Sweep Controls panel and the commands on the top
menu bar of the display monitor.

236 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Modulation

Figure 13.6c Auto Tune Controls Panel

019
d. Set the Drive frequency to 15kHz and the Sweep width to 30kHz.

e. Set the Drive amplitude at 1V to start. You can readjust this value later.

Note: A series of peaks display on the Frequency Sweep plot. A typical Frequency
Sweep plot is shown in Figure 13.6d.

Figure 13.6d Typical Frequency Sweep Plot

Peaks due to bimorph Peaks due to cantilever

Note: The large drive amplitude is necessary because peaks are smaller than normally
seen during TappingMode operation. This is due to the cantilever not at
resonance; therefore, its motion is mostly vertical. Vertical motion is not
amplified by the beam deflection detection technique which is sensitive
primarily to changes in cantilever angle.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 237

Force Imaging
Force Modulation

f. Adjust the Sweep width, Data scale and the Drive amplitude until you can clearly see
peaks. Bimorph resonances typically occur between 8-20kHz.

g. Choose a peak, then click on the Zoom In command (top menu bar of display monitor)
with the left mouse button. Two vertical lines appear on the Frequency Sweep plot.

h. Use the mouse to move the vertical lines until the selected peak is centered between the
lines.

i. Increase or decrease the zoom range by clicking the left mouse button.

j. When the peak centers and the zoom width is adjusted, double-click the right mouse
button to automatically adjust the Drive Frequency and Sweep width, and zoom in on
the selected peak.

k. Use the Offset command on the display monitor to center the peak in the graph. Click
on the Offset command with the left mouse button; a vertical, green line appears on the
plot.

l. Move the line until centered on the desired peak (usually the frequency with the highest
amplitude), then double-click the left button to lock it.

m. Click Execute. The computer automatically changes the Drive Frequency so that the
peak is centered. You may need to click on this command more than once to properly
center the peak.

Note: Once you choose the desired frequency, the Frequency Sweep plot should be
recentered similarly to the plot shown in (see Figure 13.6e).

n. Adjust the Drive amplitude so the maximum response amplitude is about 1V. Recenter
the peak if necessary.

Figure 13.6e Correctly Tuned Force Modulation Frequency

020

238 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Modulation

Note: You may also change the Drive Frequency by clicking on the Drive
Frequency parameter on the control monitor’s Feedback Controls panel, and
entering a new value.

Note: Bimorph resonance should be between 5 kHz and 30 kHz. If peaks are found at
a much higher frequency, these are cantilever resonances, not bimorph
resonances.

o. Record the Drive frequency. This is the resonant frequency of your force modulation
bimorph.

9. Select Stage > Locate Tip or click the Locate Tip icon.

10. Select Stage > Focus Surface or click the Focus Surface icon.

11. Check the scan parameters Scan speed, Scan size and Integral gain to verify they are
reasonable for Contact Mode AFM imaging. Also, it may be desirable to readjust the detector
mirror adjustment screws if the Vertical Difference signal has drifted from the value
originally set.

12. For the Channel 1 image, select Data Type > Height. Select Data Type > Amplitude for
the Channel 2 image. The multi-image capability views both the topography data and the
force modulation (elasticity) data at the same time.

13. Reduce the Drive Amplitude to 0 before engaging.

14. Select Motor > Engage.

Note: The motor moves the SPM head down towards the sample and stops once the
cantilever deflects to the chosen Setpoint. Under some conditions the system
may “false engage” before the cantilever actually reaches the surface. Increase
the Setpoint and engage again.

15. Adjust the Integral Gain, Proportional Gain, Setpoint, and Scan Speed to obtain a good
topography (Height) image. For force modulation operation, set the Integral Gain and
Proportional Gain to values of 1-10 and set the Setpoint as low as possible using the cursor
keys (or by typing in new Setpoint values) until the cantilever pulls off the surface and the Z-
center voltage jumps to -220V.

16. Record the Setpoint value where the cantilever pulls off the surface (the “pull-off value”).

17. Increase the Setpoint until the cantilever touches the surface, and an image appears. Then
decrease the setpoint to a value just above the value where the pull-off occurred.

Note: If you adjust the Setpoint very close to the pull-off value, imaging perform
with the smallest and least damaging force. However, in this condition imaging
may be more unstable, as the cantilever may pull off the surface unexpectedly.
The setpoint value affects the force modulation contrast. Examine the contrast
of the force modulation image.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 239

Force Imaging
Force Modulation

18. Optimize Drive amplitude for Force Modulation imaging. The amount of contrast and the
quality of both Height and Amplitude images depends on the Drive amplitude. In general,
increasing the Drive amplitude provides greater contrast in the force modulation image.

Note: It is possible to set the Drive amplitude too high. If this occurs, the Drive
amplitude no longer increases the contrast in the amplitude image. Instead, the
overall contrast in the force modulation image remains roughly constant, but
you will observe more artifacts in the image. For example, if the drive
amplitude is too high, the force modulation image becomes contaminated by
“edge effects” or “friction effects.” Operate at the lowest drive amplitude that
gives sufficient contrast to examine the sample. Low drive amplitudes also help
extend the life of the cantilever tip and reduce sample damage.

Procedure for Optimizing Drive Amplitude

1. Start with a small Drive amplitude value of 50mV.

2. Increase the Drive amplitude with the right arrow keys or type in new values. The contrast
of the Amplitude (force modulation) image increases.

3. Continue increasing the Drive amplitude until sufficient contrast appears in the Amplitude
image. If the Drive amplitude increases to the point where contrast is no longer improving,
reduce the Drive amplitude slightly.

Note: Force modulation contrast also depends on the Setpoint. In general, if using a
larger Setpoint (larger tracking force) use a smaller Drive Amplitude to obtain
good force modulation images without artifacts. If it is difficult to obtain a clear
force modulation image that is free of artifacts, try reducing or increasing the
Setpoint and then optimizing the Drive Amplitude.

4. Readjust gains (if necessary).

5. The value of the Drive amplitude may also affect the Contact Mode AFM image, causing
the system to go into unwanted oscillations. If the Drive amplitude changes by a large
amount, readjust the Integral gain and Proportional gain. Set the gains as high as possible
to track the sample topography, but not so high that they cause oscillation due to the bimorph
oscillation.

Sometimes an oscillation that appears in the data will be due to “aliasing” as described in the next
section. If you cannot adjust gains to eliminate unwanted oscillations without compromising the
height image’s quality, see Section 13.6.5.

240 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Modulation

13.6.5 Notes About Artifacts

It is possible to see artifacts in force modulation images that are not due to differences in elasticity.
Some artifacts to look for are outlined below:

Aliasing

Under some conditions, unwanted oscillations appear in the data due to aliasing of the Drive
Frequency with the image pixel rate. This problem can be eliminated by changing the Drive
Frequency by small increments. Use the arrow keys to change the Drive Frequency up or down
very slightly until the oscillation disappears. On some materials, shifting the Drive Frequency
slightly (1-3Hz) below or above a resonant peak value may improve image contrast. Operators are
encouraged to experiment.

Edge Effects

Sometimes force modulation images show changes in amplitude at the edge of topographic features
like steps or bumps. These artifacts typically look like the derivative of the sample topography.

To see if a feature is an edge effect, try reversing the Scan direction from Trace to Retrace, for
example. If the contrast reverses or the amplitude change now appears on the other side of the
topographic feature, then the amplitude change is likely due to the topographic edge, not
differences in elasticity. To minimize edge effects, reduce Drive amplitude, Setpoint or Scan
speed. Set the Integral gain and Proportional gain as high as possible without causing unwanted
oscillations.

Frictional Effects

Because the cantilever is held at an angle to the sample surface, the cantilever tip will slide laterally
(“skate”) as the tip pushes into the sample (see Figure 13.6f). The amplitude of cantilever motion is
affected by differences in friction between two different materials. For this reason, force
modulation images may contain information about differences in local frictional forces. To reduce
the influence of frictional effects, use a smaller Setpoint or Drive amplitude. Or, if you are using
“Negative LiftMode” (see Section 13.7), use a more positive Lift Height.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 241

Force Imaging
Force Modulation

Figure 13.6f Friction on Force Modulation Images

tip moves
down and left
substrate moves down

1516

Effect of friction on force modulation images

Tip Shape

The amount of indentation into a surface for a given applied force depends on the shape of the
cantilever tip. For the same Drive Amplitude a sharper tip indents deeper than a dull tip. Because it
is possible for the tip to dull during imaging, replace the cantilever if the force modulation contrast
deteriorates over time. Also, note that it will be difficult to obtain reproducible, quantitative
elasticity measurements between different samples and different cantilevers because the tip shapes
may be different. In general, the force modulation technique is a qualitative tool for identifying
regions of harder and softer material on a sample, rather than a tool for quantitative analysis.

Not all samples lend themselves to standard force modulation imaging. Even samples with
excellent elasticity contrast may not show up in force modulation if their absolute elasticity is out
of instrumental range. “Negative LiftMode” may prove useful for imaging otherwise difficult
materials (see Section 13.7.3).

242 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Modulation with ‘Negative LiftMode’

13.7 Force Modulation with ‘Negative LiftMode’

A new form of force modulation imaging utilizing TappingMode and LiftMode operation known as
“Negative LiftMode,” allows imaging of certain materials previously not visible with Contact Mode
AFM force modulation. This method is especially suited for softer materials, yielding higher
resolution. Best results using negative LiftMode are obtained on relatively smooth samples (<
500nm vertical features); however, Veeco encourages experimenting with this technique on
rougher surfaces as well. A general procedure for Force Modulation with “Negative LiftMode” is
described in Section 13.7.3.

Note: Force modulation contrast is very sensitive to the spring constant of the tip,
which varies according to the length and thickness of the cantilever. You may
perform TappingMode easily with either force modulation or TappingMode
cantilevers, but you may have difficulty with Contact Mode AFM silicon and
silicon nitride cantilevers. (see Table 13.6a).

1. Verify the probe is withdrawn from the sample surface.

2. Switch modes under Microscope > Profile to TappingMode.

3. Verify in the Main Controls panel that SPM Feedback = Amplitude.

13.7.1 Set Interleave Controls

In the Interleave Controls panel (select Panels > Interleave to open it if it is not open), set the
following

1. Click the Enable buttons next to the Drive frequency and Drive amplitude parameters;
when enabled the buttons appear green.

2. Set the Drive amplitude on the Interleave Controls panel to 200-400mV.

3. Set the Drive Frequency on the Interleave Controls panel to the bimorph resonant
frequency found in Section 13.6.4.

4. Set Lift start height and Lift scan height to 0.00nm.

5. For now, set the Interleave mode parameter to Disabled.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 243

Force Imaging
Force Modulation with ‘Negative LiftMode’

13.7.2 Obtain a TappingMode Image

While negative LiftMode force modulation data is imaged using Channel 2, height data is obtained
using TappingMode on Channel 1. You must obtain a satisfactory TappingMode image to generate
good data.

1. Verify that the Interleave mode parameter on the Interleave Controls panel is Disabled.

2. Verify that the AFM mode parameter in the Other Controls panel is set to Tapping.

3. Select Realtime > View > Sweep > Cantilever or the Cantilever Tune icon. Enter a
main controls Start frequency value of 5kHz and End frequency value of 100kHz for
FESP tips.

4. Set Target Amplitude to 1-2V, and click the Auto Tune button, or tune manually.

5. Click the Interleave Controls button to verify that the bimorph drive parameters are correct.

6. Exit the Cantilever Tune dialog box.

7. Verify that all Scan controls and Feedback Controls parameters are set for obtaining a
TappingMode image.

8. Set the Channel 1 panel Data type parameter to Height.

9. Set the Line direction to Retrace and enter an appropriate Data Scale value for your
sample.

10. Engage the tip on the surface and obtain a good TappingMode image.

13.7.3 Obtain a Negative LiftMode Force Modulation Image

1. Set the Data type parameter in the Channel 2 panel to Amplitude. Set the Line direction
parameter to Retrace.

2. Switch the Interleave mode parameter in the Interleave Controls panel to Lift. Negative
LiftMode imaging is now in effect.

3. Using the left arrow key, optimize the negative LiftMode image by slowly decreasing the
Lift scan height parameter in the Interleave Controls panel from zero until you reach the
surface. In most cases, you should not go below -60.0nm.

Note: This is sometimes best performed while in Realtime > View > Scope
Mode.When the interleaved scan is enabled, the tip’s TappingMode height
above the sample reduces by the Lift scan height amount. This places the
oscillating tip in contact with the sample as surface features are profiled. The
contrast between light and dark reveals areas of high and low elasticity, with the
dark area indicating harder material and the lighter areas indicating softer
material.

244 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Force Imaging
Force Volume

Note: If the Lift scan height is too large, the interleave may be tapping, and therefore
not in the continuous contact required for force modulation.

4. Adjust the interleaved Drive amplitude and Lift scan height until the force modulation
image is optimized. This may require some experimentation.

Note: If you see a lot of contrast in the amplitude image before reaching the surface,
try reducing the Integral and Proportional gains in the Feedback Controls
panel. Adjust gains slightly lower than when performing normal TappingMode
imagery. Verify by setting a Lift scan height of 100nm, then adjusting the
gains (and possibly Drive amplitude) until you see the minimum amount of
contrast in the amplitude image. Once you minimize contrast, enter a Lift scan
height of 0.0nm and approach the surface.

13.8 Force Volume

Force volume imaging with the atomic force microscope (AFM), available with NanoScope
software versions 4.22 and higher, combines force measurement and topographic imaging
capabilities. A force volume data set can be used to map in two or three dimensions the interaction
forces between a sample and the AFM tip and correlate the force data with topographic
information. Possible applications include elasticity, adhesion, electrostatic, magnetic, and binding
studies. Advantages of force volume imaging include the ability to collect distributions of forces at
various Z-positions and at thousands of XY positions during a single image scan, correlation of
surface topography to interaction force, better quantization of the interaction force, and new
methods of analysis. For detailed information regarding force volume imaging, contact Veeco for a
copy of Support Note 240A, Force Volume.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 245/(242 Blank)

Chapter 14 Interleave Scanning

This chapter provides general information regarding the Interleave procedure and commands, with
emphasis on LiftMode. Specifically, this chapter details the following topics:

• Preface: Interleave Scanning & LiftMode: Section 14.1

• Interleave Mode Description: Section 14.2

• LiftMode Description: Section 14.3

• Operation of Interleave Scanning / LiftMode: Section 14.4

• Use of LiftMode with TappingMode: Section 14.5

• Main Drive Amplitude and Frequency selection: Section 14.5.1

• Setpoint Selection: Section 14.5.2

• Interleave Drive Amplitude and Frequency Selection: Section 14.5.3

• Amplitude Data Interpretation: Section 14.5.4

• Cantilever Oscillation Amplitude: Section 14.5.5

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 247

Interleave Scanning
Preface: Interleave Scanning & LiftMode

14.1 Preface: Interleave Scanning & LiftMode

Interleave is an advanced feature of NanoScope software which allows the simultaneous
acquisition of two data types. Enabling Interleave alters the scan pattern of the piezo. After each
main scan line trace and retrace (in which topography is typically measured), a second (Interleave)
trace and retrace is made with data acquired to produce an image concurrently with the main scan.

Typical applications of interleave scanning include MFM (magnetic force microscopy) and EFM
(electric force microscopy) measurements; Chapter 15 provides detailed instructions for obtaining
MFM images of a standard magnetic sample. Enabling Interleave with the mode set to Lift enacts
LiftMode. During the interleave scan, the feedback is turned off and the tip is lifted to a user-
selected height above the surface to perform far field measurements such as MFM and EFM. By
recording the cantilever deflection or resonance shifts caused by the magnetic or electric forces on
the tip, a magnetic force or electric force image is produced; see Chapter 15. LiftMode was
developed to isolate purely MFM and EFM data from topographic data.

Interleave can also be used in Interleave Mode. In this mode, the feedback is kept on while
additional topography, phase lateral force, or force modulation data is acquired.

The Interleave commands utilize a set of Interleave Controls which allow several scan controls
(Drive amplitude, Setpoint, and various gains) to be set independently of those in the main scan
controls.

This chapter provides a general discussion of the Interleave action and commands, with emphasis
on LiftMode. Chapter 15 provides step-by-step instructions for using Interleave scanning and
LiftMode for obtaining magnetic and electric force data. For purposes of learning to use
Interleave scanning, this section may be useful even to those users whose end application is not
magnetic force microscopy.

248 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Interleave Scanning
Interleave Mode Description

14.2 Interleave Mode Description

Enabling Interleave changes the scan pattern of the tip relative to the imaged area. With Interleave
mode disabled, the tip scans back and forth in the fast scan direction while slowly moving in the
orthogonal direction as shown on the left of Figure 14.2a. This is the standard scan pattern of the
NanoScope.

Figure 14.2a X-Y Scan Pattern

INTERLEAVE INTERLEAVE
DISABLED ENABLED
(standard)
four Main and four Interleave
four scan lines
(trace/retrace pairs) scan lines shown
shown

slow scan
direction
INTERLEAVE
trace and retrace
With INTERLEAVE enabled scanner executes
fast scan trace/retrace pairs, alternately performing a
direction MAIN trace
and retrace MAIN pair, then an INTERLEAVED pair.
Vertical Scan speed is 1/2 normal rate with
twice the number of lines.

With Interleave mode enabled, the system first performs a standard trace and retrace with the Main
Feedback Controls in effect. The tip moves at half the normal rate in the slow scan direction. As
shown on the right of Figure 14.2a, an additional trace and retrace are then performed with the
Interleave Feedback Controls enacted. The frame rate halves because twice as many scan lines
are performed for the same scan rate.

Four modes are possible for Interleave scan: Interleave, Linear, Retrace Lift and Lift. With
Interleave selected, the feedback remains on during the interleave pass with the values under
Interleave Feedback Controls (Setpoint, Gains, etc.) in effect. In LiftMode, the feedback is
instead turned off, and the tip lifted off the surface and scanned at a user-selected height.
Topography data recorded during the main pass is used to keep the tip a constant distance from the
surface during the Interleave trace and retrace. In Linear mode, the tip is lifted above the surface
to the specified height using the median value of the main scan line as the reference for the lift
height. If there are any features taller than the lift height you entered, the system will lift the tip over
those features rather than crashing the tip. In Retrace Lift the tip is on the surface during the main
scan, and lifts during the retrace scan line.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 249

Interleave Scanning
LiftMode Description

14.3 LiftMode Description

With the Interleave scan option set to Lift, the motion of the tip during the Interleave trace and
retrace is as shown in Figure 14.3a.

Figure 14.3a LiftMode Profiles

Lift Trace

Main Trace Lift

Scan
(Height Data)
Height
Lift Lift
Start Scan
Height Height

The tip first moves to the Lift start height, then to the Lift scan height. A large Lift start height
can be used to pull the tip from the surface and eliminate sticking. The Lift scan height is the final
tip height. This value is added point-by-point to the height data obtained during the Main
topography trace and retrace. Values can be positive or negative.

14.4 Operation of Interleave Scanning / LiftMode

These instructions apply to STM, contact AFM, or TappingMode AFM modes. It is assumed the
user is familiar with TappingMode or contact AFM to obtain good images of surface topography.
Use of interleave scanning requires the steps below; see Chapter 13 for specific examples using
MFM.

1. Obtain a topography scan using the appropriate (usually Contact or TappingMode) method:
When using LiftMode, it is important that the gains and setpoint under Feedback Controls
be adjusted to give a faithful image of the surface. Because the height data is used in the lift
pass to trace the topography, a poor measurement of surface height may give inaccurate
measurement during the lift pass or cause the tip to strike the surface. Typically, the height
data is displayed on Channel 1.

2. Adjust the Interleave Controls panel to desired settings: Choose the Interleave Mode
(Interleave, Lift, Linear or Retrace Lift) appropriate for the measurements to be
performed. Set the Interleave Controls as desired. When using TappingMode, the Drive
amplitude, Drive frequency, Gains, and Setpoint can be set differently in the Interleave
Controls panel than in the main Feedback Controls panel; see Section 14.5. However, it is
often convenient to begin with the main and interleave values set equal; this can be done by
toggling the bullets to the left of the appropriate Interleave parameters to an “off” (grayed)
condition. The values can be changed once engaged. If using Lift, set the Lift start height
and Lift scan height. If using Interleave Mode, set the Gains and Setpoint.

250 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Interleave Scanning
Use of LiftMode with TappingMode

Note that certain constraints are imposed: scan sizes, offsets, angles, and rates and numbers of
samples per scan line are the same for the main and interleave data, and the imaging context
(contact, TappingMode, or force modulation) must also match.

3. Choose the Interleave Data Type: Depending on the type of microscope, Interleave mode
allows the options of amplitude, phase, frequency, potential, input potential, or data types for
doing far-field (MFM or EFM) imaging; see Chapter 15 for detailed examples. Auxiliary
channels are also available for some applications.

Once the Interleave Data Type is chosen, Interleave mode is automatically enabled, triggering
interleave scanning. Interleave data typically displays as the second (right) image. Note that the
scan rate in the slow direction is halved.

4. Display the interleave data by switching Scan line (in the Channel panels) to Interleave.

• Lift scan height: The lateral and vertical resolutions of the Lift data depend on the
distance between tip and sample: the lower the tip, the higher the resolution. However,
the Lift scan height must be high enough that the tip does not contact the sample during
the Lift trace and retrace.

• Tip Shape: As shown in Figure 14.3a, the tip separation in the LiftMode is defined in
terms of the Z direction only. The Lift scan height is added to the height values taken
from previous scan lines point-by-point. However, the tip may be closer to the sample
than the Z separation indicates. On features with steep edges, the tip may get very close
to the sample even though the Z separation is constant; see Figure 14.3a.

• Scan Line Direction: The Line direction should be set to Retrace for both the main
and interleaved scans. If it is set instead to Trace, a band may appear along the left side
of the images due to the ramp between the surface and the Lift scan height.

14.5 Use of LiftMode with TappingMode

There are additional considerations when using LiftMode with TappingMode.

14.5.1 Main Drive Amplitude and Frequency selection

As usual, these parameters are set in Cantilever Tune before engaging. It is helpful to keep in mind
the measurements to be done in LiftMode when setting these values. For example, if Amplitude
data will be monitored during the Lift scan for magnetic force imaging, the Drive frequency
should be set to the side of the resonance; see Chapter 15. (However, certain parameters can be set
independently for the interleave scan; see below.)

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 251

Interleave Scanning
Use of LiftMode with TappingMode

14.5.2 Setpoint Selection

When the main and interleave Drive amplitudes and Drive frequencies are equal (bullets under
Interleave Controls disabled), the cantilever oscillation amplitude increases to the free oscillation
amplitude when the tip is lifted off the surface in LiftMode. If a small setpoint value forces the
oscillation amplitude low while the feedback is running, the amplitude can grow considerably when
the tip is lifted free of the sample surface. The change can also be large if the main Drive
amplitude was increased or the main Drive frequency altered after the tip was engaged. (The
vibration amplitude remains at the setpoint during the main scan even if these parameters are
changed.) This could make the tip hit the surface in the lift scan for small Lift scan Heights.

14.5.3 Interleave Drive Amplitude and Frequency Selection

The cantilever drive amplitude can be set differently in the Lift scan as compared to the main scan
by toggling the flag on the left of the corresponding Interleave Control to “on” (green) and
adjusting the value. This allows the tuning of a measurement in the Lift scan lines without
disturbing the topography data acquired during the Main scan lines. The Interleave Drive
amplitude must be set low enough that the tip does not strike the surface during the Lift pass.

WARNING: Before enabling the Interleave Drive Amplitude, check that its
value is not much larger than the main Drive Amplitude value to
prevent possible damage to the tip.

AVERTISSEMENT:Lors d’un travail en mode intercalé (Interleave Mode), vérifier

que la tension appliquée pour osciller le bras de levier lorsqu’il est
en positon haute n’est pas beaucoup plus importante que la tension
appliquée lorsque ce même bras de levier est en position basse
(Main Drive Amplitude). Le non respect de cette procédure peut
entraîner la destruction de la pointe.

WARNUNG: Bevor Sie im Interleave-Mode die “Interleave Drive-

Amplitude“ einschalten, vergewissern Sie sich bitte, daß der dort
eingetragene Wert nicht wesentlich größer ist, als der Wert der
“Main Drive-Amplitude“, um evtl. Beschädigungen der Spitze
vorzubeugen.

The Interleave Drive frequency can also be adjusted, which may be useful if acquiring amplitude
data in LiftMode; see Chapter 15.

Note: The cantilever drive circuit features a filter capacitor to limit the rate at which
the drive amplitude is changed between Main and Interleave scanning. If
using scan rates above a few hertz, it may be advantageous to remove or disable
the filter. For more information on how to disable the filter, contact Veeco
technical support.

252 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Interleave Scanning
Use of LiftMode with TappingMode

14.5.4 Amplitude Data Interpretation

When monitoring amplitude data in LiftMode, brighter regions correspond to smaller amplitude,
and darker regions to larger amplitude.

14.5.5 Cantilever Oscillation Amplitude

The selection of the oscillation amplitude in LiftMode depends on the quantity to be measured. For
force gradients which are small in magnitude but occur over relatively large distances (sometimes
hundreds of nm, as with magnetic or electric forces), the oscillation amplitude can be large, which
for some applications may be beneficial. The Lift scan height must be correspondingly large so
that the tip does not strike the surface. However, the lateral resolution of far field (MFM or EFM)
measurements decreases with distance from the surface. Typically, the resolution is limited to a
value (in nm) roughly equal to the Lift scan height; see Chapter 15.

Small amplitudes must be used to sense force gradients, such as Van der Waals forces, which occur
over short distances (typically a few nm). As much of the cantilever travel as possible should be
within the range of the force gradient.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 253/(246 Blank)

Chapter 15 Magnetic Force Microscopy

This chapter describes how to perform Magnetic Force Microscopy (MFM) using the Interleave
and LiftMode procedures discussed in Chapter 14. Please review those sections prior to attempting
MFM. Best results will be obtained with either the Digital Instruments Basic Extender Electronics
Module or the Quadrex Extender Module. These hardware units allows phase detection and
frequency modulation for optimal MFM imaging.

Specifically, this chapter discusses the following topics:

• Magnetic Force Microscopy: Section 15.1

• Force Gradient Detection: Section 15.1.1

• Amplitude Detection Techniques: Section 15.1.2

• Basic MFM Operation: Section 15.2

• MFM Using LiftMode: Section 15.2.1

• Magnetic Force Microscopy Procedure: Section 15.2.2

• Advanced MFM Operation: Section 15.3

• Lift Scan Height and Magnetic Imaging Resolution: Section 15.3.1

• Fine Tuning Interleave Controls: Section 15.3.2

• Drive Amplitude: Section 15.3.3

• Installation of the Electronics Modules: Section 15.4

• Phase Extender Module: Section 15.4.1

• Quadrex Extender: Section 15.4.2

• NanoScope IV: Section 15.4.3

• Software Setup Configuration (Phase, Quadrex or NSIV): Section 15.5

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 255

Magnetic Force Microscopy
Magnetic Force Microscopy

• Troubleshooting: Section 15.6

• MFM Image Verification: Section 15.6.1

• Saturation in Amplitude Detection: Section 15.6.2

• Optical Interference: Section 15.6.3

15.1 Magnetic Force Microscopy

In MFM, a tapping cantilever equipped with a special tip first scans over the surface of the sample
to obtain topographic information. Using LiftMode as shown in Figure 15.1a, the tip then raises
just above the sample surface. The surface topography from the initial scan is added to the lift
height to maintain constant separation during the lifted scan. The influence of magnetic force is
measured using the principle of force gradient detection.

15.1.1 Force Gradient Detection

In the absence of magnetic forces, the cantilever has a resonant frequency f0. This frequency is
shifted by an amount ∆f proportional to vertical gradients in the magnetic forces on the tip. The
shifts in resonant frequency tend to be very small, typically in the range 1-50 Hz for cantilevers
having a resonant frequency f0 ~100 kHz. These frequency shifts can be detected three ways: phase
detection which measures the cantilever’s phase of oscillation relative to the piezo drive;
amplitude detection which tracks variations in oscillation amplitude; and frequency modulation
which directly tracks shifts in resonant frequency. Phase detection and frequency modulation
produce results that are generally superior to amplitude detection.

Figure 15.1a MFM LiftMode Principles

4 5

2 1

Magnetic Fields

1. Cantilever traces surface topography on first trace.

2. Cantilever retraces surface topography on first retrace.
3. Cantilever ascends to Lift scan height.
4. Lifted cantilever profiles topography while responding to magnetic influences (second trace).
5. Lifted cantilever reprofiles topography while responding to magnetic influences (second retrace).

256 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Magnetic Force Microscopy
Magnetic Force Microscopy

15.1.2 Amplitude Detection Techniques

All standard Dimension-series SPMs are capable of MFM imaging using amplitude detection
techniques. By adding the Phase Extender or Quadrex Extender Electronics Modules to a
NanoScope III or IIIa controller, or by using a NanoScope IV controller, the Dimension 3100 may
be used for frequency modulation or phase detection with improved results (see Figure 15.1b and
Figure 15.1c). Amplitude detection has largely been superseded by frequency modulation and
phase detection. A more extensive discussion of force gradient detection and MFM imaging is
given in the reprint Magnetic Force Microscopy: Recent Advances and Applications. Contact Veeco
to obtain a copy.

Figure 15.1b Extender Electronics Module for NanoScope III, IIIa Controllers

Figure 15.1c Quadrex PhaseImaging Module for NanoScope IIIa Controllers

006

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 257

Magnetic Force Microscopy
Basic MFM Operation

15.2 Basic MFM Operation

In the instructions below, steps specific to phase and amplitude imaging are described
independently. Use the icons in the margin to locate steps specific to either frequency modulation
and phase detection, or amplitude detection.

15.2.1 MFM Using LiftMode

LiftMode allows the imaging of relatively weak but long-range magnetic interactions while
minimizing the influence of topography (see Figure 15.1a). Measurements are taken in two passes
across each scan line; each pass consists of one trace and one retrace. In the first pass,
topographical data is taken in TappingMode. The tip is then raised to the lift scan height and a
second trace and retrace performed while maintaining a constant separation between the tip and
local surface topography. Magnetic interactions are detected during this second pass. In LiftMode,
topographical features are virtually absent from the MFM image (see Figure 15.2e).

This section provides instructions for using the LiftMode of Interleave Scanning to obtain MFM
images. These guidelines will help you obtain an MFM image of a standard magnetic sample
(metal-evaporated video tape). Standard tape samples are provided with purchase of MFM probes,
and can be obtained free of charge from Veeco. Other samples can also be used; however, you will
not have the benefit of comparing your results with the images shown here. Obtaining a good image
of the tape sample will familiarize you with Interleave and MFM techniques and provide a check
that the system is correctly tuned to image magnetic samples. Many of the principles discussed here
also apply to Electric Force Microscopy (EFM).

As mentioned above, the NanoScope controllers use force gradient detection for MFM imaging.
Within this general technique, there are three possible schemes, known as frequency modulation,
phase detection, and amplitude detection. Phase detection and frequency modulation are available
for all TappingMode-capable microscopes in the form of the Basic Extender Electronics Module
(Basic) and Quadrex Extender Electronics Module (Quadrex). (Microscopes without an Extender
addition cannot utilize phase detection; for more information, contact Veeco.) The NanoScope IV
design integrates the Quadrex. Phase detection and frequency modulation detection are superior
methods for magnetic force imaging, offering greater ease of use, better signal-to-noise ratios, and
reduced artifact content as compared to amplitude detection. Extender electronics are strongly
recommended for extensive MFM imaging.

For MFM procedures, magnetic-coated tips are required. Various kinds of MFM probes are
available for specific applications; contact Veeco for more information. For specific information
regarding TappingMode and Interleave Scanning please refer to Chapter 9 and Chapter 14
respectively.

The procedure below suggests parameter values that should work well for most applications.
Further adjustment, in some cases, will improve the quality of MFM scans. Some experimentation
may be needed to optimize the imaging of specific samples. See the suggestions at the end of this
section.

258 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Magnetic Force Microscopy
Basic MFM Operation

15.2.2 Magnetic Force Microscopy Procedure

1. Magnetize a NanoProbe magnetic probe with a strong permanent magnet before installing
the tip holder on the AFM head.

Note: Tips are usually magnetized with the field aligned along the tip axis
(perpendicular to the sample surface). The MFM then senses force gradients
due to the perpendicular component of the samples’s stray field. Tip
magnetizers can be purchased from Veeco.

2. Mount a NanoProbe magnetic probe on the scanner or tip holder.

3. Set up the AFM for TappingMode operation (see Chapter 9).

4. In all Channel panels, set the Highpass and Lowpass filters to Off.

5. Set the Rounding parameter in the Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner window to zero (0).

6. Tune the cantilever drive frequency.

Note: The procedure to tune the cantilever drive amplitude depends on whether you
are using phase detection or amplitude detection. Both cases rely on automatic
Cantilever tune just as when preparing for TappingMode (see Chapter 9).
MFM cantilevers have resonant frequencies between 50 and 100 kHz. If using
the AutoTune feature, these values can be used as bounds for the frequency
sweep. With the Extender option, two curves appear in the Cantilever Tune
box: the amplitude curve in white, and the phase curve in yellow (see Figure
15.2a). Microscopes without the Extender Electronics Module display only the
amplitude curve.

Setting a Drive Frequency for Phase Detection

The Drive frequency should be set to the center of the cantilever resonance, as shown in Figure
15.2a. This occurs automatically if using AutoTune.

Figure 15.2a Cantilever Tune for Phase Detection and Frequency Modulation
007

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 259

Magnetic Force Microscopy
Basic MFM Operation

To correctly track the cantilever phase, the Phase offset parameter must be adjusted. This
automatically occurs in AutoTune; alternatively, Zero Phase can be selected from the Channel 2
panel. The phase curve should appear as in Figure 15.2a, decreasing with increasing frequency and
crossing the center line (corresponding to a 90° phase lag) at the peak frequency. The phase curve
then measures the phase lag between the drive voltage and the cantilever response. Again, vertical
gradients in the magnetic force cause a shift ∆f0 in the resonance frequency. In this case, resonance
shifts give rise to phase shifts ∆φ which then give an image of the magnetic force gradients (see
Figure 15.2b).

Note: The Extender electronics give a measure of the phase lag of the cantilever
oscillation relative to the piezo drive. This measurement is monotonic versus
frequency as is the true phase lag in degrees. The Extender measurement has
slightly different nonlinear characteristics vs. frequency. The measurement
technique allows optimal signal-to-noise ratios; however, absolute values of
phase data should be taken as approximate. Users requiring quantitative
measures of force gradient are advised to use frequency modulation (see
Frequency Modulation: Page 263).

Figure 15.2b Shift In Phase at Fixed Drive Frequency

180
∆F0
Phase (deg)

90
∆φ

0
Drive Frequency

Setting a Drive Frequency for Amplitude Detection

1. Use the AutoTune feature to find the resonance peak.

2. Select the Offset function under the Cantilever Tune pop-down menu to manually move the
drive frequency to the side of the resonance (see Figure 15.2b).

3. Set the Drive Frequency to the steepest part of the resonance curve for maximum
sensitivity.

Note: As the tip oscillates above the sample, a gradient in the magnetic force will
shift the resonance frequency f0 (see Figure 15.2c). Tracking the variations in
oscillation amplitude while in LiftMode yields an image of the magnetic force
gradients.

260 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Magnetic Force Microscopy
Basic MFM Operation

Figure 15.2c Cantilever Tune for Amplitude Detection

008
Figure 15.2d Shift in Amplitude at Fixed Drive Frequency

∆F0
Amplitude

Drive Frequency

4. Select an appropriate Target Amplitude (approximately 2V) using Auto Tune to adjust the
Drive Amplitude so that the RMS voltage response of the photodetector is approximately
2V before tuning. Or, exit Cantilever Tune and manually adjust the Drive Amplitude
parameter under Feedback Controls.

Note: Somewhat larger values may be beneficial if using amplitude detection.

5. Quit Cantilever Tune and return to Image Mode.

6. Under Interleave Controls set the Lift start height to 0nm, and Lift scan height to 100nm.

Note: The lift height can be optimized later.

7. Set the remaining Interleave parameters (Setpoint, Drive Amplitude, Drive frequency,
Gains) to the Main Controls values by setting the flags left of the Interleave Control
column to Off.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 261

Magnetic Force Microscopy
Basic MFM Operation

8. Under Scan Controls, set the Scan size to 5µm and Scan rate to 1–2Hz.

9. Set the Channel 1 Data type to Height, the Data scale to 75nm and the Line direction to
Retrace.

10. Engage the AFM and make the necessary adjustments to obtain a good topographical image
while displaying height data.

CAUTION: Use the highest possible Setpoint to ensure that the tip is
contacting the surface only lightly. The image should be similar to
the topographic image shown on the left of Figure 15.2e. The
surface is fairly flat with lubrication nodules of various sizes. A
good image of the nodules indicates that the tip is sharp.

Figure 15.2e Topographic (left) and Magnetic Force Gradient Image (right)

Note: The MFM data displays in Channel 2; however, the parameter settings are
different depending on whether Phase Detection or Amplitude Detection is
being used

262 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Magnetic Force Microscopy
Basic MFM Operation

Phase Detection

Set the Channel 2 image Data type to Phase; Z range to 3 degrees; and Line direction to
Retrace.

Note: It is important that the Scan direction be set to Retrace for both the main and
interleave scans. If instead it is set to Trace, a band may appear along the left
side of the images due to the time taken for the tip to move between the surface
and the lift scan height.

Amplitude Detection

1. Set the Channel 2 image Data type to Amplitude, Z range to 1nm, and Line direction to
Retrace.

2. Change Interleave mode to Enable to invoke LiftMode.

3. Set the Channel 2 Scan line to Interleave to display the interleaved data.

Note: This can only be done after Interleave mode is Enabled. A magnetic force
gradient image similar to that shown on the right of Figure 15.2e should appear
as the Channel 2 image. The alternating dark and light stripes represent the
recorded magnetic information, signifying a varying resonant frequency and
magnetic force gradient on the tip.

Note: Keep the Setpoint as large as possible while consistent with a good image.
Wider scans (> 25µm) will reveal separate tracks in which the magnetic stripes
are at different angles

Frequency Modulation

With the Extender Electronics Module, it may be desirable to use frequency modulation. This
activates a feedback loop which modulates the Drive Frequency to keep the cantilever phase lag at
90 degrees relative to the drive, corresponding to resonance. The frequency Data Type displays the
resulting shift in Drive Frequency in Hz, and gives the most direct, quantitative image of force
gradients.

To enable frequency modulation, follow the procedure above for obtaining an MFM image with
phase detection with the following modifications:

1. In the Interleave Controls panel, set the Input Feedback to Frequency. Turn on this
parameter by selecting the gray button next to Frequency. When selected, the gray button
becomes green, indicating the control is on.

2. Switch the Channel 2 image Data type to Frequency. Try a Data scale (frequency shift) of
approximately 10 Hz.

3. Select Other Controls, then adjust the frequency modulation gains:

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 263

Magnetic Force Microscopy
Advanced MFM Operation

Table 15.2a Frequency Modulation Gains Initial Settings

SPM Controller Integral Gain Proportional Gain

Phase Extender 50 50
Quadrex Extender 0.6 0.6
NanoScope IV 0.6 0.6

As with topography gains, the scan can be optimized by increasing the gains to maximize feedback
response, but not so high that oscillation sets in.

15.3 Advanced MFM Operation

15.3.1 Lift Scan Height and Magnetic Imaging Resolution

The most important parameter affecting imaging resolution is Lift scan height. The range of 10–
200nm is most useful. In general, MFM resolution is roughly equal to the lift height. Smaller Lift
scan heights give better resolution; magnetic features smaller than the Lift scan height may not be
resolved. The tip also experiences stronger fields close to the surface, giving improved signal-to-
noise ratios.

For example, the image of metal-evaporated tape in Figure 15.2e has a resolution limited by the 100
nm Lift scan height. To improve the resolution, try reducing the Lift scan height to ~ 25nm.
Ensure that the tip does not strike the surface on the low point of its swing in the Lift image. Tip
strikes appear as black or white spots, or even noisy, high-contrast streaks crossing the image. If the
tip begins to strike the surface, reduce the Interleave Drive Amplitude. (In general, MFM tips are
not damaged by intermittent tip strikes in LiftMode, except in extreme cases of very large
amplitude and small lift heights.) An example of an image of the metal-evaporated tape taken with
a Lift scan height of 30nm is shown in Figure 15.3a. Note the fine magnetic structure that is not
visible in Figure 15.2e. When imaging a sample for the first time, begin with moderate Lift scan
heights (50nm or greater), then adjust downward. On relatively smooth samples (e.g., hard disks),
lift heights down to 0nm can be used, as long as the drive amplitude is adjusted accordingly. (Lift
scan heights of 0nm still correspond to a non-zero mean tip-sample distance. See the section on
Setpoint below.) It is usually not beneficial to use Lift scan heights much smaller than the surface
roughness. Users are encouraged to experiment for the best images on their samples.

The ultimate lateral resolution of MFM is near 20nm. Resolution is affected by properties of the tip,
including mechanical sharpness and magnetic structure. When in good condition, magnetically-
coated tips routinely give 50nm resolution, and many achieve 30nm or better.

264 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Magnetic Force Microscopy
Advanced MFM Operation

Figure 15.3a High-resolution Magnetic Force Gradient Image

15.3.2 Fine Tuning Interleave Controls

Certain scanning parameters found under Interleave Controls can be set to values in the Interleave
(Lift) scan that differ from the values in the main scan. These parameters are enabled by clicking on
the circular flag to the immediate left of the desired Interleave control, toggling its state from Off
(gray bullet) to On (green bullet). When the flag is set to Off, the main scan control parameter
setting takes precedence. When the flag is set to On the displayed Interleave scan value is active,
overriding the main scan value.

15.3.3 Drive Amplitude

For MFM, of particular use is the Interleave Drive Amplitude. This parameter can affect a
magnetic force image in a variety of ways.

• Increasing the Drive Amplitude can improve the signal-to-noise ratio when using phase
detection or frequency modulation. This is because intrinsic, low-level noise interferes
less when measuring the phase of a larger cantilever oscillation amplitude and hence
stronger photodetector output. As an illustration, try setting the Interleave Drive
Amplitude to 0; the resulting phase image will be pure noise because one cannot
measure the phase of a non-oscillating cantilever.

• In LiftMode, the Interleave Drive Amplitude can often be set to a value larger than in
the main scan, thus giving optimal signal-to-noise. In some cases this is beneficial as
long as the Drive Amplitude is not increased to the extent that the tip strikes the surface
on the low point of its swing. The signatures of tip-sample contact are white and black
spots in the image, or, in extreme cases, noisy, high-contrast streaks across the whole

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 265

Magnetic Force Microscopy
Advanced MFM Operation

image. It is usually safe to increase the Drive Amplitude until the first signs of tip strike
are noticed, then reduce the amplitude slightly.

• Before enabling the Interleave Drive Amplitude, check that its value is not much larger
than the main Drive Amplitude value. This prevents the cantilever oscillation from
jumping to a very large amplitude when the parameter is enabled, possibly damaging
the tip. The Drive Amplitude can be adjusted even when the parameter is disabled
(i.e., when the flag is set to Off [gray bullet]).

CAUTION: Before enabling the Interleave Drive Amplitude, check that its
value is not much larger than the main Drive Amplitude value to
prevent possible damage to the tip.

ATTENTION: Lors d’un travail enmode intercalé (Interleave Mode) vérifier que
la valeur de tension appliquée à l’oscillateur piézo-électrique est
inférieure à celle appliquée à l’oscillateur en mode imagerie (Main
Drive Amplitude). Le non respect de cette procédure peut entraîner
la destruction de la pointe.

VORSICHT: Um mögliche Beschädigung der Meßspitze zu vermeiden,

vergewissern Sie sich, daß der Wert der Interleave Drive Amplitude
nicht wesentlich größer ist, als der Main Drive Amplitude, ehe Sie
den Interleave Mode aktivieren.

• When using Amplitude Detection, variations in Drive Amplitude affect sensitivity and
image contrast as well as signal-to-noise ratio. This is because changes in the oscillation
amplitude change the slope of the amplitude vs. frequency curve, and hence the
effective sensitivity; see Figure 15.3b. With phase detection and frequency modulation,
changes in amplitude produce no change in contrast, and results are thus more
reproducible than with amplitude detection.

Note: On some microscope models, there is a lowpass filter in the scanning

electronics that prevents fast switching of the Drive Amplitude between main
and Interleave scanning. This can interfere with very fast rates (> a few Hz).
The filter can be disabled easily; contact Veeco technical support for more
information.

266 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Magnetic Force Microscopy
Advanced MFM Operation

Setpoint

For the most reproducible results, it is best to use a consistent setpoint. In LiftMode, the total tip-
sample distance htot is the sum of the average tip-sample distance in TappingMode hT, and the lift
scan height hlift (see Figure 15.3b). In TappingMode, the average tip-sample distance hT is equal to
the oscillation amplitude, which is determined by the setpoint and the amplitude sensitivity of the
tip. MESPs typically have an amplitude sensitivity of approximately 25nm/V.

Large variations in setpoint can change the total tip-sample distance in LiftMode, sometimes with
visible results in the magnetic image. For this reason, reproducible results are most easily obtained
by using consistent setpoints. Note that a lift scan height of 0nm still gives a mean tip-sample
distance of hT in LiftMode.

Figure 15.3b Tip Height and Oscillation Amplitudes (TappingMode & LiftMode)

Lift Pass

TappingMode Pass
htot =
hlift
hT + hlift

hT

The relationship between setpoint voltage and oscillation amplitude is known as the sensitivity. Its
value can be determined with Force Calibration (see Chapter 13). For 225µm MFM cantilevers,
the sensitivity is typically in the range 20-25nm/V. The exact value depends on the position of the
laser spot on the cantilever, the cantilever geometry, and the particular instrument. A 1V Setpoint
typically corresponds to hT ~14-18nm.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 267

Magnetic Force Microscopy
Installation of the Electronics Modules

15.4 Installation of the Electronics Modules

15.4.1 Phase Extender Module

The Extender is installed using 37-to-37 pin ribbon cables between: 1) the NanoScope III or IIIA
SPM controller and the Extender Electronics Module; as well as 2) from the FM / Extender to the
microscope. A hardware change is also required; the main electronics backplane board at the rear of
the microscope must be swapped out (this may be done by either the customer or a factory
representative). For more information, contact Veeco.

The phase box is equipped with a slider switch for switching internal electronics between
Dimension-series and MultiMode SPM signals. This switch may be accessed through a hole on the
underside of the box as shown below:

Figure 15.4a Phase Box

Dimension

MultiMode

For Dimension-series SPMs, always set the switch to Dimension. Use a pencil to access the switch
through the hole.

CAUTION: Do not insert a conducting object (e.g., screwdriver) into the Phase
Extender box while it is energized.

ATTENTION: Ne pas insérer d’ objet conducteur (par exemple: un tournevis)

dans le boîtier d’extension de phase (Phase Extender Box) quand
celui-ci est sous tension.

VORSICHT: Stecken Sie keine leitfähigen Teile (zum Beispiel Schraubenzieher)

in die Phase Extender Box, während diese eingeschaltet ist.

268 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Magnetic Force Microscopy
Software Setup Configuration (Phase, Quadrex or NSIV)

Important Points

1. Extender-compatible microscope electronics are required to permit operation of the phase

detection extender option. Standard electronics on these microscopes require hardware
upgrades. Consult Veeco for details.

2. Turn off the power to the NanoScope controller whenever connecting or disconnecting the
Extender.

15.4.2 Quadrex Extender

The Quadrex Extender connects to a NanoScope IIIa in the same way as the Phase Extender
described above, and has similar hardware requirements. Quadrex operation requires NanoScope
software version 5.12 or higher.

15.4.3 NanoScope IV

NanoScope IV has the Quadrex electronics integrated in to the design and requires no modification
or additions for MFM.

15.5 Software Setup Configuration (Phase, Quadrex or

NSIV)
1. Select di > Microscope Select to display the Microscope Select dialog box (see Figure
15.5a).

Figure 15.5a Microscope Select Dialog Box

012

2. Click the Edit button to open the Equipment dialog box.

3. Select the appropriate Controller.

4. Select the appropriate Extender.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 269

Magnetic Force Microscopy
Troubleshooting

Note: This step is not necessary for NanoScope IV.

5. Click the Ok button when complete.

15.6 Troubleshooting

15.6.1 MFM Image Verification

The procedure described above should produce a good magnetic force gradient image of the
videotape sample. If there is a problem, check that the Interleave Mode is set to Lift, that Interleave
is Enabled and that the Scan Line is set to Interleave. Check also that the Interleave values of
Drive Amplitude and Drive Frequency are initially set equal to the main Scan Controls values.

15.6.2 Saturation in Amplitude Detection

If using amplitude detection, the magnetic force image can saturate (appear completely featureless)
if the Interleave Drive Amplitude is significantly different than the Drive Amplitude in the main
scan. Adjust the Interleave Setpoint to restore the image.

Note: The Interleave Setpoint has no physical effect in LiftMode since there is no
surface feedback during the lift pass.

15.6.3 Optical Interference

When using Amplitude Detection, optical interference may sometimes appear in the Lift
(magnetic force gradient) image when imaging highly reflective samples. Optical interference
appears as evenly spaced, sometimes wavy lines with ~1–2µm spacing superimposed on the lift
image. This occurs when ambient laser light (i.e., light passing around or through the cantilever,
then reflecting off the sample) interferes with laser light reflecting from the cantilever. Interference
can be alleviated by moving the beam spot up the cantilever away from the tip; one-third of the
cantilever length works well. The adjustment can be refined by carefully moving the beam spot
laterally a small distance on the cantilever while scanning until interference fringes are minimized.
Be careful not to move the beam off the cantilever or feedback may be lost.

Note: Optical interference is essentially eliminated by using phase detection or

frequency modulation.

270 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 16 Electric Techniques

This chapter describes how to perform two electric techniques: Electric Force Microscopy (EFM)
and Surface Potential. EFM is similar to Magnetic Force Microscopy (MFM) and shares many of
the same procedural techniques. Both modes utilize the Interleave and LiftMode procedures
discussed in previous chapters. Please read those chapters before attempting electric force
measurements.

Specifically, this chapter includes:

• Electric Techniques Overview: Section 16.1

• Electric Force Microscopy Overview: Section 16.1.1

• Surface Potential Imaging Overview: Section 16.1.2

• Electric Force Microscopy: Section 16.2

• Electric Force Microscopy Theory: Section 16.2.1

• Electric Force Microscopy Preparation: Section 16.2.2

• Electric Force Microscopy Procedures: Section 16.2.3

• Phase Detection: Section 16.2.4

• Frequency Modulation: Section 16.2.5

• Amplitude Detection: Section 16.2.6

• EFM Troubleshooting/Pointers: Section 16.3

• Use Low Setpoint When Tapping in Electric Field: Section 16.3.1

• Verify Electric Field at Surface: Section 16.3.2

• Fine Tune Lift Scan Height: Section 16.3.3

• Fine Tune Interleave Drive Amplitude: Section 16.3.4

• Optimize Tune in Vicinity of Surface: Section 16.3.5

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 271

Electric Techniques

• Optimize Tune in Interleave: Section 16.3.6

• If Voltage is Needed, Use Analog 2 When Possible: Section 16.3.7

• Try Uncoated Si Tip: Section 16.3.8

• Surface Potential Detection—Theory: Section 16.4

• Surface Potential Detection—Preparation: Section 16.5

• Applying Voltage to the Sample Directly: Section 16.5.1

• Surface Potential Imaging—Procedure: Section 16.6

• Troubleshooting the Surface Potential Feedback Loop: Section 16.6.1

272 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Techniques Overview

16.1 Electric Techniques Overview

There are two types of electric techniques used with the Dimension 3100: Electric Force
Microscopy (EFM) and Surface Potential Detection.

Electric techniques are similar to magnetic force microscopy (MFM) and share many of the same
procedural techniques. Electric techniques and MFM both use the Interleave and LiftMode
procedures. The two-pass LiftMode measurement allows the imaging of relatively weak but long-
range magnetic and electrostatic interactions while minimizing the influence of topography (see
Figure 16.1a). LiftMode records measurements in two passes, each consisting of one trace and one
retrace, across each scanline. First, LiftMode records topographical data in TappingMode on one
trace and retrace. Then, the tip raises to the lift scan height, and performs a second trace and retrace
while maintaining a constant separation between the tip and local surface topography.

Figure 16.1a LiftMode Principles

Electric Scope Data

3
(Interleave scan)

1
Topographic Scope Data
1521

2 (Main scan)

Electric Fields
1. Cantilever measures surface topography on first (main) scan.
2. Cantilever ascends to lift scan height.
3. Cantilever follows stored surface topography at the lift height above sample while responding to
electric influences on second (interleave) scan.

16.1.1 Electric Force Microscopy Overview

Electric Force Microscopy measures variations in the electric field gradient above a sample. The
sample may be conducting, nonconducting, or mixed. Since the surface topography (e.g. sharp
points on the surface concentrate the field gradient) shapes the electric field gradient, large
differences in topography make it difficult to distinguish electric field variations due to topography
or due to a true variation in the field source. The best samples for EFM are samples with fairly
smooth topography. The field source includes trapped charges, applied voltage, etc. Samples with
insulating layers (passivation) on top of conducting regions are also good candidates for EFM.

All standard Dimension Series SPMs are capable of EFM imaging using amplitude detection
techniques. By adding an Extender electronics module, you can use the Dimension system for
frequency modulation or phase detection with improved results (see Figure 16.1b). Frequency
modulation and phase detection has largely superseded amplitude detection. The Extender
electronics module is required for surface potential imaging, and is strongly recommended for
electric force microscopy.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 273

Electric Techniques
Electric Techniques Overview

Figure 16.1b Extender Electronics Module

If applying a voltage to the tip is desired, then the special electric cantilever holder is required
(model MMEFCH).

16.1.2 Surface Potential Imaging Overview

Surface potential imaging measures the effective surface voltage of the sample by adjusting the
voltage on the tip so that it feels a minimum electric force from the sample. (In this state, the
voltage on the tip and sample is the same.) Samples for surface potential measurements should have
an equivalent surface voltage of less than ±10V, and operation is easiest for voltage ranges of ±5V.
The noise level of this technique is typically 10mV. Samples may consist of conducting and
nonconducting regions, but the conducting regions should not be passivated. Samples with regions
of different materials will also show contrast due to contact potential differences. Quantitative
voltage measurements can be made of the relative voltages within a single image. This method
requires the Extender Electronics Module and version 3.1 or later of the NanoScope software.

274 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

16.2 Electric Force Microscopy

16.2.1 Electric Force Microscopy Theory

Electric Force Microscopy is analogous to standard MFM, except that gradients being sensed are
due to electrostatic forces. In this method, the cantilever is vibrated by a small piezoelectric element
near its resonant frequency. The cantilever’s resonant frequency changes in response to any
additional force gradient. Attractive forces make the cantilever effectively “softer,” reducing the
cantilever resonant frequency. Conversely, repulsive forces make the cantilever effectively “stiffer,”
increasing the resonant frequency. A comparison of these force additives is shown in Figure 16.2a.

Figure 16.2a Comparison of Attractive and Repulsive Forces

∆F0

Amplitude
Frequency
Attractive gradient equivalent to additional spring in tension attached
to tip, reducing the cantilever resonance frequency.

∆F0
Amplitude

Frequency

Repulsive gradient equivalent to additional spring in compression attached

to tip, increasing the cantilever resonance frequency.

Changes in cantilever resonant frequency are detected in one of the following ways:

• Phase detection (with Extender Electronics Module only)

• Frequency modulation (with Extender Electronics Module only)

• Amplitude detection (not recommended due to artifacts)

All of the above methods rely on the change in resonant frequency of the cantilever due to vertical
force gradients from the sample. Figure 16.2b shows a diagram of how the Extender electronics
module provides signal enhancement and feedback allowing gradient detection. The best
candidates for electric field gradient imaging are samples that have large contrasts in the electric
force gradient due to material differences or regions at substantially different potentials. For other
samples having rough surface topography or small voltage variations, this technique may be
undesirable because topographic features appear in the LiftMode image.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 275

Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Figure 16.2b Diagram of Extender Electronics Module for EFM

Cantilever Deflection Signal
Photodiode Signal
Conditioning Amplitude Signal
RMS Detector
Signals to
NanoScope
Phase Signal
Phase Detector

Servo Controller
Reference
Laser Signal (feedback loop
Beam adjusts oscillation
frequency until
phase lag is zero)
Frequency
Control lines Frequency Signal

High Resolution
Oscillator
Photodetector
Tapping Oscillator Signal
Piezo
Extender Electronics Module

Sample

In many cases, you must apply a voltage to the tip or sample to achieve a high-quality image.
Various methods for applying voltages to the tip and sample are included in the sections that follow.
Samples with permanent electric fields may not require voltage application.

16.2.2 Electric Force Microscopy Preparation

This section explains how to apply a voltage to the tip or sample to generate electric fields. If the
sample has a permanent electric field which does not require the external application of voltage, the
steps below are not required and you can proceed to Section 16.2.3.

Setting Jumper Configurations

To apply voltage to the tip or sample, you may need to make minor changes to the jumpers on the
microscope’s backplane and the toggle switches on the Extender Electronics Module (if equipped).
Original jumper configurations and jumper changes are dependent on the microscope and the
desired measurements. The section Jumper Configurations Without Extender Electronics:
Section provides jumper configuration instructions for basic microscope models operating with
and without the Extender Electronics Module.

The backplane board used with Dimension Series SPMs is shown below in Figure 16.2c. There is a
header supplied with jumpers at the center of the board. For non-EFM applications and Surface
Potential operation, leave or return jumpers to their original positions.

276 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Figure 16.2c Microscope Backplane

HEADER &
JUMPERS

Instructions for Reconfiguring Jumpers

Carefully examine the jumper configuration figures in the following pages and identify which
jumper configuration is correct for your application. If the configuration you choose differs from
the configuration as shipped from the factory, follow the instructions below. Refer to Figure 16.2e
and Figure 16.2j for examples of factory jumper configurations.

1. Turn off the NanoScope controller and unplug the power cable from the microscope’s
electronic box.

2. Remove the back panel on the microscope’s electronic box.

3. Locate header and jumpers per Figure 16.2c on the main electronics backplane.

Note: Jumper systems without the Extender Electronics Module should appear as
shown in Figure 16.2e; whereas jumper systems with the Extender Electronics
option should appear as in Figure 16.2j.

4. Reconfigure jumpers on the backplane header using the appropriate jumper configuration.

5. After correctly configuring the backplane jumpers, replace the cover on the electronics box.

6. Plug the power cable back into the microscope.

7. Turn on the NanoScope controller.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 277

Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Setting Analog 2 in the Software

If you have chosen a configuration where Analog 2 applies to the tip or sample, you must enable
Analog in the software. The Analog 2 parameter appears in both the Feedback Controls and
Interleave Controls panels.

Note: For Version 4.23 and lower, Analog 2 appears only in the Feedback Controls
panel.

Instructions for Enabling Analog 2 in Software

1. Select Di > Microscope Select > Edit > Advanced, and set Analog 2 to User defined.

2. Click OK to exit both dialog boxes.

Note: For software versions 4.23 and lower, select Microscope > Calibrate >
Detector to display the Detectors Parameters window. Switch the Allow in
attenuation field to Disallow.

Instructions for Disabling Analog 2 in Software

1. Select Di > Microscope Select > Edit > Advanced, and set Analog 2 to Atten switch.

2. Click OK to exit both dialog boxes.

Note: Remember to set Allow in attenuation to Allow when finished. For all other
configurations it should be left on Allow.

278 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Setting the Extender Electronics Box

1. For systems with an Extender Electronics Box, locate the two toggle switches on the
backside of the Extender Electronics Box (see Figure 16.2d).

2. Verify that they are toggled as shown in Table 16.2a.

Figure 16.2d Toggle Switches on Extender Electronics Module

Tip or Sample
Mode Voltage

FM/Phase Gnd/Surface Potential

To
Surface Potential Analog 2
Sc ope
To Nano
Mi
cro
sco
pe

Table 16.2a Extender Electronics Module Toggle Switch Settings

Mode Tip or Sample Voltage

GND/
Surface
FM/Phase Surface Analog 2
Potential
Potential
EFM with
Analog 2
biasing tip or x x
sample
EFM in all
other configu- x x
rations
Standard
Operation x x

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 279

Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Jumper Configurations Without Extender Electronics

As shipped from the factory, the jumper configuration on a Dimension Series system without the
Extender Electronics Module appears as shown in Figure 16.2e below. This configuration connects
both tip and sample to ground.

Figure 16.2e Normal Jumper Configuration

Sample Chuck Ground/Bias

Sample Chuck Tip

Analog 2
AFM Tip
Ground

Gain Select Sample

Unused

STM Signal (from Dimension head)

Auxiliary D (to NanoScope III controller)

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

280 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Analog 2 Voltage Applied to the Tip (No Extender Electronics)

The jumper configuration in Figure 16.2f connects the Analog 2 signal from the NanoScope III
controller (± 12 VDC range) to the tip. Remember to enable the Analog 2 voltage line as described
in Section 16.2.2.

Figure 16.2f Jumper Configuration for Application of Analog 2 Voltage to Tip

Sample Chuck Ground/Bias

Tip
Sample Chuck

Analog 2 Analog 2
Sample
AFM Tip
Ground

Gain Select

Unused

STM Signal (from Dimension head)

Auxiliary D (to NanoScope III controller)

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 281

Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Analog 2 Voltage Applied to the Sample (No Extender Electronics)

The jumper configuration in Figure 16.2g connects the Analog 2 signal from the NanoScope III
controller (± 12 VDC range) to the sample chuck. Remember to enable the Analog 2 voltage line as
described in Section 16.2.2.

Figure 16.2g Jumper Configuration (Application of Analog 2 Voltage to Sample)

Sample Chuck Ground/Bias
Tip
Sample Chuck

Analog 2
Sample
AFM Tip
Ground

Gain Select Analog 2

Unused

STM Signal (from Dimension head)

Auxiliary D (to NanoScope III controller)

Ground

Ground Indicates jumpers

282 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

External Voltage Source Applied to the Tip (No Extender Electronics)

In some cases, it may be advantageous to use voltages greater than 12 V, or to use a pulsed power
supply. If an external source of voltage is to be applied to the tip, configure jumpers as shown in
Figure 16.2h.

Figure 16.2h Jumper Configuration for Applying External Voltage to Tip

>10 MW

(+) (-)
Sample Chuck Ground/Bias
External Voltage
Source
Sample Chuck

Analog 2 Tip
+
AFM Tip
Ground

Gain Select

V
Unused Sample
–
STM Signal (from Dimension head)

Auxiliary D (to NanoScope III controller)

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

Place a current-limiting resistor (e.g., 10–100MΩ) in series with the external voltage supply as
shown to protect the tip and sample from damage. You may also use current-limited power supplies.
Connect voltage leads to pins on the header using soldered, push-on connectors. Do not solder leads
directly to the header pins, as the heat may cause damage and/or make jumpering the pins difficult.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 283

Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

External Voltage Source Applied to Sample (No Extender Electronics)

In some cases, it may be advantageous to use voltages greater than 12 V, or to use a pulsed power
supply. If an external source of voltage is to be applied to the sample, configure jumpers as shown
in Figure 16.2i.

Figure 16.2i Jumper Configuration for Applying External Voltage to Sample

External Voltage
Source
(-) (+)
Sample Chuck Ground/Bias

>10 MΩ
Sample Chuck
Tip
Analog 2
AFM Tip
Ground

Gain Select
+
Unused
Sample V
STM Signal (from Dimension head) –

Auxiliary D (to NanoScope III controller)

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

A current-limiting resistor (e.g., 10–100 MΩ) should be placed in series with the external voltage
supply as shown to protect the tip and sample from damage. Current-limited power supplies may
also be used. Voltage leads should be connected to pins on the header using soldered, push-on
connectors. Do not solder leads directly to the header pins, as the heat may cause damage and/or
make jumpering the pins difficult.

284 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Jumper Configurations With Extender Electronics

CAUTION: Turn off the NanoScope controller and unplug the power cable
from the microscope electronic box before attempting to adjust
jumper configurations.

As shipped from the factory, systems with the Extender Electronics option should have an original
backplane jumper configuration as shown in Figure 16.2j. This configuration connects both the tip
and sample to the ground.

Figure 16.2j Normal Jumper Configuration with Extender Electronics Module

ChuckGround/Bias

Chuck

Analog 2 or Tip
Gnd/OSC + DC signal
AFM Tip
Ground

Unused

Sample
Unused

STM Signal

Auxiliary 2 Output

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 285

Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Analog 2 Voltage Applied to the Tip (With Extender Electronics)

Notice that the jumper configuration in Figure 16.2k connects the Analog 2 signal from the
NanoScope III controller (± 12 V range) to the tip, and is exactly the same as the jumper
configuration shown in Figure 16.2j, the standard configuration as shipped from the factory.
Remember to enable the Analog 2 voltage line as described in Section 16.2.2.

Figure 16.2k Jumper Configuration for Application of Voltage to Tip

Chuck Ground/Bias

Tip
Sample Chuck

Analog 2 or Analog 2
Gnd/OSC + DC signal
Sample
AFM Tip
Ground

Unused

Unused

STM Signal

Auxiliary 2 Output

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

286 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Analog 2 Voltage Applied to Sample (With Extender Electronics)

The jumper configuration in Figure 16.2l connects the Analog 2 signal from the NanoScope III
controller (± 12 V range) to the sample. Remember to enable the Analog 2 voltage line as described
in Section 16.2.2.

Figure 16.2l Jumper Configuration for Application of Voltage to Sample

Chuck Ground/Bias

Sample Chuck Tip

Analog 2 or
Gnd/OSC + DC signal
AFM Tip
Ground

Unused Sample
Analog 2
Unused

STM Signal

Auxiliary 2 Output

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 287

Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

External Voltage Source Applied to Tip (With Extender Electronics)

In some cases, it may be advantageous to use voltages greater than 12V, or to use a pulsed power
supply. If an external source of voltage is to be applied to the tip, configure jumpers as shown in
Figure 16.2m.

Figure 16.2m Jumper Configuration for Applying External Voltage to Tip

>10 MW

(+) (-)
Chuck Ground/Bias
External Voltage
Source
Chuck

Analog 2 or
Gnd/OSC + DC signal Tip
AFM Tip

+
Ground

Unused

Unused V
Sample
–
STM Signal

Auxiliary 2 Output

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

Place a current-limiting resistor (e.g., 10–100 MΩ) in series with the external voltage supply as
shown to protect the tip and sample from damage. You can also use current-limited power supplies.
Connect voltage leads to pins on the header using soldered, push-on connectors. Do not solder
leads directly to the header pins as the heat may cause damage or make jumpering the pins difficult.

288 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

External Voltage Source Applied to Sample (With Extender Electronics)

In some cases, it may be advantageous to utilize voltages greater than 12 V, or to utilize a pulsed
power supply. If an external source of voltage is to be applied to the sample, configure jumpers as
shown in Figure 16.2n.

Figure 16.2n Jumper Configuration for Applying External Voltage to Sample

External Voltage
Source
(-) (+)
Chuck Ground/Bias

>10 MW
Chuck
Analog 2 or Tip
Gnd/OSC + DC signal
AFM Tip
Ground

Unused

Unused +
Sample V
STM signal –
Auxiliary 2 Output

Ground

Ground Indicates jumpers

Place a current-limiting resistor (e.g., 10-100 MΩ) in series with the external voltage supply as
shown to protect the tip and sample from damage.You can also use current-limited power supplies.
Connect voltage leads to pins on the header using soldered, push-on connectors. Do not solder leads
directly to the header pins, as the heat may cause damage and make jumpering the pins difficult.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 289

Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

16.2.3 Electric Force Microscopy Procedures

Note: Amplitude detection is the only procedure described here that can be performed
without the Extender Electronics Module; however, this method is no longer
recommended (see Section 16.2.6).

1. Verify the following electric force microscopy preparation is complete:

a. Jumper Configurations

b. Extender Electronics Module Settings (see Figure 16.1b and Table 16.2a).

c. Analog 2 settings in software (see Page 278).

2. Electrically connect the sample by mounting it to a standard sample disk or stage using
conducting epoxy or silver paint.

3. Verify the connection is good (a poor connection introduces noise).

Note: If an external power supply connects directly to leads on the sample itself, it is
important to electrically isolate the sample from the stage. A piece of Kapton
tape covering the bottom of a sample puck works well.

4. Mount a metal-coated NanoProbe cantilever into the electric field cantilever holder.

Note: MFM-style cantilevers (225 µm long, with resonant frequencies around 70

kHz, models MESP and SCM-PIT) usually work well. It is also possible to
deposit custom coatings on model FESP silicon TappingMode cantilevers.
Make sure that any deposited metal you use adheres strongly to the silicon
cantilever.

5. Set up the AFM as usual for TappingMode operation.

6. Select View > Sweep > Cantilever Tune.

7. Follow the procedure below for the type of electric force imaging desired, Phase Detection,
Frequency Modulation or Amplitude Detection (see sections 16.2.4 through 16.2.6).

290 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

16.2.4 Phase Detection

Phase Detection is only available when the Extender Electronics Module has been correctly
configured into the system.

1. In the Auto Tune Controls window, set Start frequency and End frequency to appropriate
values for your cantilever (e.g., for 225µm MFM cantilevers, set Start frequency to 40kHz
and End frequency to 100 kHz).

2. Select Auto Tune.

Note: Two curves appear on the Cantilever Tune graph (see Figure 16.2o): the
amplitude curve in white (the solid line in Figure 16.2o), and the phase curve in
yellow (the dashed line).

Figure 16.2o Phase Detection Cantilever Tune

(Extender Electronics Module Installed)
Frequency Sweep

Note: The phase should decrease with increasing frequency and cross the center line
(0° point) at the peak frequency. The phase curve then correctly reflects the
phase lag between the drive and the cantilever response. Gradients in the
electric force cause a shift ∆F0 in the resonance frequency. Resonance shifts
also give rise to phase shifts ∆φ used to generate an image of the electric force
gradients; see Figure 16.2p.

Figure 16.2p Shift In Phase at Fixed Drive Frequency

180
∆F0
Phase (deg)

90
∆φ

0
Drive Frequency

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 291

Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

3. Quit Auto Tune.

4. Select Back to Image Mode.

5. Engage the AFM and make the necessary adjustments to obtain a good topography (Height)
image on Channel 1.

6. In the Interleave Controls panel set the Lift start height to 0nm, and Lift scan height to
100 nm. (The lift height can later be optimized).

7. Set the remaining Interleave parameters (Setpoint, Drive amplitude, Drive frequency,
Gains) to the main Feedback Controls values.

Note: This can be done by setting the flags to the left of each parameter to “off”
(grayed bullets).

8. Set the Channel 2 Data type to Phase and choose Retrace for the scan Line direction on
both Channel 1 and 2 images.

9. In the Interleave Controls panel set Interleave mode to Lift.

Note: For NanoScope software versions 4.23 and lower set Interleave scan to Lift and
switch Interleave mode to Enable in the Interleave Controls panel.

10. Set the Channel 2 Scan line to Interleave to display interleave data. This screen should now
display the cantilever phase change due to electrical force gradients from the sample in the
right image and topography in the left image.

Note: If Analog 2 is being used to apply voltage to the tip or sample, it is

recommended to apply it only during the Interleave line if feasible. Set Analog
2 to the desired voltage in the Interleave Controls panel. In the Feedback
Controls panel set Analog 2 to 0V.

Note: For NanoScope software versions 4.23 and lower: There is no separate
Analog 2 setting available in the Interleave Control panel, so Analog 2 must
be set in the Feedback Controls panel. For more details, refer to EFM
Troubleshooting/Pointers: Section 16.3.

11. Optimize the Lift scan height. For high-resolution, make the Lift scan height as small as
possible without crashing the tip into the surface.

292 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

16.2.5 Frequency Modulation

For more quantitative results, use frequency modulation (FM). This technique provides a direct
measure of change in resonant frequency sensed by the cantilever.

1. Follow all the steps required to perform phase detection EFM.

2. In the Interleave Controls panel, set the Input feedback to Frequency.

3. Switch the Data Type for Channel 2 to Frequency.

Note: It may be necessary to optimize the FM gains in the Other Controls panel to
properly track the shifts in resonant frequency (starting values: FM igain = 40
and FM pgain = 60).

Note: For NanoScope software versions 4.23 and lower, there is no Input feedback
setting; just switch the Data Type for Channel 2 to Frequency.

16.2.6 Amplitude Detection

Amplitude detection is inferior to the phase and frequency detection methods described previously
and is not the recommended technique for systems with an Extender Electronics Module.

Amplitude detection is the only technique available for systems without the Extender Electronics
Module. This section describes the differences in set up for amplitude detection. Changes in the
cantilever amplitude provide an indirect measure of shifts in the cantilever resonance frequency as
shown in Figure 16.2q.

Figure 16.2q Shift In Amplitude at Fixed Drive Frequency

∆F0
Amplitude

∆amplitude

Drive Frequency

1. Set the Drive frequency to the left side of the cantilever resonance curve, as shown in Figure
16.2r.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 293

Electric Techniques
Electric Force Microscopy

Figure 16.2r Amplitude Detection Cantilever Tune

Frequency Sweep

2. For maximum sensitivity, set the Drive frequency to the steepest part of the resonance
curve.

Note: As the tip oscillates above the sample, a gradient in the electric force shifts the
resonance frequency F0 (see Figure 16.2q). Tracking the variations in
oscillation amplitude while in LiftMode yields an image of the electric force
gradients. You may use either side of the resonance, though we have obtained
slightly better results on the low side, as shown in Figure 16.2q.

When using Amplitude Detection, optical interference may sometimes appear in the lift (electric
force) image when imaging highly reflective samples. Optical interference appears as evenly
spaced, sometimes wavy lines with about 1–2µm spacing superimposed on the lift image. This
occurs when ambient laser light (i.e., light passing around or through the cantilever, then reflecting
off the sample) interferes with laser light reflecting from the cantilever. Interference can be
alleviated by moving the beam spot up a little along the cantilever away from the tip; about one-
third of the cantilever length from the tip usually works well. On the Dimension head, the
adjustment can be refined by carefully moving the beam spot laterally on the cantilever while
scanning until interference fringes are minimized.

Note: Optical interference is essentially eliminated by using phase detection or

Frequency Modulation, available only with the Extender Electronics Module.

294 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
EFM Troubleshooting/Pointers

16.3 EFM Troubleshooting/Pointers

16.3.1 Use Low Setpoint When Tapping in Electric Field

If a voltage is applied during the main TappingMode line (as well as the interleave line) either
through Analog 2 or an external source, be careful to ensure proper operation. It is possible to enter
a mode in which the tip is never actually touching the surface, even though the amplitude setpoint is
being met. As the feedback moves the tip closer to the sample surface, the resonant frequency of the
tip is shifting (see Figure 16.2q). The closer the tip is to the surface, the larger the force gradient
and the more the resonant frequency shifts. It is possible for the resonant frequency to shift enough
so that the amplitude setpoint is met without the tip touching the surface. The tip can be a
significant distance away from the sample. The height image has comparatively poor resolution as
does the corresponding electric field gradient image. A significantly lower amplitude setpoint is
needed to really tap the surface in the presence of a strong electric field.

16.3.2 Verify Electric Field at Surface

If applying Analog 2 voltage to tip or sample to generate an E-field, set the phase channel Realtime
planefit to None. While in Scope Mode, vary the interleave Analog 2 value and verify that phase
signal shifts accordingly.

16.3.3 Fine Tune Lift Scan Height

Set the lift height to be as small as possible without hitting the surface, because lateral resolution of
EFM improves with decreased tip/sample separation. The minimum lift height depends on the
roughness of the sample, the difference between the amplitude setpoint and free air amplitude, and
the quality of the height image. Hitting the surface usually produces phase data with extremely high
contrast (either black or white pixels).

16.3.4 Fine Tune Interleave Drive Amplitude

Decrease the drive amplitude in the interleave line to further minimize the lift height. Be aware that
the S/N ratio also decreases with decreasing drive, so there are diminishing returns after a point.

16.3.5 Optimize Tune in Vicinity of Surface

Select View > Sweep > Cantilever Tune to open tune panel while engaged. A tip offset of 30nm
usually works well for smooth surfaces (if the tune has a noisy straight area in the middle instead of
a smooth peak, the tip is hitting the surface and a larger tip offset is needed typically for rough
surfaces). Adjust drive frequency to center of peak or just to the left. If phase data is to be collected
during the main line, zero the phase at the drive frequency.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 295

Electric Techniques
Surface Potential Detection—Theory

16.3.6 Optimize Tune in Interleave

Find optimal lift height. Use View > Sweep > Cantilever Tune to open the tune window while
engaged. Choose a Tip Offset equal to the Lift Height. Make any changes to the Drive frequency
and Drive phase to adjust the main tune (tip #3). In the Sweep Controls panel, select the
Interleave Controls button. Activate (green button) the Drive frequency and Phase, and Analog
2. With Analog 2 set to operating voltage, set the frequency to the center of the peak and zero the
phase.

16.3.7 If Voltage is Needed, Use Analog 2 When Possible

It is often very difficult to get a high quality TappingMode image with an electric field present.
Analog 2 has an important advantage over an external power supply – it can be used to create an
E field only in interleave and be set to 0V in the main line (> v4.31). Its range is limited to +/- 12V.

16.3.8 Try Uncoated Si Tip

EFM has been successful with a variety of tips, including standard Si tips with no metal coating
(fesp, tesp, ltesp). The Si is highly n-doped and is often conductive enough for EFM measurements.
Metal coatings make the tip less sharp, decreasing lateral resolution. The standard tips also seem to
give cleaner images over longer periods of time. There is likely a reduction in sensitivity to small
E fields with the decreased conductivity.

16.4 Surface Potential Detection—Theory

Note: Surface potential detection EFM is only possible using the one of the extender
modules or the NanoScope IV controller. This section does not apply to
microscopes which are not equipped with the Basic or Quadrex Modules, or the
NanoScope IV controller.

• The Basic Extender Module allows measurement of local sample surface potential. This
is similar to techniques called Scanning Maxwell Stress Microscopy and Kelvin Probe
Microscopy. Surface potential detection is a two-pass system where the surface
topography is obtained in the first pass and the surface potential is measured on the
second pass. The two measurements are interleaved, that is, they are each measured one
line at a time with both images displayed on the screen simultaneously.

A block diagram of the surface potential measurement system is shown in Figure 16.4a. On the first
pass, the sample topography is measured by standard TappingMode. In TappingMode the cantilever
is physically vibrated near its resonant frequency by a small piezoelectric element. On the second
pass, the piezo that normally vibrates the cantilever is turned off. Instead, to measure the surface
potential, an oscillating voltage V ac cos ωt is applied directly to the cantilever tip. This creates an

296 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Surface Potential Detection—Theory

oscillating electrostatic force at the frequency ω on the cantilever. The oscillating force has the
following amplitude:
dC
F = ------- V dc V ac
dz

dC
where ------- is the vertical derivative of the tip/sample capacitance.
dz

V dc = V tip – V sample , the dc voltage difference between the tip and the sample,

and V ac is the amplitude of the oscillating voltage applied to the cantilever tip.

Figure 16.4a Simplified Block Diagram of Basic Extender Module in Surface Potential Mode
Cantilever Deflection Signal
Photodiode Signal
Amplitude Signal
RMS Detector

Lock-in
Amplifier

Reference
Laser Signal Servo Controller Signals to
Beam NanoScope
(Feedback loop
To DC Voltage adjusts DC tip
Photo- Tip voltage to zero lock-
detector Tapping Sum
in signal)
Piezo AC

Potential Signal
Sample
High Resolution
Oscillator Signal Oscillator

GND
Basic Extender Module

The key here is that the force on the cantilever depends on the product of the ac drive voltage and
the dc voltage difference between the tip and the sample. And, when the tip and sample are at the
same dc voltage (Vdc=0), the cantilever will feel no oscillating force. The Basic Extender Module
uses this fact to determine the effective surface potential on the sample, Vsample. The Extender
determines the local surface potential by adjusting the dc voltage on the tip, Vtip, until the
oscillation amplitude becomes zero. At this point the tip voltage will be the same as the unknown
surface potential. The voltage applied to the cantilever tip Vtip is recorded by the NanoScope III to
construct a voltage map of the surface.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 297

Electric Techniques
Surface Potential Detection—Preparation

16.5 Surface Potential Detection—Preparation

It is often desirable to apply a voltage to one or more areas of a sample. This may be done in two
ways: by connecting a voltage to the sample mounting chuck, or by making direct contact to the
sample. In both cases, jumper configurations in the back panel of the microscope must be changed
to match the environment desired.

Note: In addition to any reconfigured jumpers, remember to connect the common or

negative terminal of an external power supply to the Dimension ground or the
AFM chassis.

1. Power down the NanoScope controller and turn off all peripherals. Unplug the NanoScope
power cable from the microscope’s electronic box.

2. Remove the back panel on the microscope’s electronic box.

3. Locate header and jumpers per Figure 16.2c on the main electronics backplane.

Note: Jumper systems without the Extender Electronics Module should appear as
shown in Figure 16.2e; whereas jumper systems with the Extender Electronics
option should appear as in Figure 16.2j.

4. Reconfigure jumpers on the backplane header using the appropriate jumper configuration.

5. After correctly configuring the backplane jumpers, replace the cover on the electronics box.

6. Plug the power cable back into the microscope.

7. Turn on the NanoScope controller.

8. Depending upon whether voltage is to be applied to the sample directly or indirectly,

reconfigure jumpers if indicated.

16.5.1 Applying Voltage to the Sample Directly

When voltage is applied directly to the sample, there is no need to reconfigure the jumpers. They
should remain jumpered as shipped from the factory (Figure 16.5a), and the sample should be
electrically insulated from the chuck.

Connect the external voltage source directly to the sample by attaching fine gauge wire to
appropriate contacts (e.g., on integrated circuits connect electrical leads directly to pads). For
normal operation, the sample chuck is held at ground. For Application Module-ready systems, the
bias is normally applied to the chuck. Be certain to carefully any electrical connections from the
sample chuck.

298 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Surface Potential Detection—Preparation

Figure 16.5a Normal Jumper Configuration with Extender Electronics Module

ChuckGround/Bias

Chuck

Analog 2 or Tip
Gnd/OSC + DC signal
AFM Tip
Ground

Unused

Sample
Unused

STM Signal

Auxiliary 2 Output

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

Analog 2 Voltage Applied to the Tip (With Extender Electronics)

Notice that the jumper configuration in Figure 16.2k connects the Analog 2 signal from the
NanoScope III controller (± 12V range) to the tip, and is exactly the same as the jumper
configuration shown in Figure 16.2j, the standard configuration as shipped from the factory.
Remember to enable the Analog 2 voltage line as described in Section 16.2.2.

Figure 16.5b Jumper Configuration for Application of Voltage to Tip

Chuck Ground/Bias

Tip
Sample Chuck

Analog 2 or Analog 2
Gnd/OSC + DC signal
Sample
AFM Tip
Ground

Unused

Unused

STM Signal

Auxiliary 2 Output

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 299

Electric Techniques
Surface Potential Detection—Preparation

Analog 2 Voltage Applied to Sample (With Extender Electronics)

The jumper configuration in Figure 16.2l connects the Analog 2 signal from the NanoScope III
controller (± 12V range) to the sample. Remember to enable the Analog 2 voltage line as described
in Section 16.2.2.

Figure 16.5c Jumper Configuration for Application of Voltage to Sample

Chuck Ground/Bias

Sample Chuck Tip

Analog 2 or
Gnd/OSC + DC signal
AFM Tip
Ground

Unused Sample
Analog 2
Unused

STM Signal

Auxiliary 2 Output

Ground

Ground Indicates Jumpers

A current-limiting resistor (e.g., 10–100MΩ) should be placed in series with the external voltage
supply to protect the tip and sample from damage. Current-limited power supplies may also be
used. Voltage leads should be connected to pins on the header using soldered, push-on connectors.
Do not solder leads directly to the header pins. Heat may cause damage and/or make jumpering the
pins difficult.

The sample should be electrically connected directly to the chuck or a standard sample puck using
conductive epoxy or silver paint as shown below:
Conductive Epoxy
or Paint

Sample

Sample Chuck

300 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Surface Potential Imaging—Procedure

16.6 Surface Potential Imaging—Procedure

1. Locate the two toggle switches on the backside of the Basic Extender box (Figure 16.6a),
then verify that they are toggled as shown in Figure 16.6a.

Figure 16.6a Toggle Switches on Back of Basic Extender Module

Tip or Sample
Mode Voltage

FM/Phase Gnd/Surface Potential

To
Surface Potential Analog 2 cope
To NanoS
Mi
cro
sc
op
e

Table 16.6a Basic Extender Module toggle switch settings for surface potential imaging.

Mode Tip or Sample Voltage

FM/Phase Surface GND/Surface Analog 2
Potential Potential
TappingMode
Contact AFM √ √
MFM
Surface
Potential √ √
Apply voltage
to tip or sam-
ple (Use for
electric field √ √
gradient
imaging; tun-
neling AFM)

Note: The toggle switch combination of Surface Potential = ON and Analog2 = ON

is not recommended and can produce erratic and undefined results.

2. Mount a sample onto the sample holder. Make any external electrical connections that are
necessary for the sample.

3. Mount a metal-coated NanoProbe cantilever into the standard cantilever holder. MFM-style
cantilevers (225µm long, with resonant frequencies around 70kHz) usually work well. It is
also possible to deposit custom coatings on model FESP silicon TappingMode cantilevers.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 301

Electric Techniques
Surface Potential Imaging—Procedure

Verify that all deposited metal adheres strongly to the silicon cantilever. SCM-PIT and
DSCM-PT also work well for surface potential.

4. Set up the AFM as usual for TappingMode operation.

5. Use Cantilever Tune: AutoTune to locate the cantilever’s resonant peak. Remember,
however, that the Extender box has been reconfigured so that the phase detection circuitry
now acts as a lock-in amplifier. Any procedures that are normally used to view or adjust the
phase signal will now affect the lock-in signal instead (see Figure 16.4a).

In this case, two curves should appear in the Cantilever Tune box: the amplitude curve in white
and the lock-in curve in yellow. In the event you find more than one resonance, select a resonance
that is sharp and clearly defined, but not necessarily the largest. It is also helpful to select a resonant
peak where the lock-in signal also changes very sharply across the peak. Multiple peaks can often
be eliminated by making sure the cantilever holder is clean and the cantilever is tightly secured.

6. Engage the AFM and make the necessary adjustments for a good TappingMode image while
displaying height data.

7. Select the Interleave Controls command. This brings up a new set of scan parameters that
are used for the interleaved scan where surface potential is measured. Different values from
those on the main scan may be entered for any of the interleaved scan parameter. To fix any
of the parameters so they are the same on the main and interleave scans, click on the green
bullets to the left of particular parameter. The green bullet changes to “off” (gray) and the
parameter value changes to the main Feedback Controls value. Set the interleave Drive
frequency to the main feedback value. Enter an interleaved Setpoint of 0V. Set Interleave
scan to Lift.

8. Enter an Interleave Controls Drive amplitude. This is the ac voltage that is applied to the
AFM tip. Higher Drive amplitude produces a larger electrostatic force on the cantilever and
this makes for more sensitive potential measurements. Conversely, the maximum total
voltage (ac + dc) that may be applied to the tip is ±10V. So a large Drive amplitude reduces
the range of the DC voltage that can be applied to the cantilever. If the sample surface
potentials to be measured are very large, it is necessary to choose a small Drive amplitude,
while small surface potentials can be imaged more successfully with large Drive
amplitudes. To start choose a Drive amplitude of 2V.

9. Set the Channel 2 image Data type to Potential. Set the scan Line direction for the main
and interleave scans to Retrace. Remember to choose the Retrace direction because the lift
step occurs on the trace scan and data collection occurs on the retrace.

10. Choose a Lift start height of 0nm and a Lift scan height of 50nm. The Lift scan height
can be readjusted later. Set the drive phase to -90°. This compensates for mechanical lay in
the cantilever as it responds to the oscillating electric field.

11. Switch Interleave mode to Enable to start LiftMode. Now, when the microscope completes
a topographic scan line (trace and retrace) the system turns off the TappingMode piezo and
switches the oscillator signal to the cantilever. The cantilever is driven electrostatically
according to the interleave Drive amplitude that has been selected. Also, when Potential is
selected as the Data type for the Channel 2 image, a feedback circuit is enabled in the
Extender box which adjusts the dc voltage on the tip to maintain the cantilever oscillation

302 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Electric Techniques
Surface Potential Imaging—Procedure

amplitude at zero. To do this, the feedback circuit uses the lock-in signal of the cantilever
oscillation and tries to keep this value at zero volts. As detailed in the Section 16.4 above,
when the cantilever oscillation amplitude has returned to zero, the dc voltage on the tip and
sample are the same. The NanoScope records the dc voltage applied to the tip and this signal
is displayed in the Potential data type.

12. Adjust the Input gains. The feedback loop that is used by the Basic Extender for surface
potential measurements is the same as the one used in Frequency Modulation (FM) for
magnetic and electric force gradient detection, as described previously. The feedback loop
should be tuned in a similar manner to the FM setup. Select Other Controls and adjust the
FM gains. Setting both Input igain and Input pgain to 15.0 is a good starting point. As with
the topography gains, the scan can be optimized by increasing the gains to maximize
feedback response, but not so high that oscillation sets in. The gains often need to be much
lower for potential measurements than for standard FM measurements. More information on
tuning the feedback loop is given in Section 16.6.1 below.

Note: In older versions of software, Input igain = FM-igain and Input pgain =
FM-pgain)

13. Optimize the lift heights. Set the Lift scan height at the smallest value possible that does not
make the Potential feedback loop unstable or cause the tip to crash into the sample surface.
When the tip crashes into the surface during the Potential measurement, dark or light streaks
appear in the Potential image. In this case, increase the Lift scan height until these streaks
are minimized.

14. Optimize the drive phase. When using cantilevers other than MESPs, OSCM-PTs and SCM-
PITs, the lag in the response of the cantilever to the electric force can be compensated for by
looking at the phase cantilever with the potential feedback loop enabled, but with the Input
igain and Input pgain set to zero. By looking at the phase in this state, you can see the input
to the potential feedback loop.

• To proceed with the drive phase adjustment, with the Input Feedback set to Potential,
set the Input igain and Input pgain to zero. Set one of the Data Channels to Phase,
and set Realtime Planefit to None. Select View > Scope Mode, and look at the position
of the phase data relative to zero. Begin adjusting the Drive Phase under the Interleave
Controls panel while observing the change in the phase signal. Find the point where the
phase is minimized. For MESPs, SCM-PITs and OSCM-PTs, this value should be near
0°. For TESPs, this value is normally around -45°. Once the minimum has been found,
subtract 90° from this value. This is the optimal value of drive phase shift to compensate
for lag in the cantilever to the electrical drive. Set the Input igain and Input pgain to
their previous values. Change the Data Type back to Potential, and proceed to collect
surface potential data as needed.

15. For large sample voltages or qualitative work, select Data type = Phase instead of Potential.
When the Extender box has been configured for surface potential measurements, the “phase”
signal is actually the cantilever amplitude signal, as measured by a lock-in amplifier. If the
feedback loop is not enabled by selecting the Data type = Potential, the lock-in cantilever
amplitude depends on the voltage difference between the tip and sample in a roughly linear
fashion. (The lock-in amplifier produces a voltage that is proportional to the cantilever
amplitude.) Qualitative surface potential images can be collected using this lock-in signal.
Also, if the sample has a surface potential that exceeds ±10V (greater than the range of the

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 303

Electric Techniques
Surface Potential Imaging—Procedure

“Potential” signal), it is possible to use the lock-in signal to provide qualitative images that
reflect the sample surface potential. To view the lock-in signal with the reconfigured
Extender box, select the Data type = Phase.

16.6.1 Troubleshooting the Surface Potential Feedback Loop

The surface potential signal feedback loop can be unstable. This instability can cause the potential
signal to oscillate or become stuck at either +10V or -10V. Here are some tips to see if the feedback
loop is working properly with no oscillation:

• Go into Scope Mode and look at the Potential signal. If oscillation noise is evident in
the signal, reduce the FM gains. If oscillations persist even at very low FM gains, try
increasing the Lift scan height and/or reducing the Drive amplitude until oscillation
stops. If the tip crashes into the surface the Lock-in signal becomes unstable and can
cause the feedback loop to malfunction. Increasing the Lift height and reducing the
Drive amplitude can prevent this problem. Once oscillation stops, the FM gains may be
increased for improved performance.

In Scope Mode, if the Potential signal is perfectly flat and shows no noise even with a small Z-
range, the feedback loop is probably stuck at ±10V. (You can verify this by changing the value of
Realtime planefit to None in the Channel 1 panel.) Reduce the Scan rate and watch the display
monitor which indicates the cantilever amplitude. On the topographic trace, the voltage displayed
should be the setpoint selected for the Main scan. On the Potential trace, this voltage drops close to
zero if the cantilever oscillation is being successfully reduced. If the value on the display monitor
instead goes to a large nonzero value, the feedback loop is probably not working properly. In this
case, try reducing the Drive amplitude and increasing the Lift scan height. It may also be helpful
to momentarily turn the Interleave mode to Disabled, then back to Enabled. Also try reducing any
external voltage that is being applied to the sample to stabilize the feedback loop, then turn the
voltage back up.

304 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 17 Calibration

This chapter provides detailed instructions for the fine calibration of Digital Instruments Dimension
SPMs. Specifically this chapter includes the following topics:

• SPM Calibration Overview: Section 17.1

• Theory Behind Calibration: Section 17.1.1

• Calibration References: Section 17.1.2

• Calibration Setup: Section 17.2

• Check Scanner Parameter Values: Section 17.2.1

• Align Calibration Reference: Section 17.2.2

• Set Realtime Parameters: Section 17.2.3

• Set Up Contact AFM: Section 17.2.4

• Check Sample Orthogonality: Section 17.3

• Measure Orthogonality: Section 17.3.1

• Adjust Sample Orthogonality: Section 17.3.2

• Linearity Correction: Section 17.4

• Adjust Mag0 and Arg: Section 17.4.1

• Adjust Fast mag1: Section 17.4.2

• Adjust Slow mag1: Section 17.4.3

• X-Y Calibration using Capture Calibration and Autocalibration: Section 17.5

• Capture Calibration: Section 17.5.1

• Autocalibration: Section 17.6

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 305

Calibration

• Fine-tuning for X-Y Calibration: Section 17.7

• Prepare System for Fine-tuning: Section 17.7.1

• Measure Horizontally at 440V Scan Size: Section 17.7.2

• Measure Vertically at 440V Scan Size: Section 17.7.3

• Measure Horizontally at 150 V Scan Size: Section 17.7.4

• Measure Vertically at 150V Scan Size: Section 17.7.5

• Change Scan angle and Repeat Calibration Routines: Section 17.7.6

• Calibrating Z: Section 17.8

• Engage: Section 17.8.1

• Capture and Correct an Image: Section 17.8.2

• Measure Vertical Features: Section 17.8.3

• Correct Z Sensitivity: Section 17.8.4

• Recheck Z-axis Measuring Accuracy: Section 17.8.5

• Calculate Retracted and Extended Offset Deratings: Section 17.8.6

306 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
SPM Calibration Overview

17.1 SPM Calibration Overview

Veeco employs a software-guided calibration procedure for all microscopes. The procedural details
of how calibration is executed using NanoScope software are beyond the scope of this document
and include proprietary methods exclusive to Veeco. A brief overview of the theory is available in
Section 17.1.1. The calibration is summarized in four basic steps outlined below.

• Orthogonality Adjustments: The orthogonality adjustment compensates for a possible

non-square scan pattern.

• Scanner Linearization: Adjust parameters for correcting the capacitive nature of the
piezo material and force the X-Y motion of the tip to move at a constant velocity.

• X, Y Calibration: Designate the software conversion values using one or both of the
following methods.

• Capture Calibration and Autocalibration: A built-in software routine

automatically controls the scanner while capturing a series of data files. The data
files are then used to “teach” the software the actual distance that the scanner
moved. This process creates a customized set of conversion values that will be used
to convert the known signals to a metric scale.

-or-

• Fine Tuning: Manually test and adjust X-Y sensitivity and derating values to within
1% accuracy. The conversion values that scale the scanner motion are confirmed, or
are adjusted if necessary to within 1%. These same values should be adjusted by the
customer as the scanner ages due to use. A scanner will typically lose 10-20% of it’s
scan range over the first year of typical use. The scanner will then become stable as
long as it is not damaged.

• Calibrate Z: Calibrate the Z scan tube to within 2%. A separate calibration “look-up”
table stores the conversion values for converting the control voltages applied to the Z
tube. These values are determined by scanning over a sample with a known depth.

Veeco recommends that you adhere to the following Calibration schedule (see Table 17.1a). After
initial installation, perform the Fine-Tuning X-Y Calibration (see Section 17.7) per the following
time schedule. If you find that the calibration measurements are more than 10% off at any point
during Fine-Tuning Calibration, stop and perform the Full X-Y Calibration Routine (see Section
17.2). For most applications it is sufficient to perform the Z calibration with the same frequency.
For critical height measurements we recommend monthly Z calibration.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 307

Calibration
SPM Calibration Overview

Table 17.1a Calibration Schedule

Calibration Routine Time Frame Frequency

Fine-Tuning Calibration First Year Every 3 months
(or Full X-Y Calibration if required) Subsequent Years Every 6 months
Z Calibration First Year Every 3 months
(for General Applications) Subsequent Years Every 6 months
Critical Height Measurements All Years Monthly

Note: Small Scan Size Calibration: If using scan sizes of 5µm or smaller, Veeco
recommends calibrating the scanner for small scan sizes. Contact Veeco for
further instructions.

17.1.1 Theory Behind Calibration

Scanners typically consist of a hollow tube made of piezoelectric material such as PZT (lead
zirconium titanate). Piezo materials contract and elongate when voltage is applied, according to
whether the voltage is negative or positive, and depending upon the orientation of the material’s
polarized grain structure. Scanners are used to precisely manipulate sample-tip movement in order
to scan the sample surface. In Dimension SPMs, the sample is stationary while the scanner moves
the tip.

Not all scanners react exactly the same to a voltage. Because of slight variations in the orientation
and size of the piezoelectric granular structure (polarity), material thickness, etc., each scanner has
a unique “personality.” This personality is conveniently measured in terms of sensitivity, a ratio of
piezo voltage-to-piezo movement. Sensitivity is not a linear relationship, however. Because piezo
scanners exhibit more sensitivity (i.e., more movement per volt) at higher voltages than they do at
lower voltages, the sensitivity curve is just that—curved. This non-linear relationship is determined
for each scanner crystal and follows it for the life of the scanner. As the scanner ages, its sensitivity
will decrease somewhat, necessitating periodic recalibration.

The diagram below depicts scanner crystal voltage versus photodiode voltage (see Figure 17.1a). In
this instance, detector sensitivity is given as volt per volt, a parameter provided in the Force
Calibration screen.

308 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
SPM Calibration Overview

Figure 17.1a Scanner Crystal Voltage and Photodiode Voltage

Photodiode voltage

Laser

Photodiode
array

Cantilever

-220 VDC 0 VDC +220 VDC

Scanner

+3.0
Photodiode Voltage

0
Detector Sensitivity

-3.0

-220 0 +220
Scanner Voltage

The Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner function displays the Scanner Calibration dialog box,
allowing users to enter the sensitivity of their scanner’s X-Y axes. Sensitivity is measured in terms
of lateral displacement for a given voltage (nm/volt). In addition, the NanoScope software employs
various derating and coupling parameters to model scanners’ nonlinear characteristics. By precisely
determining points along the scanner’s sensitivity curve, then applying a rigorous mathematical
model, full-range measuring capabilities can be achieved with better than 1 percent accuracy.
Consider the sensitivity curve represented in Figure 17.1b.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 309

Calibration
SPM Calibration Overview

Figure 17.1b Scanner Sensitivity Curve

440 V

Voltage

150 V

0
0 Scanner Movement (nm)

This curve typifies scanner sensitivity across the full range of movement. The vertical axis denotes
voltage applied to the scanner. The horizontal axis denotes scanner movement. At higher voltages,
the scanner’s sensitivity increases (i.e., more movement per voltage applied). At zero volts, the
scanner is “motionless.” Plotting each point along the curve describes a second-order, exponential
relationship which provides a rough approximation of scanner sensitivity.

However, because piezo materials exhibit hysteresis, their response to increasing voltage is not the
same as their response to decreasing voltage. That is, piezo materials exhibit “memory,” which
causes the scanner to behave differently as voltages recede toward zero. The graph below represents
this relationship (see Figure 17.1c).

Figure 17.1c Effect of Nonlinearity and Hysteresis

001

To produce the sharp, linear movements (triangular waveform) required for accurate back-and-forth
scanning, it is necessary to shape the applied voltage as shown on the top graph in Figure 17.1d.
Moreover, the applied voltage must compensate for scan rate and scan size. As scan rate slows, the
applied voltage must compensate for increased memory effects in the piezo material. As scan size is
decreased, the piezo exhibits more linearity. These effects are further complicated by X-Y-Z
coupling effects (the tendency for one axis to affect movement in other axes).

310 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
SPM Calibration Overview

Figure 17.1d Scanner Voltage and Movement

Scanner
Voltage

Scanner
Movement

Time

Through rigorous quality control of its scanner piezos, Veeco has achieved excellent modeling of
scanner characteristics. Two calibration points are typically used for fine-tuning: at 150 and 440
volts. A third point is assumed at 0 nm/volts. These three points yield a second-order sensitivity
curve to ensure accurate measurements throughout a broad range of scanner movements.

Because scanner sensitivities vary according to how much voltage is applied to them, the reference
must be thoroughly scanned at a variety of sizes and angles. The user dictates, via the software, the
distance between known features on the reference’s surface and a parameter is recorded to
compensate the scanner’s movements. The X, Y and Z axes may be calibrated in any sequential
order; however, the linearization adjustments must be performed before any calibrations are
attempted (see Section Note:). Otherwise, calibrations will be undone by the linearity adjustments.

Note: Check the SPM’s measuring accuracy periodically to ensure that images are
dimensionally represented within acceptable limits of error. If measuring
accuracy is critical, or if environmental factors (e.g., humidity, temperature)
impact the SPM significantly, this may require a quick check at the start of each
imaging session. Establish a three-month service schedule for maintenance and
calibration.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 311

Calibration
Calibration Setup

17.1.2 Calibration References

As described above, each scanner exhibits its own unique sensitivities; therefore, it is necessary to
precisely measure these sensitivities, then establish software parameters for controlling the scanner.
This task is accomplished with the use of a calibration reference (see Figure 17.1e).

Figure 17.1e Silicon Calibration Reference

200nm deep

10µm 10µm

A calibration reference consists of a silicon substrate having a regular series of pits, each 200nm
deep, which is plated with platinum. Pits are spaced apart on 10µm centers. Other similar surfaces
are available with different dimensions. Atomic-scale calibrations are generally carried out with
mica or graphite, which exhibit very regular atomic lattices. Calibration references serve as the
primary tool by which SPMs are calibrated. They serve as measuring sticks with which to gauge
scanner displacement for a given voltage.

The SPM should be capable of measuring a calibration reference with an accuracy of 2 percent or
better while scanning at the maximum Scan size setting. Using fine calibration techniques, it is
possible to calibrate the SPM with even greater accuracy.

17.2 Calibration Setup

17.2.1 Check Scanner Parameter Values

1. If the system's original scanner parameters are deleted, copy the scanner parameters from the
software CD shipped with every system. Individually purchased scanners are shipped with a
head/scanner disk containing backup files or a hard copy of the scanner parameters.

2. In the event that files are not found, fax or call Veeco for scanner calibration records.

312 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Calibration Setup

17.2.2 Align Calibration Reference

1. Load the silicon calibration reference into the SPM.

2. Align the reference with the microscope scanner so that the tip scans parallel to the
reference’s features with the Scan angle set at 0 degrees (see Figure 17.2a).

Figure 17.2a 0 Degrees Scan Angle

Scan Angle = 0°

3. Align the reference within approximately 2º of perpendicularity to the scan axes.

17.2.3 Set Realtime Parameters

1. Set parameters in the control panels to the following values:

Panel Parameter Setting

Scan Controls Scan Size 440 V
X offset 0.00 nm
Y offset 0.00 nm
Scan angle 0.00 deg
Scan rate 2.44 Hz
Number of samples 256
Slow scan axis Enabled
Z limit 440 V
Other Controls Units Volts
Channel 1 Data type Height
Z range ~ 20 Va
a. Adjust the Z range parameter to obtain the best contrast.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 313

Calibration
Check Sample Orthogonality

17.2.4 Set Up Contact AFM

1. Set the AFM mode to Contact.

Note: The microscope can be calibrated using STM; however, this example utilizes
contact AFM.

2. Set the Scan angle to 0 degrees.

3. Adjust Realtime parameters to obtain a good-quality, maximum Scan size image (440V). Set
the Scan rate to 2.44 Hz and the Number of samples parameter to 256.

4. With the sample engaged, check the scanning line relative to the reference’s features; the
scan should be orthogonal to the pits on the reference.

5. If the reference requires rotation, Withdraw and rotate the sample to improve orthogonality
between sample and scan line.

6. Repeat until features are oriented orthogonally with the scan frame.

17.3 Check Sample Orthogonality

Check the sample scan for orthogonality along both the X- and Y-axes. If the scan is aligned along
one axis of the scan but not another, it may be necessary to adjust the microscope’s Orthogonality
parameter in the Scanner Calibration panel.

17.3.1 Measure Orthogonality

1. To measure a captured image’s orthogonality, view it using the Offline > View > Top View
function.

2. On the display monitor, select the Angle command and use the mouse to draw a cursor
between the edges (or centers) of widely spaced pits (see Figure 17.3a).

Figure 17.3a Non-Orthogonal and Corrected, Orthogonal Image

314 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Check Sample Orthogonality

Note: In Figure 17.3a, pits align with the vertical (slow) axis but skew with the
horizontal (fast) axis. The angle should be measured with the vertex near the
center of the image and the vertices in the upper-right or lower-left quadrant.
The angle displays on the white status bar at the bottom of the display monitor.

3. Use the mouse to drag the cursor until it is oriented correctly then read the angle off the status
bar. If the angle differs by more than a half degree, a correction is required; otherwise, move
on to the next step.

17.3.2 Adjust Sample Orthogonality

1. Click Realtime > Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner to access the Scanner Calibration
panel. The Orthogonality parameter is displayed on the bottom-right corner of the panel.

2. Enter the difference between 90º and the angle measured in the Top View image.

Note: For example, if the angle measured in the Top View image was 92.5º, enter a
value of -2.5º in the Orthogonality parameter.

3. Click OK to exit the Scanner Calibration panel

4. Capture another image and re-measure the angle.

5. Repeat correction of Orthogonality until the scanned image shows less than 0.5º of error.

Note: After a major change to the orthogonality parameter, you may need to
physically realign the calibration standard to the image frame.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 315

Calibration
Linearity Correction

17.4 Linearity Correction

For applications which demand good linearity, the following procedure can be used to optimize the
linearity correction parameters for individual scanners. As discussed previously, linearity correction
is especially important for long-range scanners.

17.4.1 Adjust Mag0 and Arg

1. Select Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner to display the Scanner Calibration dialog box.

2. Set the mag0 and arg values while noting the scan beginning and ending.

Note: When Line direction is set to Trace, the beginning of the fast scan is on the
left, as indicated by the arrow base. Because the display monitor screen itself is
not linear, use the Realtime Zoom box to check mag0 and arg.

Note: When viewing up or down scans, check the image against itself, not the
residual image from the previous scan. Be careful to compare only the part of
the scan drawn since the last parameter change.

Adjust Fast Mag0

1. After engaging, click on Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner to open the Scanner
Calibration window. As parameters values are changed, the effects will be seen on the
display monitor.

2. Move the mouse cursor to the display monitor and select Zoom Out to produce a box whose
size and position can be changed by alternate clicks on the left mouse button.

3. Adjust the box until it is about one-third the size of the scan.

4. Click once on the right mouse button to set the box, free the cursor, and move to Execute.

Note: Clicking twice will execute a Zoom, which you do not want to do.

5. Select Fast mag0, the first scanner parameter to modify.

6. Move the zoom box to the start of the fast scan (on the left if the Line direction is set to
Trace).

7. Move and size the zoom box until the beginning third of the scan's features are exactly
aligned with the zoom box.

Note: The beginning third of the scan is the standard for judging almost all of the
linearity values. Ignore the set of features near the edges of the scan since these
may be distorted slightly.

8. Move the zoom box to the end third of the scan.

316 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Linearity Correction

9. Align one side of the zoom box with desired features and observe how the other side aligns
with the features under it.

10. Compare the beginning third of the scan to the features in the end third of the scan. If the
features are too large to fit an equal number inside the zoom box, decrease the Fast mag0
value. If the features are too small, increase the Fast mag0 value. Change Fast mag0 by
about 0.1 to 0.3 units at a time.

11. The entire scan axis is affected each time a parameter changes, so after every change, resize
the zoom box at the beginning third of the scan and compare again with the end third.

Figure 17.4a Fast Scan Linearization: Mag0

Mag0 Too Large Mag0 Too Small

Adjusting Fast arg

1. Once the beginning third of the scan is equal to the end third, check to see if the center needs
adjusting.

2. If the center features are too large for the box, decrease the Fast arg value. If the center
features are too small, increase the Fast arg value. Change args by 0.2 to 0.5 units at a time.

3. Changes affect the entire scan, so continue to resize the zoom box after each change.

4. After an adjustment in Fast arg is made, Fast mag0 may need readjusting. Repeat Fast
mag0 adjustment procedure until the rulings are evenly spaced across the Fast-axis.

Figure 17.4b X Scan Linearization

Center Compressed Center Expanded

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 317

Calibration
Linearity Correction

5. After setting Fast mag0 and Fast arg, insert the values for Slow mag0 and Slow arg. These
values serve as close starting points before adjusting the slow linearities.

Adjusting Slow Mag0

1. Follow the same instructions as for Fast mag0.

2. After a parameter change, wait until a new third of a scan begins before setting new
parameters and resizing the zoom box.

Note: Setting the slow linearities requires a lot of time.

3. Move the resized box to the end of the scan and prepare to measure the end promptly.

Note: You may type in a new parameter value before the scan starts again.

Note: Be careful not to confuse scan top and bottom with beginning and ending, as
the scan direction alternates.

4. Adjust the zoom box to fit the beginning third of the scan and check against the end third.

5. If the features of the end third are too large for the box, decrease the parameter. If the
features are too small, increase the parameter.

Note: Compare only parts of the current scan, not the previous scan.

Figure 17.4c Y Scan Linearization

Center Compressed Center Expanded

318 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Linearity Correction

Adjusting Slow arg

1. Follow the same instructions for Fast arg.

2. Adjust the zoom box to fit the beginning and ending of the scan, then check the center.

3. If the features in the center are too large, reduce the Slow arg value. If the features in the
center are too small, increase the Slow arg value.

4. After adjusting Slow arg values, check if Slow mag0 requires readjusting.

5. Repeat the procedure for adjusting Slow mag0 until the rulings are evenly spaced along the
slow axis.

17.4.2 Adjust Fast mag1

Initial Adjustment

1. For initial adjustment, click OK to close the Scanner Calibration window.

Note: Selecting Cancel resets parameters to default values when the box is opened.

2. Change the Scan size to 150V.

3. Select View > Scope Mode.

4. On the display monitor, select Dual Trace. If the two scope traces do not overlap, Fast mag1
needs adjusting.

5. On the Scan Controls panel, select Slow scan axis. When tall features appear on the scope
trace, press the keyboard right or left arrow key to switch the Slow scan axis to Disabled.

6. Select Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner to open the Scanner Calibration box.

7. Select Fast mag1.

8. Use the left and right arrow keys to change the value until the two traces align.

Note: The yellow retrace line will shift in the same direction as the arrow.

9. When done, click OK to close the Scanner Calibration window.

10. Set Slow scan axis back to Enabled.

11. Select View > Image Mode.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 319

Calibration
Linearity Correction

Fine Adjustment

Initial adjustment is usually adequate; however, if more precision is desired, use the following fine
adjustment techniques to adjust Fast mag1.

1. Use the same procedure for adjusting Fast mag0.

2. As before, set the Zoom box for the beginning of the scan and then check the ending.
Because the scan is small, use a Zoom box up to one-half as large as the scan.

3. If the end of the scan is larger than the beginning, reduce the Fast mag1 value. If the end is
too small, increase the value of Fast mag1.

17.4.3 Adjust Slow mag1

1. With the Scan size set to 150V, select Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner.

2. Select Slow mag1 and input the value from Fast mag1.

Note: For medium-sized scanners (C to F), further adjustments should not be

necessary. The Slow mag1 value is usually 100-120 percent of the Fast mag1
value.

3. If more precision is desired, adjust Slow mag1 using the same procedure for adjusting Slow
mag0.

4. Set the Zoom box for the beginning of the scan and then check against the ending. Because
the scan is small, use a Zoom box up to one-half as large as the scan.

5. If the end of the scan is larger than the beginning, decrease the Slow mag1 value. If the end
is too small, increase the value of Slow mag1.

6. Wait one complete frame with the new value before readjusting the Slow mag1 value.

7. Check the final result by capturing an image and checking it with the Offline > Modify >
Zoom window. The scanner is now ready for calibration of the X and Y parameters.

320 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
X-Y Calibration using Capture Calibration and Autocalibration

17.5 X-Y Calibration using Capture Calibration and

Autocalibration

17.5.1 Capture Calibration

Scanners are calibrated by setting parameters in the NanoScope software using the Capture
Calibration command. The basic calibration procedure using version 5.XX software and a 10-
micron calibration reference (see Figure 17.1e) is described below.

1. With the Scan rate set to 2.44 Hz and Number of samples parameter to 256, a full Capture
Calibration requires approximately 70 minutes.

Note: Increasing the Number of samples or decreasing the Scan rate significantly
increases the required time.

2. Using the mouse, click on Realtime > Capture > Calibration. The Capture Calibration
dialog box lists twelve parameters used in the calibration procedure (see Figure 17.5a).

Figure 17.5a Capture Calibration Prompt

009

3. If this is a first-time calibration, or if the microscope’s calibration has not been checked
within the last three months, verify that all parameters are selected.

4. Click on CAPTURE to initiate the automatic calibration routine.

Note: The microscope begins an automatic series of scans on the reference which
require approximately one hour to complete. During each scan, the scanner
moves the piezo using carefully calculated movements. Many of these
movements are unusual, giving rise to a variety of images which do not
resemble the normal reference. For example, pits may resemble trenches and
features may be presented at various angles.

5. As each routine is executed, adjust the scan slightly to optimize the calibration image using
the Capture Control dialog box displayed on the control monitor throughout the calibration
routines (see Figure 17.5b).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 321

Calibration
X-Y Calibration using Capture Calibration and Autocalibration

Figure 17.5b Capture Control Prompt

010
Note: The capture status will begin at skip 2. The program skips the current scan plus
one more before capturing an image for later calibration. This allows hysteresis
and drift to settle out when the scan changes direction and size between images.

6. If the scan has not settled out by the time the capture status changes to On, click on SKIP to
increment the capture to skip 1, skip 2 or skip 3.

Note: Do not click on Abort unless you want to stop the entire Capture Calibration
program.

7. If portions of features are missing, or if the image is blank, click repeatedly on Adjust Y
Offset > Up or Down to adjust the scan until more of the features are imaged. Features
should extend across as much of the displayed image as possible (see Figure 17.5c).

8. Once the image is optimized, allow the software to capture the entire image without
disturbing it. The software automatically indexes to the next image. Once all calibration
images are obtained, the software prompts the user that it is finished.

Figure 17.5c Improved Calibration Image

28.37 µm

Partial Calibration Image Improved Calibration Image

Note: After the first four images with the diagonal stripe pattern are captured, you can
leave the system unattended while the program continues to completion. Some
of the following images appear stretched in one dimension; however, this is
normal.

322 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Autocalibration

9. Go to the Capture directory where all Capture Calibration files are saved.

10. Select Offline > File > Browse or click on Browse to review all Capture Calibration files.

11. Verify that all calibration images contain features spanning the full width and height of the
image frame (see the right image in Figure 17.5c).

12. Recapture all images unsuitable for calibration. Record the file name extensions for all
unusable files (e.g., .cxy, .dyy), then delete the files.

13. Re-engage on the reference surface and select Capture Calibration.

14. Verify that the file name prefix is identical to that of the usable files. Remove the “x” from all
file name extensions (except for the unusable file names recorded in Step 12).

15. Finally, click on Capture to recapture the selected files.

17.6 Autocalibration
After the Capture Calibration routine is completed, the user measures surface features contained
within each image and enters their dimensions into the software. The software compares its
estimates with the actual (user-entered) dimensions to make final corrections. This portion of
calibration is carried out using the Offline > Utility > Autocalibration command.

To utilize the Offline > Utility > Autocalibration command, do the following:

1. Select one of the desired captured calibration images in the Capture directory.

2. Select the Offline > Utility > Autocalibration command. The control monitor will display
the X-Y Piezo Calibration dialog box (see Figure 17.6a).

Figure 17.6a X-Y Piezo Calibration Prompt

011

3. Verify that the file name prefix assigned to the captured files from the Capture Calibration
routine is correct.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 323

Calibration
Autocalibration

4. For normal calibration, verify that all parameters are selected in the dialog box, then click on
Calibrate to execute the routine.

Note: The software sequentially presents various calibration images on the display
monitor while prompting the user to draw either a vertical line or a horizontal
line. The control monitor simultaneously displays various dialog boxes (one for
each image), requesting the user to enter a distance.

5. Use the mouse to draw a line on the image. Draw the line to span as many features as
possible, preferably connecting similar edges (see Figure 17.6b).

Figure 17.6b Vertical Calibration Line

Autocalibration

Draw a Vertical Line

In this example illustrated in Figure 17.6b, a line is drawn from the bottom edge of one feature to
the bottom edge of another feature four rows away—a distance of 40µm. The control monitor
simultaneously displays a dialog box for entering the distance indicated by the white line (see
Figure 17.6c). The distance displayed in the box (in this example, 35.95µm) is the software’s
estimate of the length of the line drawn on the image based on current calibration values. If the line
length is different from the value shown, change the value to reflect the correct line length. (In this
example, the user would enter a value of 40.)

Figure 17.6c Calibration Line Distance Prompt

013

6. Enter the distance covered by the white line drawn on the image. If a 10-micron reference is
employed, like portions of features are spaced 10µm apart (e.g., between bottom edges, left
sides, etc.).

Note: Measure features without regard to how they appear in calibration images.
Features may be represented with stretched, distorted, or angled appearances

324 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Autocalibration

due to the unusual movements employed during Capture Calibration

scanning. Regardless, features are separated by the same (e.g., 10µm) spacings.

7. Continue drawing lines and entering measured distances until all Capture Calibration
images are measured. When the software is finished, it prompts the user that it is done.

If Capture Calibration and Autocalibration routines are completed correctly, the SPM is
calibrated within 1-2 percent accuracy over most of the scanner’s measuring range. To obtain still
better accuracy, the SPM can be fine-tuned to obtain maximum measuring accuracy. This is
accomplished through the use of calibration parameters discussed in Section 17.7.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 325

Calibration
Fine-tuning for X-Y Calibration

17.7 Fine-tuning for X-Y Calibration

Fine-tuning is usually performed at two Scan size settings: 150V and 440V. Both horizontal and
vertical measurements of sample features are made, then compared with actual distances. Based
upon this comparison, computer parameters are fine-tuned. To fine-tune your SPM for maximum
X-Y measuring accuracy, review the procedure below.

17.7.1 Prepare System for Fine-tuning

1. Set the Scan size parameter on the Scan Controls panel to the maximum value (440V).

2. Verify that the Scan angle is set at 0.00 degrees.

3. Mount a calibration reference in the SPM and begin imaging. This may consist of a generic
(e.g., 10-micron, silicon) reference, or a sample having features of known dimensions (e.g.,
grating, etc.).

4. Optimize the image quality.

Note: Your calibration and fine-tuning procedures are no better than the procedures
and references used. Choose both carefully.

17.7.2 Measure Horizontally at 440V Scan Size

1. Set the Scan size parameter on the Scan Controls panel to the maximum value (440V).

2. Verify that the Scan angle is set to 0.00 degrees.

3. Engage the surface.

4. Select two widely-spaced features on the sample image of known separation. Use the mouse
to draw a horizontal line between them (see Figure 17.7a). (For example, on a 10µm silicon
reference, draw the line from the left side of one pit to the left side of another pit as far away
as possible.) The screen will display the measured distance between pits next to the line.

326 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Fine-tuning for X-Y Calibration

Figure 17.7a Calibration Horizontal Reference

003
Draw a horizontal line.

5. Verify that the microscope’s measured distance agrees with the known horizontal distance. If
there is significant disagreement between the two, fine tuning is required; go to the next step.
If the displayed distance agrees with the known distance, skip to Section 17.7.4.

6. Based upon the results in the above step, divide the known distance by the distance displayed
next to the line drawn a few steps earlier.

Known distance between features

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SPM-calculated distance between features

7. Select the Realtime > Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner option. The Scanner
Calibration dialog box displays (see Figure 17.7b).

Figure 17.7b Scanner Calibration Panel

002

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 327

Calibration
Fine-tuning for X-Y Calibration

8. Multiply the quotient obtained above by the X fast sens value shown on the Scanner
Calibration panel.

9. Enter the new value. The new value adjusts the scanner’s fast axis to more closely match
calculated distances with actual feature distances. The new sensitivity setting takes effect as
soon as it is entered.

10. To save it to the computer’s hard disk, click on OK. This closes the Scanner Calibration
panel.

17.7.3 Measure Vertically at 440V Scan Size

1. Return to the image of the calibration reference.

2. Clear the horizontal line drawn earlier and click the right mouse button, or click on CLEAR.

3. Wait for at least three full scans to allow the piezo to stabilize then select two widely spaced
features and draw a vertical line connecting like portions of features (top edge-to-top edge,
etc.). The SPM displays the calculated distance between features.

4. Verify that the microscope’s calculated distance agrees with the known vertical distance. If
there is significant disagreement between the two, fine tuning is required; go to the next step.
If the displayed distance agrees with the known distance, skip to Section 17.7.4.

5. Using the results from the above step, divide the known distance by the distance displayed
next to the line drawn a few steps earlier.

Known distance between features

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SPM-calculated distance between features

6. Select the Realtime > Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner function to display the Scanner
Calibration dialog box.

7. Select the Y slow sens parameter.

8. Multiply the quotient obtained earlier by the Y slow sens value shown on the Scanner
Calibration panel.

9. Enter the new value to adjust the scanner’s slow axis to more closely match calculated
distances with actual feature distances.

10. To save the new parameter value, click OK.

328 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Fine-tuning for X-Y Calibration

17.7.4 Measure Horizontally at 150 V Scan Size

1. Verify that the Scan angle is set to 0.00 degrees, and that Units (Other Controls panel) is
set to Volts.

2. Set the Scan size parameter on the Scan Controls panel to one-third the maximum (150V).

3. Select two widely-spaced features on the sample image of known separation, then use the
mouse to draw a horizontal line between them.

Note: For example, on a 10µm, silicon reference, draw the line from the left side of
one pit to the left side of another pit as far away as possible. The microscope
displays the measured distance next to the line.

4. Verify that the microscope’s measured distance agrees with the known horizontal distance.

5. If there is significant disagreement between the two, fine-tuning is required; go to the next
step. If the displayed distance agrees with the known distance, skip to Section 17.7.5.

6. Perform fine-tuning adjustments using either trial and error or calculate the precise
correction (see Calculation Method).

Trial and Error Method

1. Select the Realtime > Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner function to display the Scanner
Calibration dialog box.

2. Select the X fast derate parameter or Y slow derate for Y-axis adjustment.

3. If the measured distance is less than the actual distance, decrease the X fast derate parameter
slightly or Y slow derate for Y-axis adjustment and re-measure image features.

4. Adjust deratings up or down until measurements accord with known feature distances.

Calculation Method

1. Select Realtime > Microscope > Calibrate > Scanner to display the Scanner Calibration
dialog box.

2. Record the X fast derate or Y slow derate value.

3. Perform the following calculation where s is the X fast sens or Y slow sens value; a is the
actual distance; d is the X fast derate or Y slow derate value you recorded in the above step;
m is the measured distance; and, v is the Scan size in volts:

s –  ---- ⋅ [ s – d ( 440 – v ) ]
a
m 
--------------------------------------------------------------
440 – v

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 329

Calibration
Fine-tuning for X-Y Calibration

4. Return to the Scanner Calibration dialog box.

5. Select the X fast derate or Y slow derate parameter.

6. Enter the new X fast derate or Y slow derate value calculated in Step 3. This adjusts the
scanner’s fast axis to more closely match calculated distances with actual feature distances.

7. To set the new parameter value, click OK.

17.7.5 Measure Vertically at 150V Scan Size

1. Select two widely-spaced features on the sample image of known separation.

2. Use the mouse to draw a vertical line between them.

Note: For example, on a 10µm, silicon reference, draw the line from the top edge of
one pit to the top edge of another pit as far away as possible. The microscope
displays the measured distance next to the line.

3. Verify that the microscope’s measured distance agrees with the known vertical distance. If
there is significant disagreement between the two, execute the fine tuning procedure; go to
the next step. If the displayed distance agrees with the known distance, no further calibration
is required.

4. Adjust the Yslow derate value by using one of two methods: 1) the Trial and Error Method
or 2) the Calculation Method described in Measure Horizontally at 150 V Scan Size:
Section 17.7.4 above.

17.7.6 Change Scan angle and Repeat Calibration Routines

• Change the Scan angle on the Scan Controls panel to 90º.

• Repeat steps above for the following parameters: Y fast sens, X slow sens, Y fast der,
and X slow der to ensure the scanner is calibrated properly along the X- and Y-axis for
scanning at 90º.

330 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Calibrating Z

17.8 Calibrating Z
In terms of obtaining accurate Z-axis measurements, it is generally not difficult to obtain accurate
X-Y calibration references; however, it is much more difficult to obtain accurate Z-axis results. Z-
axis calibration is very sample-dependent. It is difficult to control Z piezo dynamics because the Z-
axis does not move at a constant rate as the X- and Y-axes do during scanning. Furthermore, offsets
affect the piezo over a period of minutes. The silicon calibration references distributed by Veeco
have 200nm vertical features accurate to within ± 3 percent. The calibration reference is referred to
throughout the examples provided in this section. If you require greater accuracy, you must select
an appropriate calibration standard, and a metrology head employed with a Veeco Dimension Series
microscope.

Note: Refer to the label on your calibration reference sample to verify the
measurement employed is 200nm. Older systems may have samples with a
different Z value.

17.8.1 Engage

1. Set up the microscope for TappingMode imaging.

2. Select Engage under the Motor pop-down menu or click on the Engage icon.

3. Find a square pit and center the pit in the image using a Scan size of approximately 10µm.

4. Change the aspect ratio to 4:1, and verify that the image includes the pit along with portions
of the surrounding flat area (see Figure 17.8a).

Figure 17.8a Z Calibration Image

5. Verify that the Z Center Position value shown next to the image display is close to 0 volts
(±5 volts).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 331

Calibration
Calibrating Z

6. If the Z Center Position value is not close to zero, use the Realtime > Motor > Tip Up and
Tip Down buttons to adjust.

17.8.2 Capture and Correct an Image

1. Capture an image by selecting Capture in the Realtime menu, or click on the CAPTURE
icon. When the image is captured, go to the Offline screen.

2. Remove all tilt and scan line errata from the image by selecting Offline > Modify > Flatten
Manual.

3. Set the Flatten order parameter in the dialog box to 1.

4. Go to the display screen and draw a stopband over the pit as shown in Figure 17.8b.

Figure 17.8b Draw a Stopband

5. Click Execute to complete the flattening procedure.

6. Quit the dialog box.

332 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Calibrating Z

17.8.3 Measure Vertical Features

With the image corrected, its vertical features may now be measured. This is performed using
Depth analysis to utilize more data points.

1. Select the Offline > Analyze > Depth command.

Figure 17.8c Depth Analysis Screen

2. Go to the display screen and draw a cursor box surrounding the entire image (see Figure
17.8d).

Figure 17.8d Draw a Cursor Box

3. Click Execute in the display monitor’s top menu bar.

Note: Height data within the drawn cursor box displays on the monitor, showing two,
prominent peaks. These peaks correspond to two elevations on the surface: the
bottom of the pit and the top surface. There should be a line cursor on each
peak.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 333

Calibration
Calibrating Z

4. If the two peaks do not appear in the display, increase the Histogram filter cut off in the
Configure dialog box to 2-10nm.

5. Open the Configure dialog box by clicking the Configure button in the Depth dialog box
(see Figure 17.8e).

Figure 17.8e Z Calibration Configure Dialog Box

6. In the Data result dialog box located under the image on the display screen, check the Peak
to Peak value and record it for future reference.

7. Click Quit to exit the Depth dialog box.

Figure 17.8f Z Calibration Depth Dialog Box

334 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Calibration
Calibrating Z

17.8.4 Correct Z Sensitivity

If the depth of the pit on the 10µm silicon calibration reference deviates significantly from 200 nm,
correct the Z sensitivity parameter in the Z Calibration dialog box.

1. Transfer to the Z Calibration dialog box by selecting Realtime > Microscope > Calibrate
> Z.

2. Divide the actual depth of features (200nm for the 10µm calibration reference) by the
measured depth (indicated in Depth analysis by the Peak to Peak value):
200nm
----------------------------------------------
Peakto Peak value

3. Multiply this quotient by the Z sensitivity value in the Z Calibration dialog box, and replace
the former Z sensitivity value with the new result.

4. Click on OK to enter the new Z sensitivity value.

Note: The numerator value above (200nm) is for Veeco 10µm silicon reference. For
other calibration references, set the numerator equal to the depth of features
measured by Depth analysis. Ideally, calibration references should have
features with heights comparable to those being imaged and measured on
samples.

17.8.5 Recheck Z-axis Measuring Accuracy

After executing the steps above, recheck the Z-axis measuring accuracy of the SPM by repeating
the steps outlined above until you obtain accuracy of 1 to 2%.

17.8.6 Calculate Retracted and Extended Offset Deratings

Piezoelectric materials exhibit greater sensitivity at higher voltages. In the steps outlined above, the
Z-axis calibrates while scanning near the middle of its voltage range (i.e., Z Center Position ~ 0
V). In this section, you will calibrate the Z-axis piezo while extended and retracted to offset the
increased sensitivity.

1. Select Engage under the Motor pop-down menu or click on the Engage icon.

2. Use the Realtime > Motor > Tip Up button until the Z Center Position reads 100V (±5V).

Note: By using the motor to move the tip up, the feedback loop forces the Z-axis
piezo to extend to continue its tracking of the surface.

3. Refer to the steps above (Section 17.8.1 - Section 17.8.3) to determine the measured depth of
the calibration standard with a 100V Z Center Position.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 335

Calibration
Calibrating Z

4. Record the measured depth. If the depth measured by the extended piezo is off by more than
two percent, continue to Step 5 - Step 8.

Note: The measured depth should read 200nm on a Veeco 10µm silicon calibration
reference.

5. Select Realtime > Microscope > Calibrate > Z to display the Z Calibration panel

6. Click on the Extended offset der parameter.

7. Perform the following calculation:

200nm
(1 + current offset der) —1
meas. depth

For example, if the current offset equals 4% and the measured depth equals 175nm, then:
(1 + .04) 200nm — 1 = 0.19
175nm

8. Enter the new percent value from above (example was 19%) for the Extended offset der
parameter in the Z Calibration panel.

9. The procedure for calculating and setting the Retracted offset derating is exactly the same
as for the Extended offset der; however, the piezo must be retracted by 100V.To calculate
the Retracted offset der:

a. Use the Tip Down button in the Motor Control panel to retract the piezo.

b. Retract the Z Center Position to -100V.

c. Repeat Step 3 - Step 8 above.

336 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

Chapter 18 Maintenance, Troubleshooting
and Warranty

This chapter includes the following sections:

• Maintenance: Section 18.1

• Cleaning: Section 18.1.1

• Calibration: Section 18.1.2

• Changing the Illuminator Light Bulb: Section 18.1.3

• Fuse Characteristics and Replacement: Section 18.1.4

• Air Tables: Section 18.1.5

• Air Pressure: Section 18.1.6

• Air Table Feet: Section 18.1.7

• Optics Zoom System: Section 18.1.8

• Troubleshooting: Section 18.2

• Alarms and Error Messages: Section 18.2.1

• Common Problems: Section 18.2.2

• Warranty: Section 18.3

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 337

Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Maintenance

18.1 Maintenance
Generally, the Dimension 3100 system requires very little maintenance. A simple schedule of
cleaning and calibration check is usually sufficient.

Every three months:

1. Wipe down the major components of the instrument.

2. Clean the SPM stage.

3. Check the air table for proper level and isolation.

4. Check piezo calibration.

18.1.1 Cleaning

Major Components

The D3100 is essentially an assortment of electronic boxes. You should use the same care with this
equipment as with other laboratory instruments. Wipe the exterior of the system with clean paper
towels or a cloth dampened with water or alcohol. Dispose of wipes in an appropriately labelled
solvent-contaminated waste container.

SPM Stage

The surfaces of the granite base, sample chuck and chuck manifold should be wiped down with a
lint-free cloth dampened with acetone. To properly perform this:

1. Remove the scanner from the Z stage and place it in a safe place.

2. Remove the sample chuck by lifting it off of the chuck manifold.

3. Disconnect the manifold from the X stage assembly by removing the three Phillips head
screws that pass through the X flexure.

CAUTION: Do not remove the vacuum hoses on the side of the manifold! The
upper hose has a wire inside that will be damaged if the hoses are
pulled off.

4. Lift the manifold off of the granite base.

5. Wipe the top of the granite stage base.

338 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Maintenance

6. Wipe the top and bottom of the manifold.

7. Reconnect the manifold to the X stage assembly.

8. Wipe the underside of the sample chuck.

9. Place the chuck back on the manifold.

10. Dispose of wipes in an appropriately labelled solvent-contaminated waste container.

SPM Optics

The video objective on the left side of the stage should be periodically cleaned with a mild glass
cleaner or solvent such as acetone or alcohol.

Dimension Scanner

Laser and Photodiode Adjustment Screws

Dust and other contamination can cause the lubrication on the screws to thicken over time, thereby
causing the screws to become difficult to turn.

Note: We recommend you clean one screw at a time to avoid mixing up the screws.

1. Remove a screw from the scanner by turning it counterclockwise.

2. Wrap a pipe cleaner around the threads on the screw.

3. Dip the screw in acetone. Unscrew the screw in the pipe cleaner. The bristles on the pipe
cleaner are small enough to dig out the accumulated grease in the threads.

4. Clean the threaded insert in the scanner with a Q-tip dipped in acetone.

5. Lubricate the screw and the leading edge of the threaded insert with a small amount of silicon
vacuum grease.

6. Thread the screw back into the scanner head.

7. Repeat the cleaning procedure with the other three adjustment screws.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 339

Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Maintenance

18.1.2 Calibration

A description of the complete scanner calibration is located in a separate chapter. In general the
scanner’s calibration should be checked every three months. The main change in calibration will be
the loss of piezo sensitivity in the first year of use. This is an expected behavior. Loss of 10-15% of
the initial scan size is common.

Inspections and Procedures

Noise Test Procedure

Although a noise test is performed prior to shipment and during a new installation, this test is useful
to periodically test the instrument’s performance in your lab. Increases in the noise level of the
instrument are typically due to some sort of environmental change such as the introduction of new
equipment in proximity of the D3100 stage. The D3100 system itself is historically not prone to
degrade over time, although changes to the environment are a common source of noise.

Because the Dimension 3100 is sensitive to vibration, it is often a convenient tool for checking the
performance of the vibration isolation system. The following test can be performed under ambient
conditions or while an external noise source is applied to the floor.

1. Install a new cantilever and engage in TappingMode on a Si wafer (500nm to 1µm scan
size). You can also image the substrate of a silicon probe. The probe can be mounted to a
small sample AFM puck with double-sided tape and held to the stage magnetically. The only
limit to this sample is that the vacuum seal between the chuck and the sample won’t be
tested.

2. Set the Z limit to 55V (~1µm). Set the Samples/line to 512.

3. Set the gains as low as possible, while still maintaining a good image with visible surface
roughness. Do not lower the Integral and Proportional gain below 0.2; the LookAhead
gain should be 0.

4. Change the Scan size to 1nm and capture an image. The Scan rate is not important for this
Scan size. You can set the Scan rate to 10Hz to save time. If you have low frequency noise,
you may want to set the Scan rate to 2Hz so that you can see at least a few periods (longer
time base).

5. Perform a first order Flatten Auto. Then, run the roughness measurement. The RMS value
should be typically 0.5Å.

An easy way to analyze noise is to use the Section Analysis function. If you draw a line that is
perfectly horizontal, the one dimensional Fourier plot will show you what frequencies are
contributing to your noise. Remember that when the Scan size is this small, you no longer have an
image but rather a temporal graph of the Z displacement.

340 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Maintenance

18.1.3 Changing the Illuminator Light Bulb

You can change the illuminator light bulb when it burns out. The illuminator light bulb is the only
user-serviceable part inside the Dimension control box. Dimension 3100 systems ship with a spare
light bulb mounted within the Dimension control box back panel. Order a new illuminator bulb
from Veeco when the spare bulb burns out. Please note availability and shipping time may vary.

Figure 18.1a Change the Illuminator Bulb

1 Locate bulb mount

panel on back of
Dimension controller.

2 Remove 2 holding screws

from bulb mount panel.

3 Slide bulb mount

panel out.

4 Remove used bulb by 5 Pull spare bulb

unplugging bulb cable and lifting out and replace
bulb up and out of the bulb holder. into light socket.

1. Turn the Dimension control box off and unplug it from the power source.

2. Locate the bulb mount panel on the back of the control box. Allow the system to cool before
attempting to open the bulb mount panel.

3. Unscrew the two holding screws.

4. Slide the bulb mounting panel out.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 341

Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Maintenance

5. Remove the used bulb by unplugging the bulb cable and lifting the bulb up and out of the
bulb holder.

6. Pull the spare bulb (back bulb) out of the mount and place it into the holder. Do not touch the
inside of the bulb.

7. Plug in the light bulb cable.

8. Slide the bulb mount panel back and replace the holding screws.

9. Order another spare bulb from Veeco.

CAUTION: When you receive the new spare bulb, remove the power from the
Dimension Controller and wait for the bulb to cool down before
opening the bulb mount panel to place the new spare bulb in its
holder.

342 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Maintenance

18.1.4 Fuse Characteristics and Replacement

• NanoScope Controller: 6 fuses; 3 identical fuses in use and 3 spare fuses. The fuse
characteristics are silk-screened on the back of the NanoScope controller (see Table
18.1a).

Table 18.1a NanoScope Controller Fuse Characteristics

Fuse Selection
Line
Voltage
F1 F2 F3
100V 2.0A 800mA 800mA
120V 2.0A 800mA 800mA
220V 1.0A 400mA 400mA
240V 1.0 400mA 400mA
All Fuses: 250V, Time-lag, 5mm x 20mm

• Illuminator Circuit board: 2 fuses; one fuse is non-replaceable (281-000-024), while

the other fuse is replaceable and is shipped with a spare (see Table 18.1b).

• Vacuum Pump Board: 2 fuses; each has a spare (see Table 18.1b).

Table 18.1b Illuminator Circuit Board and Vacuum Pump Board Fuse Characteristics

Illuminator Max Time

Part Number Current Dimensions Other
Board Voltage Delay
100V 281-000-026 1.25A 5 x 20mm 250V Yes IEC
120V 281-000-032 1.00A 5 x 20mm 250V Yes IEC
240V 281-000-031 0.5A 5 x 20mm 250V Yes IEC

Vacuum Pump
Board
100V 281-000-030 0.25A 5 x 20mm 250V Yes IEC
120V 281-000-029 0.2A 5 x 20mm 250V Yes IEC
240V 281-000-028 0.125A 5 x 20mm 250V Yes IEC

Fuse Replacement Procedure

1. Remove all power from the system.

2. Remove the lid of the appropriate control box (4 screws).

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 343

Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Maintenance

3. Using a screwdriver, press the slot in the fuse holder and rotate the fuse a 1/4 turn counter-
clockwise.

4. Gently pull the fuse away from the board.

5. Carefully remove the replacement fuse and insert it in the fuse holder.

6. Using a screwdriver, press the slot in the fuse holder and rotate the fuse a 1/4 turn clockwise
until the fuse is secure.

7. Order another spare fuse from Veeco. Be sure to turn off all system power before placing the
spare fuse back in the holder location.

18.1.5 Air Tables

Veeco sells two different air tables with the D3100 system: VT-102 and VT-103. Both air tables are
manufactured by TMC™ corporation and are referred to in this section.

Having a properly installed air table is necessary for a properly operating AFM system. It is very
common to see periodic noise in the AFM data due to an under-inflated or improperly balanced air
table. It is important to check the air table when you move the instrument.

18.1.6 Air Pressure

The incoming air pressure should be 60-80PSI. The air table has a built in regulator that is preset
for optimum performance.

Note: Incoming pressure higher than 80PSI has not been proven to be harmful. It is
just not recommended.

18.1.7 Air Table Feet

The frame of the air table has four legs with feet that support the D3100 stage. The feet should be
lowered so that the air table is raised off of the wheels. Periodically check to make sure that the
weight of the air table is evenly distributed on all four legs. To do this, simply use the supplied
spanner wrench to slightly turn each of the feet in sequence. If the foot you are testing turns easily,
there is no weight pressing down on it. Readjust the feet so that each foot is supporting an equal
amount of weight.

344 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Maintenance

18.1.8 Optics Zoom System

The clutch in the zoom system can begin to slip after several years of use. The symptom of a
slipping clutch is an erratic change in the video magnification under use. A minor adjustment to the
tension of the clutch can restore proper operation. To tighten the zoom system clutch follow the
steps below.

1. Remove the black metal cover above the camera optics located on the left side of the stage
frame.

2. Locate the zoom motor positioned vertically on the side of the optics tube. Use the zoom
function in the locate tip software routine to see and hear the motor as it turns.

3. Watch the ring gear at the bottom of the zoom motor as it turns. If the video image is not
zooming smoothly then the clutch is not applying enough pressure to continuously move the
gear.

4. Locate the hex fitting on the brass collar just above the zoom gear.

5. Insert a hex wrench on the fitting to hold the collar from turning.

6. Tighten the clutch by tightening the nut below the ring gear.

CAUTION: Do not tighten the nut more than 1/8-1/4 turn. This is typically
enough additional tension to fix the problem.

7. Verify that the zoom optics work correctly and that the clutch still slips at the end of the
motors travel.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 345

Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Troubleshooting

18.2 Troubleshooting
The Dimension 3100 system is very reliable and generally will not need adjustment once properly
calibrated, nor is it likely to develop a problem due to use. In most cases any problems that occur
can be linked to some external event.

Some typical examples of such events are:

• Lighting storms that cause power transients can damage circuit boards.

• Fluid spills on electrical components can cause damage.

• Improper installation of the air table when relocating the instrument to a new room can
cause noise in the data.

• Improper signal cable installation when relocating the instrument can cause problems.

• After relocating the instrument to a new room, the data may exhibit noise. The room
itself may have excessive floor vibration or acoustic noise.

• Installing a new board other than what is needed to operate the instrument via the
computer can cause the software to not load correctly or a hardware conflict within the
computer system.

18.2.1 Alarms and Error Messages

Alarms

The D3100 stage controller will produce a high-pitched noise if it is tilted more than 45 degrees.
There are mechanical pumps that need to be kept level in order to properly work.

The D3100 stage controller alarm will also sound if the internal temperature exceeds 40°C. The
illuminator inside the controller can cause the inside temperature to rise beyond this point if the
ventilation to the controller is restricted. The air inlet screen on the front of the controller may
become clogged in a dusty environment.

Software Error Messages

• “Illuminator port timed out” – The serial port connected to the D3100 stage controller
is not connected or is not communicating properly.

• “Stage not initialized” – The serial port connected to the D3100 stage is not connected
or is not communicating properly

• “Stage controller error” – The serial port connected to the D3100 stage is not
communicating properly.

346 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Troubleshooting

• “Illuminator Error, Manual override is on” – The manual control on the front of the
D3100 stage controller is being used. Turn the illuminator manual control knob counter-
clockwise until a click sound is heard, indicating that it is switched off.

• “Bad data read from illuminator was 0,S.B. 80” – The D3100 stage controller power
is off. The power supply inside the D3100 stage controller is not working.

• “Warning focus position not updated” – You tried to move X-Y stage with no AFM
SUM signal.

• “Safety check failed SUM too low” – 2 Explanations:

• You tried to engage with no AFM SUM signal.

• You tried to move X-Y stage with no SUM signal.

• “The focus axis is at its limit” – The focusing objective is either fully extended or fully
retracted. This message will appear during the locate tip routine.

• “Warning: Sample clearance reduced! Unable to move past limit” – The focusing
objective reached the extended limit when moving to the locate tip position. This can
happen during STM use due to the lower tip location. The end of the STM probe should
protrude no more than 1mm below the end of the tip holder tube. This message can also
occur if the sample clearance is set to a very large value. The standard sample clearance
distance is 1000µm.

• “Motor axis is at limit” – The SPM (Z stage) is fully retracted. This can happen after
the stage is initialized. Ignore the message and lower the Z stage by using the Focus
Surface controls.

• “The tip location has been changed to an unsafe distance. If you proceed with this
change you will need to re-teach the tip replacement position.” – This warning
appears during the Locate Tip routine if the focusing objective has moved more than
300µm from the previous tip focus position. This is common when switching between
silicon and silicon nitride cantilevers due the thickness difference of their substrates.
The message will also appear when switching between AFM and STM probes. The
intent of this message is a safety check to warn you that you have moved the objective
unusually long distance. Select OK if you’ve changed to a different style of probe.

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 347

Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Troubleshooting

18.2.2 Common Problems

Bent stage flexures – The X or Y stage flexure can be accidentally bent if an object like a tool or
tweezers is left on the granite base and the X-Y stage is driven into it. Stage flexures can also
become bent due to improper shipping. The X-Y flexures are removed before a new system is
shipped for this reason. A bent stage flexure will cause noise in the image due to a vacuum leak
between the granite stage base and the chuck manifold. Bent flexures will also cause not repeatable
movement in the X-Y stage motion.

Optics Zoom system does not work smoothly – The clutch that couples the zoom motor to the
drive gear is slipping. Refer to Optics Zoom System: Section 18.1.8 of this chapter for instructions
on adjusting the clutch.

No Laser light from scanner – Possible Explanations:

• The software is not running.

• The microscope mode is set to STM in software.

• The scanner is tilted more than 45 degrees.

• A microscope other than a D3100 is selected in software.

No stage illumination – Possible Explanations:

• Manual override is on.

• Blown illuminator bulb. Refer to Section 18.1.3 for instructions on changing the
illuminator bulb.

• Blown fuse on illuminator circuit board. A spare fuse is provided next to the fuse holder.

No chuck vacuum – Possible Explanations:

• The fuse that powers the vacuum pump is blown. Verify that F1 on the main circuit
board in the stage controller is good. Replace with the spare fuse if it’s blown.

• The vacuum pump is bad.

• The air and vacuum hoses are not connected.

• One of the four screws on the chuck is missing. The center screw and the four small
Phillips screws plug various holes that direct the vacuum to the chuck.

Fluid spills – Fluid spills will cause numerous problems. The most common problem is that the
piezo electric element in the Dimension scanner can become permanently damaged. Avoid fluid
contact with the end of the scanner at all times.

Cables – The wires inside the cable connector on the Dimension scanner can be broken from the
21-pin plug. Disconnecting or connecting the scanner by pulling on the cable can cause this.

348 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Warranty

The scanner plug is very durable and typically does not fail due to use. Never connect or disconnect
the dimension scanner cable from the stage by pulling on the cable. Always connect and disconnect
the scanner by holding on to the plug.

18.3 Warranty
All new catalog-listed standard equipment sold and/or manufactured under Veeco labels is
warranted by Veeco to be free of defects in material and workmanship if properly operated and
maintained. This one-year warranty covers the cost of necessary parts and labor (including, where
applicable as determined by Veeco, field service labor and field service engineer transportation)
during the warranty period.

Warranty period takes effect upon date of shipment. Except as detailed below, these warranties
extend to parts which are components of standard catalog items and manufactured by persons other
than Veeco. The manufacturer warranty covers purchased equipment incorporated into any item
supplied by Veeco.

Expendable items, including but not limited to styli, lamps, and fuses, are specifically excluded
from the aforementioned warranties and are not warranted. All used equipment is sold on an “as is,
where is” basis without warranty, express or implied.

Equipment made or modified to purchaser specifications on special order shall carry the above
warranties with respect to material and workmanship, but shall be specifically excluded from any
other warranties, express or implied, including those related to performance specifications. Special
components shall only carry the original manufacturer warranties.

Warranty Claims

Veeco’s obligation under these warranties is limited to repairing or replacing at Veeco’s option
defective non-expendable parts. Veeco’s obligation shall not extend to defects that do not impair
service. No claim will be allowed for any defect unless Veeco has received notice of the defect
within thirty days following its discovery by purchaser.

Claims for Shipment Damage

No claim will be allowed for equipment damaged in shipment sold under standard terms of F.O.B.
Factory. Within thirty days of purchaser's receipt of equipment, Veeco must receive notice of any
defect which purchaser could have discovered by prompt inspection of equipment. In any event,
Veeco shall have the option of inspection at purchaser's premises or at Veeco’s plant before
allowing or rejecting the claim.

Documentation Feedback

Veeco is dedicated to the ongoing improvement of our products and technical documentation. If
you have any comments regarding this manual or any other Veeco documentation, please e-mail us
at: [email protected].

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 349

Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Warranty
Warranty

Warranty Eligibility

To be eligible for the above warranties, purchaser must perform preventative maintenance in
accordance with the schedule set forth in the manual provided. Veeco assumes no liability under the
above warranties for equipment or system failures resulting from improper operation, improper
preventative maintenance, abuse or modifications of the equipment or system from the original
configuration.

Note: This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied and
constitutes fulfillment of all of Veeco’s liabilities to the purchaser. Veeco does
not warrant that the system can be used for any particular purpose other than
that covered by the applicable specifications. Veeco assumes no liability in any
event, for consequential damages, for anticipated or lost profits, incidental
damages or loss of time or other losses incurred by the purchaser or any third
party in connection with systems covered by this warranty or otherwise.

Service

Field service is available nationwide. Service and installations are performed by factory trained
Veeco service personnel. Contact the Veeco Metrology sales/service office for prompt service.

Veeco Instruments Inc.

112 Robin Hill Road
Santa Barbara CA 93117
Attn.: Service Center

Phone: (805) 967-2700

Fax: (805) 967-7717

350 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Index

pre power-up (installation and service only)

28— 30
Symbols
software power-up 35
12
Chucks
. 248 vacuum 115
A Circuitry
Air Dimension 3100 microscope 8
Dimension 3100 controller 7 Color contrast 180
Aliasing 241 Color offset 180
Amplitude 146 Color table 180
Atomic Force Microscope (AFM) Computer
operator precautions 23 system overview 3, 4
sample precautions 26 Configurations
Average count 214 IS3K-2 2
B VT-102 2
Beamsplitter VT-103-3K 2
Dimension SPM head 11 Contact AFM
Bias 178 in fluids 149— 158
Bias Voltage 176, 183, 184 Contact Force 129, 232
Bimorph Resonant Frequency 236 Contact Information 350
C Contact Technical Publications 349
Calibration 305— 336 Control Station
computer 4
standard 312
Cantilever Dimension 3100 controller 6
fluid cell cantilever holder 13—14 input and display devices 3
standard cantilever holder 13— 14 keyboard 3
Cantilever Holder monitors 3
description 13— 14 mouse 3
fluid cell 13— 14 NanoScope IIIa controller 5
specifications 14 system overview 3— 7
standard 13— 14 trackball 3
Cantilever Tune 135— 138 Crash tip 118
Capture 180 D
Capture Calibration 212, 321— 323 Data type 127, 129, 146, 147, 263
Center Frequency 136 force modulation 239
Checklists Data type 178
power-up (installation and service only) 31
LFM 196
power-up (normal usage) 32
STM 182, 183

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 351

Index

Deflection 127 Force Calibration 129, 130, 206— 232, 308

Differential Signals 11 Capture 219
Dimension 3100 Controller Drive amplitude 216
air pump 7 Drive Frequency 216
illumination 7 Force Curve
power supply 7 adjustment 220— 226
system overview 2, 6 Force Modulation 233— 242
thermal hazard 6 edge effects 240
vacuum pump 7 operating procedure 235— 241
Dimension 3100 Microscope Electronics Box 7— principles of 235
8 Frequency Modulation
larger SPM mother board 8 with MFM 263
main SPM circuit board 8 Frequency Sweep 135, 166
two stepper-motor drive board 8 with MFM 261, 291— 292
vacuum power switch 8 Frictional Measurements See Lateral Force
Drive amplitude 148, 216, 238, 240, 241 Microscopy 195— 201
Drive frequency 136, 145, 166, 216, 238, Fuse Characteristics and Replacement 343
263 G
with MFM 259— 262 Graph range 215, 221
E H
ECAFM 149 Hazards
Edge Effects 241 Dimension 3100 controller 6
EFM 248— 253, 273— 296 labels 35— 36
Electric Force Microscopy See EFM 248 symbols 19
Electrical Hazard Head
symbol 19 beamsplitter 11
Electrochemical AFM 149 description 9— 13
Engage 125, 141, 171 detector mirror 11
force modulation 239 illustration 105
TappingMode 141, 171 laser diode adjustment knobs 10
Engagement laser diode stage 10
STM 178 laser spot detector screen 11
Equipment Damage packing for shipment 56
symbol 19 photodetector 11
Equipment Safety Applications 27 preamp board 10
Ergonomics
scanner piezo tube 11
overview 26
Height 127, 146, 147
F
Highpass 259
Feedback Gains
initial settings 128 Highpass Filter 129
Feedback type 183, 184 I
Fluid Cell Icons
description 13, 151 attention 19
Fluids electrical hazard 19
imaging in 149— 158 laser hazard 19
Focus Surface 148 lifting hazard 19
Force Cal mechanical crushing hazard 19
adjustment 224 NanoScope 34
Force Cal 220— 232 realtime 34

352 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Index

safety 19 Lift scan height 261

thermal hazard 19 Lift scan height 250, 251
Illumination Lift start height 261
Dimension 3100 controller 7 Lift start height 250
Input and Display Devices Lifting Hazard
computer 4 symbol 19
keyboard 3 LiftMode 248— 253
monitors 3 principles of 250
mouse 3 with MFM 258
trackball 3 Line direction 262, 316
Input attenuation 136, 166, 216 Line direction 196, 251
Installation
Log On 33
power-up 27— 31
Look Ahead gain 183
power-up checklist 31
Look ahead gain 128, 146
pre power-up checklist 28— 30
Lowpass 259
Integral gain 128, 144, 146, 241, 264
Lowpass 180
Integral gain 178
Lowpass Filter 129
STM 179
M
Interleave Controls 248— 253, 265, 265—
266 Magnetic Force Microscopy 255— 270
Lift scan height 251 Magnetic Force Microscopy See MFM 248
principles of 249 Maintenance 338— 342
Mechanical Crushing Hazard
L
operator precautions 24
Labels
laser warning 36 symbol 19
Laser MFM 248— 253, 273— 296
adjustable detector mirror 11 operating procedure 259— 264
beamsplitter 11 principles of 258
detector screen 11 resolution 264
diode stage 10 Microscope
photodetector 11 Dimension SPM head 9— 12
safety hazard 19 electronics 7— 8
symbol 19 preamp board 10
Laser Aiming precautions 23
with fluid cells 162 safety precautions 23— 25
Laser Diode Adjustment Knobs stage system 9
Dimension SPM head 10 vacuum power switch 8
Laser Diode Stage video zoom 14
Dimension SPM head 10 Mirrors
Laser Hazard adjustable detector mirror 11
laser warning label 36
Modify 180
symbol 19 Motor
Laser Spot Detector Screen withdraw 142
Dimension SPM head 11
Mouse 100
Lateral Force Microscopy 195— 201
N
Left Image 124 NanoScope
LFM
icon 34
principles of 195 NanoScope IIIa Controller
scan angle 197

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 353

Index

system overview 5 EFM 258

Number of samples 214 force modulation 234— 235, 242
O geometry 90— 92, 96— 97, 251
Objective LFM 198
optics and motors overview 9 MFM 258
video zoom 14 removal from substrates 93
Offset 136, 167 selection 125— 126
Operator Safety silicon 88— 93
diode laser 22, 23
silicon nitride 93—97
general safety warnings 20— 26
STM 177, 181
microscope precautions 23
tuning 135— 138, 165— 168
non-ionizing radiation 23 Property Damage
pneumatics 21, 22 symbol 19
qualified personnel 20 Proportional gain 128, 146, 241, 264
sample safeguards 26 Proportional gain 178
voltage 21 R
wiring 21, 22 Radiation
Optics operator safety 23
objective 9 Realtime
overview 9 icon 34
system overview 2 Retrace 144
zoom 14 Right Image 124
P RMS Amplitude 112
Parameters Rounding 259
show 122, 139, 169 Run Continuous, Probe menu 219
Password 33 Run Single, Probe menu 219
Personal Injury S
symbol 19
Safety 100
Photodetector
description 11 labels 35— 36
differential signals 11 mechanical crushing hazard 24
Dimension SPM head 11 microscope precautions 23
sum signal 11 power-up (installation and service only) 27—
Piezo 31
scanner 11 power-up (normal usage) 31— 32
Plot type 180 precautions 20— 26
Power sample safeguards 26
Dimension 3100 controller 7 software power-up 32— 35
power-up (installation and service only) 27— symbols 19
31 Safety Hazards
power-up (normal usage) 31— 32 attention 19
software power-up 32— 35 electrical 19
Preamp Board general operator safety 20— 26
Dimension SPM head 10 laser 19
Probe menu lifting 19
Run Continuous 219
mechanical crushing 19
Run Single 219
thermal 19
Stop 219
Safety Precautions 20— 26
Probe Tips 90— 97 Sample

354 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D

 Index

precautions 26 scanner 12
Samples scanner piezo tube 12
biological 149— 174 Spring Constant
chucks 70 specifications 125
handling 15 Stage Menu Commands
minimizing surface forces 224 focus surface 165
preparation 70, 114— 115, 153—154 initialize 35, 83
size 15 load new sample 72, 142
specifications 15 locate tip 73, 113
Scan angle 196, 197 move to (X,Y) 76
Scan direction 263 programmed move 79— 83
Scan rate 129, 144 set reference 77— 78
Scan size 129, 262 SPM parameters 85
Stages
Scan size 178
axis orientation 71
STM 179, 183
control electronics 341
Scan speed 241
Scanner laser diode stage 10
description 9 servo motors 9
linearity 316— 320 specifications 9
piezoelectric crystals 12 system overview 2
Scanner Calibration 316 X-Y stage 9
Scanner Piezo Tube Z stage 9
Dimension SPM head 11 STM
specifications 12 applications 176
Sensitivity 215 hardware 181
Service principles of 176, 180— 181
power-up 27— 31 Stop, Probe menu 219
power-up checklist 31 Sum Signal 11
pre power-up checklist 28— 30 Sweep graph range 238
Setpoint 129, 144, 147, 216, 241 Sweep width 136, 238
adjustment 221 Symbols
defined 129 attention 19
FM 239, 240 electrical hazard 19
Setpoint laser hazard 19
STM 179 lifting hazard 19
Show All Items 122, 139, 169 mechanical crushing hazard 19
Software safety 19
log on 33 thermal hazard 19
NanoScope icon 34 System Overview 2— 3
password 33 computer 3
power-up 32— 35 configurations 2
power-up checklist 35 Dimension 3100 controller 2
realtime 34 motorized positioning stage 2
stage initialization 35 optical microscope 2
user name 33 video image capture capability 3
Specifications
T
cantilever holder 14
TappingMode 131—232
samples 15

Rev. D Dimension 3100 Manual 355

Index

Thermal Hazard Z scan start 206, 213, 232

symbol 19 Z Stage 9
Tip crash 118 Zoom In 136, 167, 238
Tip Down 220, 222
Tip Holder 10
fluid 151
installation fixture 104
preparation 103— 106
STM 176— 177, 181
Tip Up 220
To 222
Trace 144
Trackball 100
Troubleshooting
cantilever tune plot looks bad 173
laser sum signal absent or weak 173
poor image quality 173
unable to locate particulate samples 174
U
Units 213, 214
User Name 33
V
Vacuum
Dimension 3100 controller 7
microscope vacuum power switch 8
Van der Waals Forces 253
Veeco Contact Information 350
Vibration
isolation table 57
Video Imaging
system overview 3
video zoom microscope 14
View
All Parameters 122, 139, 169
Image Mode 179
Scope Mode 179, 183
Voltage
general operator safety 21
W
Warranty 349
X
X offset 178
X-Y stage 9
Y
Y offset 178
Z
Z scan rate 229
Z scan size 206, 221, 232

356 Dimension 3100 Manual Rev. D